Case Planner - Cabnetware eSupport Member Login

Case Planner
Frame Version 8.0
Copyright 2005 PLANIT SOLUTIONS, INC.
Planit Solutions, Inc.
3800 Palisades Drive
Tuscaloosa, AL 35405
Office
Fax
Tech Support
Website
Email
(205) 556-9199
(205) 666-4474
(866) 675-6551
www.planitsolutions.com
[email protected]
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLANIT SOLUTIONS INC. (hereinafter "PLANIT SOLUTIONS") hereby grants to LICENSEE and LICENSEE
hereby accepts a nontransferable and nonexclusive license to use the software, including all documentation and
information relating thereto, any updates if provided hereunder and the encrypted authorization key (hereinafter
collectively called "software"), as listed above. This License is granted subject to the following terms and
conditions:
1. License - The Software licensed hereunder is the property of PLANIT SOLUTIONS and contains proprietary
information of PLANIT SOLUTIONS. LICENSEE may use the Software only in connection with LICENSEE'S
own operations and may not use it for third parties or for estimating the work of third parties. The Software can only
be used on a single computer with the authorization key provided hereunder. LICENSEE may not duplicate or copy
the authorization key. LICENSEE must keep possession of the authorization key and show it to PLANIT
SOLUTIONS upon request at any time to ensure compliance with this Agreement. LICENSEE may physically
transfer the Software from one computer to another provided that the Software is used on only one computer at a
time. LICENSEE may not copy the Software except as permitted hereunder without the prior written consent of
PLANIT SOLUTIONS; provided, however, that LICENSEE may make two copies of the diskette provided for
emergency backup purposes. The backup copies must include the copyright and proprietary notices provided
thereon.
2. License Fee - The license fee and all payments required of LICENSEE shall be detailed in an Invoice to be
provided to LICENSEE separately. All payments required of LICENSEE shall be made at PLANIT SOLUTIONS’
principal place of business at 3800 Palisades Drive, Tuscaloosa, Alabama 35405.
3. Title, Source Code, Copyrights - No title to or ownership of the Software or any copyright therein is transferred
hereby to LICENSEE. LICENSEE shall not receive any source code for any portion of the Software. LICENSEE
shall not distribute or provide copies of the Software or any portion thereof, including the authorization key, to
others to modify, adapt, translate, disassemble, reverse compile or create derivative works based on the Software.
4. Term - The License granted herein shall continue as long as LICENSEE retains the Software. LICENSEE may
terminate this License by returning the Software and all copies thereof, including the authorization key, to PLANIT
SOLUTIONS. PLANIT SOLUTIONS shall have the right to terminate this License if within ten (10) days after
written notice from PLANIT SOLUTIONS of a breach of this License. LICENSEE fails to correct the matter and to
comply with the terms hereof. LICENSEE agrees upon termination to return all copies of the Software, including the
authorization key, and to certify in writing to PLANIT SOLUTIONS that LICENSEE has discontinued its use of the
Software and has returned the Software and all copies thereof.
5. Confidentiality and Proprietary Rights - LICENSEE acknowledges that the Software is confidential and
proprietary to PLANIT SOLUTIONS. LICENSEE agrees that it shall maintain the Software in confidence and shall
not directly or indirectly disclose the Software to any third party or use the Software for its own benefit or for the
benefit of others except as permitted hereunder. The internal dissemination of any information related to the
Software by LICENSEE shall be limited to those employees of LICENSEE whose duties justify the need to know
such information and then only on the basis of a clear understanding by those employees of their obligation to
maintain the confidentiality of such information and restrict the use of such information. LICENSEE'S obligations
hereunder shall continue until five (5) years after LICENSEE ceases use of the Software and returns the Software
and all portions and copies thereof and provides PLANIT SOLUTIONS with certification that LICENSEE has
discontinued its use of the Software and has returned the Software and all portions and copies thereof. LICENSEE'S
obligations hereunder shall not extend to any portion of the Software which:
a. LICENSEE can establish by written documentation was known to it prior to disclosure by PLANIT
SOLUTIONS;
b. is now or hereafter comes into the public domain through no fault of LICENSEE; or
c. is disclosed to LICENSEE without restriction on disclosure by a third party who has the lawful right to
make such disclosure to LICENSEE and who did not obtain such information directly or indirectly from
PLANIT SOLUTIONS.
6. Survival of Obligation - LICENSEE'S obligations under Paragraph 5 shall survive any termination of this
Agreement.
7. Warranties - PLANIT SOLUTIONS warrants that it is the owner of the Software, has the right to grant the
License granted herein and that the Software will perform the functions set forth in the associated Users Manual for
a period of thirty (30) days from the date of delivery. PLANIT Solutions’ sole obligation under this warranty shall
be limited to use of its best efforts to correct any defects in the Software and supply LICENSEE with a corrected
version of such Software as soon as practicable after LICENSEE has notified PLANIT SOLUTIONS of such
defects. All notices required hereunder shall be in writing, addressed to PLANIT Solutions’ principal place of
business and all duties of PLANIT SOLUTIONS with respect to this License, warranty, or any other duty arising out
of or in connection with the sale of the Software will be performed by PLANIT SOLUTIONS at its principal place
of business at 3800 Palisades Drive, Tuscaloosa, Alabama 35405. PLANIT SOLUTIONS MAKES NO OTHER
WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE LICENSED
HEREUNDER. SPECIFICALLY AND WITHOUT LIMITATION PLANIT SOLUTIONS MAKES NO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. PLANIT
SOLUTIONS ALSO MAKES NO WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO ANY RESULTS OBTAINED BY THE
LICENSEE THROUGH USE OF THE SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT WILL PLANIT SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE
TO LICENSEE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE, ANY RESULTS OBTAINED BY USE, OR ANY INABILITY TO USE SUCH
SOFTWARE, OR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY RELATING TO SUCH USE, EVEN IF PLANIT
SOLUTIONS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITIES OF SUCH DAMAGES.
8. User Support Program - If LICENSEE accepts PLANIT Solutions’ User Support Program, fees for which will
be invoiced to LICENSEE on a periodic basis separately, PLANIT SOLUTIONS will use its best efforts to correct
any Software defect discovered by LICENSEE during the term of the User Support Program. In addition, all updates
and modifications to the Software Version shall be made available to LICENSEE so long as such program is in
effect.
9. Nonassignability - This Agreement and the Software licensed hereunder may not be assigned, sublicensed or
otherwise transferred by LICENSEE without PLANIT Solutions’ prior written consent.
10. Applicable Law - This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Alabama. Any action brought
under this Agreement shall be brought only in the State Courts of the State of Alabama located in Tuscaloosa
County.
11. Entire Agreement - This Agreement constitutes the entire Agreement between the parties with respect to the
subject matter hereof and any modifications of this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be signed by a duly
authorized representative of each party.
Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement, please call or write:
Planit Solutions Inc., 3800 Palisades Drive, Tuscaloosa, AL 35405, Tel: (205) 556-9199, Fax: (205) 556-7898
CASE PLANNER - FRAME VERSION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
Software License Agreement
Before You Install............................................................................................................................... 1-1
Security Key .......................................................................................................................... 1-1
Microsoft Windows Color and Resolution Settings............................................................... 1-1
Installing Cabnetware ........................................................................................................................ 1-2
Custom Installation................................................................................................................ 1-4
Network Installation............................................................................................................................ 1-5
Sharing of Program, Job and Parameter Files ..................................................................... 1-5
Separate Program Installation with Shared Job and Parameter Files.................................. 1-7
Starting Your Cabnetware Program................................................................................................... 1-10
Identifying Cabnetware Screen Components .................................................................................... 1-10
Customizing Window Sizes................................................................................................... 1-11
Cabnetware Terminology................................................................................................................... 1-11
Dialog Boxes ......................................................................................................................... 1-11
Dialog Box Options ............................................................................................................... 1-12
Selecting or Clearing Options with the Mouse...................................................................... 1-12
Selecting an Item in a Drop-down Box ................................................................................. 1-12
Selecting a Number In a Spin Box ........................................................................................ 1-12
Using the Keyboard .............................................................................................................. 1-12
Tab Dialog Boxes.................................................................................................................. 1-12
Selecting ............................................................................................................................... 1-12
Handles ................................................................................................................................. 1-13
Main Bar................................................................................................................................ 1-13
Menus ................................................................................................................................... 1-13
Pop Up Menus ...................................................................................................................... 1-13
Toolbars ................................................................................................................................ 1-14
Cabnetware Menus and Commands ................................................................................................. 1-15
Control Menu......................................................................................................................... 1-15
File Menu .............................................................................................................................. 1-15
View Menu ............................................................................................................................ 1-16
Walls Menu ........................................................................................................................... 1-16
Appliances Menu................................................................................................................... 1-17
Cabinets Menu ...................................................................................................................... 1-18
CAD Menu............................................................................................................................. 1-19
Modify Menu.......................................................................................................................... 1-19
Options Menu........................................................................................................................ 1-20
Window Menu ....................................................................................................................... 1-20
Help Menu............................................................................................................................. 1-20
Cabnetware Menu Bars and Toolbars ............................................................................................... 1-21
Main Menu Bar...................................................................................................................... 1-21
Walls Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 1-21
View Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 1-21
Graphic Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 1-22
Placement Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 1-22
Modify Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 1-22
Reports/Output Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 1-22
Appliance Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 1-23
Closet Toolbar....................................................................................................................... 1-23
Cabinet Toolbar..................................................................................................................... 1-24
CAD Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 1-25
Shortcut Keys..................................................................................................................................... 1-26
Moving Among Windows ...................................................................................................... 1-26
File Menu Shortcut Keys....................................................................................................... 1-26
Edit Menu Shortcut Keys ...................................................................................................... 1-26
View Menu Shortcut Keys..................................................................................................... 1-26
Modify Menu Shortcut Keys .................................................................................................. 1-26
CAD Menu Shortcut Keys ..................................................................................................... 1-27
Windows Menu Shortcut Keys .............................................................................................. 1-27
Help Menu Shortcut Keys ..................................................................................................... 1-27
On-Line Tutorial .................................................................................................................... 1-27
Chapter 2
SETUP
Preferences........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
General Preferences .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
Path Preferences ............................................................................................................................... 2-2
User Information Preferences ............................................................................................................ 2-2
Scales and Dimensions Preferences................................................................................................. 2-3
Cutlist Preferences............................................................................................................................. 2-4
Display Preferences ........................................................................................................................... 2-5
Proposal Preferences ........................................................................................................................ 2-7
Render Preferences ........................................................................................................................... 2-8
Materials............................................................................................................................................. 2-9
Entering Material Categories ................................................................................................ 2-9
Editing Material Categories................................................................................................... 2-9
Deleting Material Categories................................................................................................. 2-9
Entering Materials ................................................................................................................. 2-10
Editing Materials.................................................................................................................... 2-10
Changing Material Categories .............................................................................................. 2-10
Deleting Materials ................................................................................................................. 2-10
Hardware............................................................................................................................................ 2-11
Entering Hardware Categories ............................................................................................. 2-11
Editing Hardware Categories ................................................................................................ 2-11
Deleting Hardware Categories.............................................................................................. 2-11
Entering Hardware ................................................................................................................ 2-12
Editing Hardware................................................................................................................... 2-12
Changing Hardware Categories ........................................................................................... 2-12
Deleting Hardware ................................................................................................................ 2-12
Parameters......................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Creating Parameter Files ................................................................................................................... 2-13
Modifying Parameter Files ................................................................................................................. 2-14
Copying Parameter Files ................................................................................................................... 2-14
Deleting Parameter Files ................................................................................................................... 2-14
Printing Parameter Files .................................................................................................................... 2-15
Counter Top Parameters ................................................................................................................... 2-16
Layout Parameters............................................................................................................................. 2-20
Cabinet Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 2-23
Uppers................................................................................................................................... 2-23
Bases .................................................................................................................................... 2-25
Pantry Cabinets..................................................................................................................... 2-29
Split-Level Cabinets .............................................................................................................. 2-29
Closet Components .............................................................................................................. 2-29
Desk Sections ....................................................................................................................... 2-30
Finished Ends ....................................................................................................................... 2-30
Face Frames ......................................................................................................................... 2-31
Construction Parameters ................................................................................................................... 2-36
Backs .................................................................................................................................... 2-36
Stretchers.............................................................................................................................. 2-38
Nailers ................................................................................................................................... 2-40
Shelves ................................................................................................................................. 2-41
Closets .................................................................................................................................. 2-41
Peninsulas............................................................................................................................. 2-41
Construction Methods ........................................................................................................... 2-41
Height Adjustments ............................................................................................................... 2-47
Depth Adjustments................................................................................................................ 2-48
Laminated Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 2-49
Corner Cabinets .................................................................................................................... 2-49
Joint Dimensions................................................................................................................... 2-53
Scribes .................................................................................................................................. 2-56
Door Parameters................................................................................................................................ 2-61
Door Laminate....................................................................................................................... 2-63
Alternate Door Style .............................................................................................................. 2-63
Drawer Front Parameters .................................................................................................................. 2-70
Drawer Laminate................................................................................................................... 2-71
Alternate Drawer Style .......................................................................................................... 2-72
Drawer Box Parameters..................................................................................................................... 2-75
Pullouts ................................................................................................................................. 2-80
End Panel Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 2-84
End Panel Graphics ........................................................................................................................... 2-89
Interior Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 2-90
Part Information..................................................................................................................... 2-92
Exterior Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 2-94
Part Information.................................................................................................................................. 2-96
Overrides............................................................................................................................................ 2-99
Adjusting Part Sizes .............................................................................................................. 2-99
Changing Part Materials ....................................................................................................... 2-99
Changing Part Descriptions .................................................................................................. 2-100
Creating Linked Parts ........................................................................................................... 2-100
Creating Linked Hardware .................................................................................................... 2-101
Creating Appliance Files .................................................................................................................... 2-101
Modifying Appliance Files .................................................................................................................. 2-101
Copying Appliance Files .................................................................................................................... 2-102
Deleting Appliance Files .................................................................................................................... 2-102
Creating Graphics for Appliance Files ............................................................................................... 2-102
Printing Appliance Files ..................................................................................................................... 2-103
Pricing .............................................................................................................................................. 2-104
Profit/Overhead/Taxes ....................................................................................................................... 2-104
Markups/Discounts ............................................................................................................................ 2-105
Editing Markups and Discounts ............................................................................................ 2-105
Deleting Markups and Discounts .......................................................................................... 2-105
Price Lists........................................................................................................................................... 2-106
Modifying Price Lists ............................................................................................................. 2-106
Copying Price Lists ............................................................................................................... 2-107
Pricing Using Labor Table Ranges ....................................................................................... 2-107
Deleting Price Lists ............................................................................................................... 2-108
Accessories........................................................................................................................................ 2-109
Arranging Accessories .......................................................................................................... 2-109
Creating Accessory Categories ............................................................................................ 2-110
Organizing Accessories Using Categories ........................................................................... 2-110
Setting Filters ........................................................................................................................ 2-111
Deleting Accessories ............................................................................................................ 2-111
Proposal Wording............................................................................................................................... 2-112
Creating User Graphic Files............................................................................................................... 2-112
Modifying User Graphic Files............................................................................................................. 2-113
Copying User Graphic Files ............................................................................................................... 2-113
Deleting User Graphic Files ............................................................................................................... 2-113
Molding Graphics ............................................................................................................................... 2-114
Molding Profile Example ....................................................................................................... 2-115
Flooring Graphics............................................................................................................................... 2-116
Window Graphics ............................................................................................................................... 2-117
Entrance Door Graphics .................................................................................................................... 2-117
Color Graphics ................................................................................................................................... 2-118
Changing the Custom Palette ............................................................................................... 2-118
Changing Printer Line Weights ............................................................................................. 2-118
Changing Wood Grain Colors ............................................................................................... 2-119
Pull and Handle Graphics .................................................................................................................. 2-119
Wallpaper Graphics ........................................................................................................................... 2-119
Scanning Wallpaper.............................................................................................................. 2-119
Importing Wallpaper .............................................................................................................. 2-120
Customer Information......................................................................................................................... 2-120
Editing Customers................................................................................................................. 2-120
Deleting Customers .............................................................................................................. 2-120
Chapter 3
FEATURES
Starting a New Room Design............................................................................................................. 3-1
Starting a Quick Job.............................................................................................................. 3-1
Entering Room Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 3-2
Changing Room Defaults...................................................................................................... 3-3
Entering Job Information .................................................................................................................... 3-3
Opening a Job and Room File ........................................................................................................... 3-4
Closing a Design ................................................................................................................................ 3-4
Saving a Design ................................................................................................................................. 3-4
Updating Saved Room Designs............................................................................................ 3-5
Saving an Existing Room Design to a New Room or Job .................................................... 3-5
Saving a Room Design to a Different Location..................................................................... 3-5
Job Copy ............................................................................................................................................ 3-5
Printing a Design................................................................................................................................ 3-6
Printing the Current View ...................................................................................................... 3-6
Printing Floor Plans and Elevations ...................................................................................... 3-6
Printing in Color..................................................................................................................... 3-6
Printing to Fit ......................................................................................................................... 3-6
Printing to Scale .................................................................................................................... 3-7
Printing to Window ................................................................................................................ 3-7
Selecting Printers or Output Devices ................................................................................................. 3-7
Backing Up Information...................................................................................................................... 3-8
Backing Program Data to a Local Drive................................................................................ 3-8
Backing Program Data to a Server ....................................................................................... 3-8
Using Auto Backup ............................................................................................................... 3-9
Systems Restore Utility ...................................................................................................................... 3-10
Rolling Back Program Files................................................................................................... 3-12
Deleting Backup Files ........................................................................................................... 3-12
Deleting Files ..................................................................................................................................... 3-13
Deleting Jobs ........................................................................................................................ 3-13
Deleting Rooms..................................................................................................................... 3-13
Deleting Saved Graphics ...................................................................................................... 3-13
Deleting Saved CAD Text ..................................................................................................... 3-14
Job Packages..................................................................................................................................... 3-14
Creating a Job Package........................................................................................................ 3-14
Restoring a Job Package...................................................................................................... 3-15
Exiting the Program............................................................................................................................ 3-16
Viewing a Floor Plan .......................................................................................................................... 3-16
Viewing an Elevation.......................................................................................................................... 3-16
Viewing Elevation to Elevation.............................................................................................. 3-16
Viewing a Cabinet .............................................................................................................................. 3-16
Rendering a View............................................................................................................................... 3-17
Viewing Counter Tops........................................................................................................................ 3-18
Viewing Counter Tops by Layers .......................................................................................... 3-18
Entering Counter Tops ....................................................................................................................... 3-18
Adding a Rectangle Counter Top ......................................................................................... 3-18
Adding a Round Counter Top ............................................................................................... 3-18
Adding a Polygon Counter Top............................................................................................. 3-19
Modifying Counter Tops ..................................................................................................................... 3-19
Changing Counter Top Types............................................................................................... 3-19
Changing Counter Top Render Graphics ............................................................................. 3-20
Changing Counter Top Heights ............................................................................................ 3-20
Modifying Counter Top Edges .............................................................................................. 3-20
Modifying Counter Top Corners............................................................................................ 3-20
Adding End Splashes............................................................................................................ 3-21
Adding End Caps .................................................................................................................. 3-21
Adding Break Points ............................................................................................................. 3-21
Adding Perpendicular Construction Joints to Counter Tops................................................. 3-22
Adding Construction Joints Using Break Points ................................................................... 3-23
Adding a Mason Miter Construction Joint ............................................................................. 3-24
Breaking Counter Tops ......................................................................................................... 3-25
Counter Top Pricing Preview & Overrides ......................................................................................... 3-26
Pricing Preview ..................................................................................................................... 3-26
Pricing Overrides................................................................................................................... 3-27
Sizing Counter Tops........................................................................................................................... 3-28
Moving Counter Tops......................................................................................................................... 3-28
Deleting Counter Tops ....................................................................................................................... 3-28
Cut
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-29
Copy .............................................................................................................................................. 3-29
Paste .............................................................................................................................................. 3-29
Undo .............................................................................................................................................. 3-29
Regenerating a View.......................................................................................................................... 3-30
Zooming In a View ............................................................................................................................. 3-30
Zooming in a View with a Window ........................................................................................ 3-30
Zooming Out a View........................................................................................................................... 3-30
Real Zoom.......................................................................................................................................... 3-31
Zooming In ............................................................................................................................ 3-31
Zooming Out ......................................................................................................................... 3-31
Rotate a View..................................................................................................................................... 3-31
Pan View ............................................................................................................................................ 3-32
Moldings ............................................................................................................................................. 3-32
Flooring .............................................................................................................................................. 3-32
Picking a Flooring.................................................................................................................. 3-32
Deleting Flooring ................................................................................................................... 3-32
Picking Colors .................................................................................................................................... 3-33
Picking Grain...................................................................................................................................... 3-33
Pulls and Handles .............................................................................................................................. 3-33
Deleting Pulls and Handles................................................................................................... 3-33
Wallpaper ........................................................................................................................................... 3-34
Deleting Wallpaper................................................................................................................ 3-34
Display Options .................................................................................................................................. 3-34
Counter Top Display Options................................................................................................ 3-34
Floating Toolbars ............................................................................................................................... 3-35
Displaying Floating Toolbars................................................................................................. 3-35
Closing Floating Toolbars ..................................................................................................... 3-35
Moving Floating Toolbars...................................................................................................... 3-35
Resizable Toolbars ............................................................................................................... 3-35
Docking Toolbars .................................................................................................................. 3-35
Creating Custom Toolbars .................................................................................................... 3-36
Entering Walls .................................................................................................................................... 3-38
Entering Exterior Walls ......................................................................................................... 3-38
Entering Interior Walls........................................................................................................... 3-38
Entering Island Walls ............................................................................................................ 3-38
Entering Peninsula Walls ...................................................................................................... 3-39
Entering Free Form Walls ..................................................................................................... 3-39
Angle Walls ........................................................................................................................................ 3-41
Wall Layout Method .............................................................................................................. 3-41
Angle Command Method ...................................................................................................... 3-41
Angle Calculator Method....................................................................................................... 3-41
Radius Walls ...................................................................................................................................... 3-42
Angle/Radius Method............................................................................................................ 3-42
Cord Method ......................................................................................................................... 3-42
Modifying Walls .................................................................................................................................. 3-42
Sizing Walls........................................................................................................................... 3-43
Moving Walls......................................................................................................................... 3-43
Deleting Walls ....................................................................................................................... 3-43
Entering Entrance Doors.................................................................................................................... 3-44
Entering Entrance Doors in Succession ............................................................................... 3-44
Entering Entrance Doors into Walls...................................................................................... 3-44
Modifying Entrance Doors.................................................................................................................. 3-44
Sizing Doors.......................................................................................................................... 3-44
Moving Doors ........................................................................................................................ 3-45
Deleting Doors ...................................................................................................................... 3-45
Entering Windows .............................................................................................................................. 3-46
Entering Windows in Succession.......................................................................................... 3-46
Entering Windows into Walls ................................................................................................ 3-46
Modifying Windows ............................................................................................................................ 3-46
Sizing Windows..................................................................................................................... 3-46
Moving Windows ................................................................................................................... 3-47
Deleting Windows ................................................................................................................. 3-47
Wall Preferences................................................................................................................................ 3-48
Automatic Wall Snapping ................................................................................................................... 3-48
Wall Snapping .................................................................................................................................... 3-48
Entering Appliances ........................................................................................................................... 3-49
Placing Appliances from a Catalog ....................................................................................... 3-49
Bumping Appliances to the Right from a Catalog ................................................................. 3-49
Bumping Appliances to the Left from a Catalog ................................................................... 3-49
Entering Appliances with Finished Backs ............................................................................. 3-50
Entering Cabinet Catalog Appliances ................................................................................... 3-50
Modifying Appliances ......................................................................................................................... 3-50
Moving Appliances ................................................................................................................ 3-51
Deleting Appliances .............................................................................................................. 3-51
Appliance Graphics ............................................................................................................................ 3-51
Entering Custom Cabinets ................................................................................................................. 3-52
Placing Custom Cabinets...................................................................................................... 3-52
Bumping Custom Cabinets to the Right................................................................................ 3-52
Bumping Custom Cabinets to the Left .................................................................................. 3-52
Filling Custom Cabinets ........................................................................................................ 3-53
Entering Quick Job Cabinets ............................................................................................................. 3-53
Entering Custom Cabinets .................................................................................................... 3-53
Entering Base Cabinets ..................................................................................................................... 3-53
Placing Custom Base Cabinets ............................................................................................ 3-53
Bumping Custom Base Cabinets .......................................................................................... 3-54
Filling Custom Base Cabinets............................................................................................... 3-54
Entering Upper Cabinets.................................................................................................................... 3-54
Placing Custom Upper Cabinets........................................................................................... 3-54
Bumping Custom Upper Cabinets ........................................................................................ 3-55
Filling Custom Upper Cabinets ............................................................................................. 3-55
Entering Pantry Cabinets ................................................................................................................... 3-55
Placing Custom Pantry Cabinets .......................................................................................... 3-55
Bumping Custom Pantry Cabinets........................................................................................ 3-56
Filling Custom Pantry Cabinets............................................................................................. 3-56
Entering Special Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 3-57
Placing Custom Special Cabinets......................................................................................... 3-57
Bumping Custom Special Cabinets ...................................................................................... 3-57
Filling Custom Special Cabinets ........................................................................................... 3-58
Entering Fillers ................................................................................................................................... 3-58
Placing Base or Upper Fillers ............................................................................................... 3-58
Bumping Base or Upper Fillers ............................................................................................. 3-59
Filling Base or Upper Fillers.................................................................................................. 3-59
Placing Special Fillers........................................................................................................... 3-59
Bumping Special Fillers ........................................................................................................ 3-60
Filling Special Fillers ............................................................................................................. 3-60
Placing Corner Fillers............................................................................................................ 3-60
Diagonal Corner Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 3-61
Placing Custom Diagonal Corner Cabinets .......................................................................... 3-61
Entering End Cabinets ....................................................................................................................... 3-61
Placing Base End Cabinets .................................................................................................. 3-61
Bumping Base End Cabinets ................................................................................................ 3-62
Placing Upper End Cabinets................................................................................................. 3-62
Bumping Upper End Cabinets .............................................................................................. 3-62
Placing Special End Cabinets............................................................................................... 3-62
Bumping Special End Cabinets ............................................................................................ 3-62
Entering Lazy Susan Cabinets........................................................................................................... 3-63
Placing Custom Lazy Susan Cabinets.................................................................................. 3-63
Entering L-Shape Cabinets................................................................................................................ 3-63
Placing Custom L-Shape Cabinets....................................................................................... 3-63
Entering Diagonal Corner Sink Cabinets ........................................................................................... 3-63
Placing Custom Diagonal Corner Sink Cabinets .................................................................. 3-63
Entering Split-Level Cabinets............................................................................................................. 3-64
Placing Custom Split-Level Cabinets.................................................................................... 3-64
Bumping Custom Split-Level Cabinets ................................................................................. 3-64
Filling Custom Split-Level Cabinets ...................................................................................... 3-64
Entering Wainscot Paneling............................................................................................................... 3-65
Placing Base or Upper Wainscot Panels .............................................................................. 3-65
Filling Base or Upper Wainscot Panels ................................................................................ 3-65
Placing Special Wainscot Paneling ...................................................................................... 3-65
Filling Special Wainscot Paneling ......................................................................................... 3-66
Entering Closet Vertical Panels ......................................................................................................... 3-66
Placing Custom Closet Vertical Panels ................................................................................ 3-66
Entering Closet Shelves..................................................................................................................... 3-67
Placing Custom Closet Shelves............................................................................................ 3-67
Bumping Custom Closet Shelves ......................................................................................... 3-67
Filling Custom Closet Shelves .............................................................................................. 3-68
Entering Closet Diagonal Corner Shelves ......................................................................................... 3-68
Placing Custom Closet Diagonal Corner Shelves ................................................................ 3-68
Entering Closet L-Shape Corner Shelves.......................................................................................... 3-68
Placing Custom Closet L-Shape Corner Shelves................................................................. 3-68
Entering Closet Units ......................................................................................................................... 3-69
Placing Custom Closet Units ................................................................................................ 3-69
Bumping Custom Closet Units .............................................................................................. 3-69
Filling Custom Closet Units................................................................................................... 3-70
Entering Closet Doors ........................................................................................................................ 3-70
Filling Custom Closet Doors ................................................................................................. 3-70
Placing Custom Closet Doors ............................................................................................... 3-71
Entering Closet Drawers .................................................................................................................... 3-71
Filling Custom Closet Drawers.............................................................................................. 3-71
Placing Custom Closet Drawers ........................................................................................... 3-72
Entering Closet Rods ......................................................................................................................... 3-72
Placing Custom Closet Rods ................................................................................................ 3-72
Bumping Custom Closet Rods.............................................................................................. 3-73
Filling Custom Closet Rods................................................................................................... 3-73
Face Frame Only Cabinet.................................................................................................................. 3-73
Placing Face Frame Only (Frame Only) .............................................................................. 3-73
Valances ............................................................................................................................................ 3-74
Placing Custom Valances ..................................................................................................... 3-74
Bumping Custom Valances................................................................................................... 3-74
Filling Custom Valances ....................................................................................................... 3-75
Entering Island Cabinets.................................................................................................................... 3-75
Placing Island Cabinets ........................................................................................................ 3-75
Filling Island Cabinets........................................................................................................... 3-75
Entering Peninsula Cabinets.............................................................................................................. 3-76
Placing Peninsula Cabinets .................................................................................................. 3-76
Filling Peninsula Cabinets..................................................................................................... 3-76
Entering Rotated Cabinets................................................................................................................. 3-77
Entering Angle Wall Cabinets ............................................................................................................ 3-77
Deleting Cabinets............................................................................................................................... 3-77
Cabinet Graphics ............................................................................................................................... 3-78
Entering Lines .................................................................................................................................... 3-78
Modifying Lines .................................................................................................................................. 3-78
Entering Parallel Lines ....................................................................................................................... 3-79
Entering Polylines .............................................................................................................................. 3-79
Entering Squares ............................................................................................................................... 3-80
Entering Rectangles........................................................................................................................... 3-80
Entering Polygons .............................................................................................................................. 3-81
Drawing a Hatched Filled Polygon........................................................................................ 3-81
Entering Circles.................................................................................................................................. 3-82
Entering Curves ................................................................................................................................. 3-82
Drawing Arcs......................................................................................................................... 3-82
Drawing Curves..................................................................................................................... 3-82
Drawing S Curves ................................................................................................................. 3-83
Modifying Curves ............................................................................................................................... 3-83
Reversing Curves ................................................................................................................. 3-83
Shaping Curves..................................................................................................................... 3-83
Entering Text...................................................................................................................................... 3-84
Modifying Text.................................................................................................................................... 3-84
Moving Text........................................................................................................................... 3-84
Sizing Text ............................................................................................................................ 3-85
Deleting Text ......................................................................................................................... 3-85
Saving Text ........................................................................................................................................ 3-85
Retrieving Text ................................................................................................................................... 3-85
Erasing CAD ...................................................................................................................................... 3-86
Erasing CAD Lines................................................................................................................ 3-86
Erasing Any Lines ................................................................................................................. 3-86
Selecting CAD Lines to Delete.............................................................................................. 3-86
CAD Preferences ............................................................................................................................... 3-87
Cursor Control.................................................................................................................................... 3-87
Origin .............................................................................................................................................. 3-87
Setting an Origin ................................................................................................................... 3-87
Unsetting an Origin ............................................................................................................... 3-87
Snapping ............................................................................................................................................ 3-88
Manual Snap ......................................................................................................................... 3-88
Nearest Snap Mode .............................................................................................................. 3-88
Endpoint Snap Mode ............................................................................................................ 3-89
Midpoint Snap Mode ............................................................................................................. 3-89
Intersection Snap Mode ........................................................................................................ 3-90
Modifying Cabinets............................................................................................................................. 3-90
Sizing Cabinets ..................................................................................................................... 3-90
Moving Cabinets ................................................................................................................... 3-91
Adding Cabinets.................................................................................................................... 3-91
Deleting Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 3-91
Modifying Quick Job Cabinets ........................................................................................................... 3-92
Modifying from the List .......................................................................................................... 3-92
Modifying from a Cabinet View ............................................................................................. 3-92
Deleting Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 3-92
Modifying Cabinet Sections ............................................................................................................... 3-93
Adding Vertical Cabinet Sections.......................................................................................... 3-93
Adding Horizontal Cabinet Sections ..................................................................................... 3-93
Deleting Cabinet Sections..................................................................................................... 3-93
Modifying Quick Job Sections............................................................................................................ 3-94
Modifying Section Ends and Backs.................................................................................................... 3-94
Creating Section Ends .......................................................................................................... 3-94
Creating Section Backs......................................................................................................... 3-94
Modifying Section Ends and Backs ...................................................................................... 3-95
Modifying Paneled Ends and Backs .................................................................................................. 3-95
Creating Paneled Ends ......................................................................................................... 3-95
Creating Paneled Backs ....................................................................................................... 3-95
Modifying Paneled Ends and Backs ..................................................................................... 3-96
Adding Additional Vertical Panels ......................................................................................... 3-96
Adding Additional Horizontal Panels..................................................................................... 3-96
Modifying Wainscot Paneling............................................................................................................. 3-97
Sizing Wainscot Paneling ..................................................................................................... 3-97
Moving Wainscot Paneling.................................................................................................... 3-97
Deleting Wainscot Paneling .................................................................................................. 3-97
Modifying Wainscot Sub Panels ........................................................................................................ 3-98
Adding Vertical Wainscot Sub Panels .................................................................................. 3-98
Adding Horizontal Wainscot Sub Panels .............................................................................. 3-98
Deleting Wainscot Sub Panels.............................................................................................. 3-98
Entering Partitions and Dividers......................................................................................................... 3-99
Adding Partitions ................................................................................................................... 3-99
Adding Dividers ..................................................................................................................... 3-99
Adding Shelves ..................................................................................................................... 3-99
Adding Pull-outs .................................................................................................................... 3-99
Modifying Partitions and Dividers....................................................................................................... 3-100
Moving Partitions and Dividers ............................................................................................. 3-100
Deleting Partitions and Dividers............................................................................................ 3-100
Modifying Cabinet Cutlists ................................................................................................................. 3-101
Modifying Extended Cabinet Part Information ...................................................................... 3-101
Modifying Multiple Cabinet Part Sizes by Tagging ............................................................... 3-102
Adding Cabinet Parts ............................................................................................................ 3-102
Deleting Cabinet Parts .......................................................................................................... 3-103
Modifying Job Cutlists ........................................................................................................................ 3-104
Modifying Extended Part Information for Job Cutlists........................................................... 3-104
Modifying Multiple Cabinet Part Sizes by Tagging ............................................................... 3-105
Adding Cabinet Parts ............................................................................................................ 3-105
Deleting Cabinet Parts .......................................................................................................... 3-106
Accessories........................................................................................................................................ 3-107
Entering Cabinet Accessories............................................................................................... 3-107
Entering Room Accessories.................................................................................................. 3-107
Entering Custom Accessories............................................................................................... 3-107
Entering Hardware ................................................................................................................ 3-108
Editing Accessories and Hardware....................................................................................... 3-108
Deleting Accessories and Hardware..................................................................................... 3-108
Printing Cutlists .................................................................................................................................. 3-109
Printing Master Cutting Lists ................................................................................................. 3-109
Printing Batched Cutting Lists............................................................................................... 3-109
Printing Individual Cutting Lists............................................................................................. 3-109
Editing Cutlists ...................................................................................................................... 3-110
Printing Cutlists to File .......................................................................................................... 3-110
Proposals ........................................................................................................................................... 3-111
Printing Proposals ................................................................................................................. 3-111
Editing Proposals .................................................................................................................. 3-112
Printing Proposals to File ...................................................................................................... 3-112
Metric/Inch Layout.............................................................................................................................. 3-113
Metric Layout......................................................................................................................... 3-113
Inch Layout............................................................................................................................ 3-113
Electronic Tape Measure ................................................................................................................... 3-113
Tiling Windows ................................................................................................................................... 3-113
Cascading Windows .......................................................................................................................... 3-113
Arranging Icons .................................................................................................................................. 3-114
Opening New Windows...................................................................................................................... 3-114
Minimizing All Windows ..................................................................................................................... 3-114
Switching to a Different Open View ................................................................................................... 3-114
Fit Views to Windows ......................................................................................................................... 3-114
On-line Help ....................................................................................................................................... 3-115
Chapter 4
TUTORIAL
Welcome to the Case Planner - Frame Tutorial ................................................................................ 4-1
Starting a New Room ......................................................................................................................... 4-1
Creating Exterior Walls ...................................................................................................................... 4-2
Adding Windows ................................................................................................................................ 4-2
Adding Doors ..................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Creating Peninsula Walls................................................................................................................... 4-4
Moving Peninsula Walls ..................................................................................................................... 4-4
Saving a Room................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Entering a Rotated Base Cabinet ...................................................................................................... 4-5
Entering a Sink................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Entering a Dishwasher....................................................................................................................... 4-6
Entering a Refrigerator....................................................................................................................... 4-7
Entering an Oven ............................................................................................................................... 4-7
Entering a Cooktop and Hood............................................................................................................ 4-8
Entering a Cooktop ............................................................................................................... 4-8
Entering a Hood .................................................................................................................... 4-8
Entering Peninsula Cabinets.............................................................................................................. 4-9
Entering Special Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 4-9
Entering Base Cabinets ..................................................................................................................... 4-10
Entering Base Fillers .......................................................................................................................... 4-11
Filling Upper Cabinets........................................................................................................................ 4-12
Placing Upper Cabinets ..................................................................................................................... 4-12
Clipping Upper Cabinets .................................................................................................................... 4-13
Radius Upper Cabinets...................................................................................................................... 4-14
Modify a Section to a Drawer Bank.................................................................................................... 4-14
Modifying Special Cabinet Sections................................................................................................... 4-15
Modifying Cabinet Sections .................................................................................................. 4-15
Adding Horizontal Sections................................................................................................... 4-15
Adding Pullouts ..................................................................................................................... 4-16
Modifying Section Heights .................................................................................................... 4-16
Modifying Base Cabinets to Desks .................................................................................................... 4-16
Adding Horizontal Sections and Preparing for Mail Slots .................................................................. 4-17
Entering Valances .............................................................................................................................. 4-18
Adding Valances to a Room Design ..................................................................................... 4-18
Adding Valances to a Cabinet............................................................................................... 4-18
Adding Decorations to a Cabinet ....................................................................................................... 4-19
Adding Decorations to the Open Wall Cabinet ..................................................................... 4-19
Adding Vertical Dividers as Mail Slots ............................................................................................... 4-20
Selecting Molding, Flooring, and Wallpaper ...................................................................................... 4-20
Selecting Molding.................................................................................................................. 4-20
Selecting Flooring ................................................................................................................. 4-20
Selecting Wallpaper .............................................................................................................. 4-20
Viewing and Modifying Counter Tops ................................................................................................ 4-21
Viewing Counter Tops........................................................................................................... 4-21
Viewing Counter Tops by Layers .......................................................................................... 4-21
Modifying Counter Tops........................................................................................................ 4-21
Seeing Your Designs from Different Viewpoints................................................................................ 4-22
Floor Plan View ..................................................................................................................... 4-22
Elevation View....................................................................................................................... 4-22
Perspective View................................................................................................................... 4-22
Selecting a Perspective View................................................................................................ 4-23
Cabinet View ......................................................................................................................... 4-24
Counter Tops View ............................................................................................................... 4-24
Chapter 5
APPENDIX
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Program .INI File ................................................................................................................................ 5-9
Proposal Form.................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Data Fields ............................................................................................................................ 5-15
Formatting Commands ......................................................................................................... 5-16
Commands............................................................................................................................ 5-17
Data Fields ............................................................................................................................ 5-18
Common Questions ........................................................................................................................... 5-21
Why am I losing faces on my perspectives?......................................................................... 5-21
Why do I get General Protection Fault errors? ..................................................................... 5-21
Why is my mouse not working under Windows? .................................................................. 5-22
Why is my printer not printing? ............................................................................................. 5-23
Why is the printer only printing part of a page? .................................................................... 5-23
Why is the printer printing garbage?..................................................................................... 5-23
Why do I get Out of Memory messages? ............................................................................. 5-24
Why does my monitor flicker when I run Windows? ............................................................. 5-24
Why do my colors look strange?........................................................................................... 5-24
Troubleshooting Techniques.............................................................................................................. 5-25
Can you duplicate the problem? ........................................................................................... 5-25
Is the problem system specific?............................................................................................ 5-25
Is the problem file specific?................................................................................................... 5-25
Is the problem software specific? ......................................................................................... 5-26
Memory Problems ................................................................................................................. 5-26
Temporary Files .................................................................................................................... 5-26
Disabling TSRs and other Memory-Resident Programs....................................................... 5-26
Improving System Performance......................................................................................................... 5-27
Support Services................................................................................................................................ 5-28
Technical Support ................................................................................................................. 5-28
Before You Call ..................................................................................................................... 5-28
Fax Support........................................................................................................................... 5-28
Email Support........................................................................................................................ 5-28
Website Support.................................................................................................................... 5-29
Local Dealer Support ............................................................................................................ 5-29
Customer Service Support.................................................................................................... 5-29
Wish List............................................................................................................................................. 5-29
Worksheet for a Typical Drawer Bank ............................................................................................... 5-30
Panel Material Worksheet.................................................................................................................. 5-31
Material Worksheets .......................................................................................................................... 5-32
Preference and Parameter Worksheets ............................................................................................ 5-33
Preferences........................................................................................................................... 5-33
Counter Top Parameters ...................................................................................................... 5-35
Frame Layout Parameters .................................................................................................... 5-36
Frame Cabinet Parameters................................................................................................... 5-37
Frame Construction Parameters........................................................................................... 5-41
Door Parameters................................................................................................................... 5-45
Drawer Front Parameters ..................................................................................................... 5-47
Drawer Box Parameters........................................................................................................ 5-49
End Panel Parameters.......................................................................................................... 5-51
Appliance Parameters........................................................................................................... 5-53
Before You Install
Before you install the Cabnetworks program, review the following to ensure the installation is successful.
Security Key
Your software security key comes in either a parallel or USB model. If a parallel port security key is being
used, make sure that the security key is installed on the parallel port at the rear of the computer. The
printer cable should be plugged into the parallel security key and the printer turned on before starting the
software.
The parallel port security key can be plugged into LPT1 or LPT2 on the computer. It should not be used
in conjunction with any other security key.
If a USB security key is being used, do not install it into a USB port until after you install the software.
After the software is installed, the USB security key can be plugged into and USB port on your computer.
Microsoft Windows Color and Resolution Settings
Because of the demanding graphics capability of this program, it is recommended that you increase your
Windows color and resolution settings to enjoy the full benefit of your software.
1. Select the Setting command from the Start button.
2. Select the Control Panel command from the Settings menu.
3. Double-click the Display icon.
4. Click the Settings tab.
5. Change the Color Palette option to a setting that is greater than 256-colors. The greater the color
depth the better.
6. Change the Desktop Area option to a resolution setting of 1024 X 768 or better.
7. Select the OK button.
The total number of colors and the quality of screen resolution that a computer can display is
controlled by the amount of memory on the video card. If you find that the color and resolution selection
is limited, you might want to increase the memory on the computer’s video card or purchase a better
quality card.
1-1
Installing Cabnetware Programs
The CD that makes up the Cabnetware Programs CD contains files for all Cabnetware programs. These
files must be installed using the Setup program. Your Security Key controls access to the programs that
you have purchased and are authorized to use.
1.
Start Windows 98TM, Windows 2000TM, Windows XPTM, or Windows NTTM.
2.
Insert your Cabnetware CD into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
3. After closing your CD drive, wait a couple of minutes and your software should begin the installation
automatically.
4.
If the installation doesn’t begin automatically, select the Run command from the Start button.
5.
In the Run dialog, type the following: D:\SETUP (or whatever drive letter is assigned to the CD-ROM
drive).
6.
Click on the OK button.
7.
Follow the instructions on the Setup Wizard and select the Next button for each dialog screen.
8.
The following dialog appears in the Setup Wizard:
Warning: It is recommended that you use the default directory C:\PLANIT to install your new
Windows program, unless a directory by that name is being used by another software program.
9.
Verify the install drive and directory, or select a new drive and directory with the
It is recommended that you use the default directory.
10. Select the Next button.
11. The following dialog will appear in the Installation Wizard:
1-2
button.
12. Scroll up and down the Component list and deselect the programs that you do not want installed or
you have not purchased.
13. Select the Next button and continue to follow the instructions on the Installation Wizard until the
installation is complete.
14. When the installation is complete, restart Windows.
1-3
Network Installation
Network installation allows for the sharing of the program files, parameter files, and job files by more than
one person on the network. Individual program keys must be located on each user’s workstations to
access the program or a single network key with the required number of program licenses. To inquire
about additional or network key prices and policies, you may call Cabnetware directly at (530) 666-6647.
Installation of the program must be carried out by the network Supervisor or by a user who has the same
access rights as a Supervisor and has knowledge of the network functions and configurations.
The CD that makes up the Cabnetware programs contains compressed files. It must be installed using
the Setup program. The following are the two methods of installing the program to a network:
Sharing of Program, Job and Parameter Files
This installation allows users on the network to access and run common program files and shared job
and parameter files. All program files, job files, and parameter files are located on one network drive for
common access.
This installation is not recommended if you have a slow network server, or there are many users
accessing the program at one time.
Step #1
Install the program on the network.
1.
Working from the file server or one of the network workstations, log on to the server using the
Supervisor access rights.
2.
Start Windows 98TM, Windows 2000TM, Windows XPTM, or Windows NTTM.
3.
Insert your Cabnetware CD into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
4.
Select the Run command from the Start button.
5.
In the Run dialog, type the following: D:\SETUP (or the drive letter that is assigned to the CD-ROM
drive on your computer).
6. If the installation doesn’t begin automatically, select the Run command from the Start button.
7. In the Run dialog, type the following: D:\SETUP (or whatever drive letter is assigned to the CD-ROM
drive).
8. Click on the OK button.
9. Follow the instructions on the Setup Wizard and select the Next button for each dialog screen.
10. The following dialog appears in the Setup Wizard:
1-4
11. Change the drive with the
button to install on the desired network drive.
12. Select the Next button.
13. The following dialog will appear in the Installation Wizard:
14. Scroll up and down the Component list and deselect the programs that you do not want installed or
you have not purchased.
15. Select the Next button and continue to follow the instructions on the Installation Wizard until the
installation is complete.
16. When the installation is complete, restart Windows.
1-5
Step #2
Enter passwords to protect access to parameter and data settings by all users other than the network
supervisor.
1.
Start your Cabnetware program by double-clicking on the program icon. The main program window
now appears on your screen.
2.
Select the Setup command from the File menu.
3.
Select the Password command from the Setup menu.
4.
Select all check boxes for password protection.
5.
Select the Password button.
6.
Enter a password.
7.
Select the OK button.
8.
Verify the password by re-typing it.
9.
Select the OK button.
10. Exit your Cabnetware program.
Step #3
Create unique program .INI files for each user of the software.
1.
From the DOS prompt, change to the network drive that contains the installed Cabnetware program.
2.
Change directory to the CABWARE program directory (i.e.; CD\CABWARE).
3.
Copy the CPFRAME.INI file to new .INI files containing each user’s name (i.e.; COPY CPFRAME.INI
JAMES.INI). Continue this process for each user. A unique INI file must be created for each user.
Step #4
Setup the program icons on each user’s workstation.
1.
Start Windows.
2.
Press the Right mouse button on the Desktop.
3.
Select the New command and the Shortcut command from the Pop Up menu.
4.
Enter the program’s execution file name and the user’s unique INI file name in the Command Line
field. (i.e.; F:\CABWARE\CPLANNER.EXE JAMES.INI)
5.
Select the Next button.
6.
Enter “Case Planner Frame Version” in the Select a name for the shortcut field.
7.
Select the Finish button.
At this stage, network installation is complete. All computers connected to the network with a program
security key can now use the software.
1-6
Separate Program Installation with Shared Job and Parameter Files
This is the recommended network installation for quick program performance on slower networks. The
program files are installed and run on each user’s computer with job and data files being located on a
network drive for sharing purposes.
Step #1
Install the program on each network workstation.
1.
Start Windows 98TM, Windows 2000TM, Windows XPTM, or Windows NTTM.
2.
Insert your Cabnetware Programs CD into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
3.
Select the Run command from the Start button.
4. If the installation doesn’t begin automatically, select the Run command from the Start button.
5. In the Run dialog, type the following: D:\SETUP (or whatever drive letter is assigned to the CD-ROM
drive).
6. Click on the OK button.
7. Follow the instructions on the Setup Wizard and select the Next button for each dialog screen.
8. The following dialog appears in the Setup Wizard:
Warning: It is recommended that you use the default directory C:\PLANIT to install your new
Windows program, unless a directory by that name is being used by another software program.
9. Verify the install drive and directory, or select a new drive and directory with the
It is recommended that you use the default directory.
10. Select the Next button.
1-7
button.
11. The following dialog will appear in the Installation Wizard:
12. Scroll up and down the Component list and deselect the programs that you do not want installed or
you have not purchased.
13. Select the Next button and continue to follow the instructions on the Installation Wizard until the
installation is complete.
14. When the installation is complete, restart Windows.
15. Continue this install process for each user’s workstation.
Step #2
Create directories on the network drive to store shared job and parameter files.
1. Working from one of the network workstations, log onto the file server using Supervisor access rights.
2. Change to a shared network drive.
3. Create a CABWARE directory on the network drive (i.e.; MD CABWARE).
4. Change the directory to the CABWARE directory (i.e.; CD CABWARE).
5. Create a FRAME directory within the CABWARE directory (i.e.; MD CPFRAME).
6. Change the directory to the CPFRAME directory (i.e.; CD CPFRAME).
7. Create a JOBS directory within the CABWARE\CPFRAME directory (i.e.; MD JOBS).
8. Create a PARMS directory within the CABWARE\CPFRAME directory (i.e.; MD PARMS).
9. Create a LIBRARY directory within the CABWARE\CPFRAME directory (i.e.; MD LIBRARY).
10. Create an APPL directory within the CABWARE\CPFRAME directory (i.e.; MD APPL).
11. Copy a complete set of job files, parameter files, library files, and appliance files to the newly created
network directories.
1-8
Step #3
Set program paths to access the shared data and parameters on each user’s workstation.
1.
Start your Cabnetware program by double clicking on the program icon. The main program window
now appears on your screen.
2.
Select the Setup command from the File menu.
3.
Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu.
4.
Select the Path tab from the Preferences dialog.
5.
Select the Parameters button and change the path to your shared network parameter directory.
6.
Select the Appliances button and change the path to your shared network appliance directory.
7.
Select the Catalog button and change the path to your shared network catalog directory.
8.
Select the Jobs button and change the path to your shared network jobs directory.
9.
Select the OK button.
10.
Exit the Cabnetware program.
11.
Continue this process on each user’s workstation.
Examples of Case Planner Frame Version Program Paths
Parameters
=
F:\Cabware\Cpframe\Parms
Appliances
=
F:\Cabware\Cpframe\Appl
Catalogs
=
F:\Cabware\Cpframe
Jobs
=
F:\Cabware\Cpframe\Jobs
Step #4
Enter passwords on each user’s workstation to protect access to shared parameter and data file settings
by all users other than the network supervisor.
1.
Start your Cabnetware program by double clicking on the program icon. The main program window
now appears on your screen.
2.
Select the Setup command from the File menu.
3.
Select the Password command from the Setup menu.
4.
Select all check boxes for password protection.
5.
Select the Password button.
6.
Enter a password.
7.
Select the OK button.
8.
Verify the password by re-typing it.
9.
Select the OK button.
10.
Exit your Cabnetware program.
11.
Continue this password protection process for each network workstation.
At this stage, network installation is complete. All computers connected to the network with a program
security key can now use the software.
1-9
Starting Your Cabnetware Program
After installing your Cabnetware program, the Setup program creates a Cabnetware icon on your
Windows desktop in a Cabnetware folder.
To start your Cabnetware program, double-click on the Cabnetware folder and then again double-click on
the program icon. The main program window now appears on your screen.
Identifying Cabnetware Screen Components
This section allows you to familiarize yourself with the main Cabnetware screen.
Control
Menu Box
Main Title
Bar
Main
Menu
Main
Toolbar
Cabinet
Toolbar
Wall
Toolbar
View
Toolbar
Work Area
CAD
Toolbar
Closet
Toolbar
Appliance
Toolbar
Status Bar
1-10
Customizing Window Sizes
You can change the layout and display of your Cabnetware program window with a few simple
techniques.
•
Click on the Restore button
•
Resize the window by dragging its borders.
•
Resize the window by dragging its corners.
•
Click on the Maximize button
•
Select the New Window command from the Window menu to open a new window.
•
Select the Tile or Cascade command from the Window menu to arrange multiple windows.
•
Select the Minimize All command from the Window menu to minimize all views to icons.
to reduce the size, or minimize the window.
to maximize the window.
Cabnetware Terminology
As you use your Cabnetware On-line Help and your documentation, you will be instructed to perform
various actions. To assure effective communication, it is essential that we speak the same language and
refer to certain items with the same name.
Don’t feel that you need to memorize each of these terms. Most of the terms are standard Window
conventions of which you may be already familiar.
Dialog Boxes
Whenever you add, edit, configure or customize an object in Cabnetware, you will be presented with a
window called a “dialog box”. A dialog box displays the options available for the function you are trying to
perform. Dialog boxes make use of various types of buttons, check boxes, lists and edit boxes to make
selecting options as easy as possible.
Dialog box for setting mouse cursor control for CAD
1-11
Dialog Box Options
Selecting or Clearing Options with the Mouse
•
Point to the option button, check box, or list item, and then click the left mouse button.
Selecting an Item in a Drop-down Box
•
Click on the down arrow to display the list, and then click on an item.
Selecting a Number in a Spin Box
•
Click the up or down arrows to the right of the spin box until the correct number appears in
the box.
Using the Keyboard
•
Press the Tab key until the desired option is highlighted.
•
•
Press the Spacebar to set or clear a check box.
Select a radio button by pressing the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key until the desired option
is selected.
Tab Dialog Boxes
To allow for more options on a dialog box without making a dialog box bigger, “Tabs” are added. Clicking
on a tab with the mouse pointer displays options related to that tab label.
Selecting
Whenever you click on an object or item, you have selected it. A hatched box being drawn around the
item identifies a selected item. Selecting an item allows you to edit, move or delete that item.
1-12
Handles
Selecting some items will draw up to eight little squares on the select box. These little squares are called
“Handles”. Handles appear on any item that the program allows you to size. You can grab any one of
these handles with the mouse pointer and drag them in and out to change the size and shape of an item.
Main Bar
The Main Menu Bar is located at the top of Cabnetware’s Main Window. This bar allows access to dropdown menus, each containing a list of program commands. Clicking on any name (File, View, Walls,
Appliances, Cabinets, CAD, Modify, Options, Window, and Help) opens the drop-down menu with
their associated commands.
Menus
A menu is a list of program commands organized under one menu heading. The following is a list of wall
layout commands found under the Wall menu.
1-13
Pop Up Menus
The most important thing you need to remember in Cabnetware is to use the right button on your mouse.
Almost every command you need for a selected item is just a simple right-click away.
A single right-click on a selected item will display a Pop-Up menu with all the commands you need to
modify that item.
Try right clicking after selecting some of the items in your design. You will soon discover that selecting a
command from the Pop-Up menu is much quicker than selecting a menu from the Main menu and then
selecting a command.
Toolbars
Toolbars provide a set of command icons for the most commonly used functions in the program. There
are two types of toolbars in the program. The Main toolbar is located just under the menu bar. The Main
toolbar contains command icons that are related to the current window. Floating toolbars are ones that
you can display and move to any location on the screen.
The following is the Wall toolbar. It is a Floating toolbar.
1-14
Cabnetware Menus and Commands
Control Menu
Restore: Returns the active window to its former size and location.
Move: Allows use of the keyboard to move the active window.
Size: Allows use of the keyboard to resize the active window.
Minimize: Shrinks the active window to an icon.
Maximize: Enlarges the active window to fill the screen.
Close: Closes the active window.
Next: Goes to the next window on a multiple window screen.
File Menu
New Room: Clears the current window, allowing the creation of a new
room.
Open Room: Recalls an existing room.
Close Room: Closes the current room.
Save Room: Saves the current room.
Save Room As: Saves the current room under a new name. Also used to
save a room to a different directory.
Print: Prints the current view according to the options specified.
Printer Setup: Select printer and printer options.
Setup: Displays the program setup options.
Utilities: Displays the programs backup and restore options.
Exit: Ends the current session and exits the program.
1-15
View Menu
Floor Plan: Displays a floor plan view in the current window.
Elevation: Displays an elevation view in the current window.
Cabinet: Displays a cabinet view in the current window.
Render: Displays a rendered view of the room.
Counter Tops: Displays a counter top view in the current window.
Saved Bitmaps: Displays a list of saved PCX images to pick and display on the
Cut: Copies the selected cabinet into memory and deletes it from the view.
Copy: Copies the selected cabinet into memory.
Paste: Paste the cabinet on a wall that was saved to memory using the Cut or
Copy command.
Undo: Restores design back to its original condition before the previous
modification.
Regenerate: Redraws the current view causing the computer to refresh the
screen.
Zoom In: Magnifies the view of the currently active window. Use this option to
see a view in greater detail.
Zoom Out: Zooms out the current view.
Real Zoom: Allows you to zoom in or out by moving the mouse up and down
the screen.
Pan: Moves the drawing in any direction on the screen.
Pick User Graphics: Displays a list of user created graphics to pick from.
Display Options: Temporarily turns on or off different aspects of your room design.
Toolbars: Turns on or off selected toolbars.
Walls Menu
Exterior: Begins a starting location for one or a group of connecting exterior
walls.
Interior: Begins an interior wall that attaches to existing exterior walls.
Peninsula/Island: Begins an invisible wall off of an existing wall for placing
peninsula cabinets, or begins an invisible wall in the middle of a room for
placing island cabinets.
Free Form Cabinets Begins a wall for a group of connecting walls to define the
outside perimeter of cabinets to be filled or placed on a freestanding island.
Angle: Begins a wall segment with a special wall angle.
Radius: Extends a radius wall from a previous wall at a selected radius and
angle.
Windows: Enters a custom window or a window from user-graphics.
Doors: Enters a custom door size or a door from user-graphics.
Preferences: Displays the default wall layout settings for wall style, wall height,
and wall thickness.
Show Wall: Restores all walls that have been hidden.
1-16
Appliances Menu
Refrigerator: Displays a list of refrigerators saved to your appliance
catalog.
Refrigerator Cabinet: Displays a list of boxed-in refrigerator cabinet
saved to your appliance catalog.
Undercounter Refrigerator: Displays a list of under counter
refrigerators saved to your appliance catalog.
Wall Oven Cabinet: Displays a list of wall oven cabinets saved to your
appliance catalog.
Undercounter Oven: Displays a list of undercounter ovens saved to
your appliance catalog.
Free Standing Range: Displays a list of freestanding ranges saved to
your appliance catalog.
Drop-in Range: Displays a list of drop-in ranges saved to your
appliance catalog.
Cooktop: Displays a list of cooktops saved to your appliance catalog.
Hood: Displays a list of hoods saved to your appliance catalog.
Microwave Hood: Displays a list of microwave hoods saved to your
appliance catalog.
Sink: Displays a list of sinks saved to your appliance catalog.
Dishwasher: Displays a list of dishwashers saved to your appliance
catalog.
Compactor: Displays a list of compactors saved to your appliance
catalog.
Washer: Displays a list of clothes washers saved to your appliance
catalog.
Dryer: Displays a list of clothes dryers saved to your appliance catalog.
Place: Turns on the ability to place an appliance on the wall at any location.
Bump Right: Turns on the ability to bump appliances to the right into other cabinets and objects.
Bump Left: Turns on the ability to bump appliances to the left into other cabinets and objects.
Rotate: Turns on the ability to rotate an appliance into the corner of a room at any angle.
1-17
Cabinets Menu
Base: For selecting and placing custom, modular or catalog base cabinets.
Upper: For selecting and placing custom, modular or catalog upper cabinets.
Pantry: For selecting and placing custom, modular or catalog pantry cabinets.
Special: For selecting and placing custom, modular or catalog special cabinets.
Fillers: For selecting and placing fillers.
Corner: For selecting and placing custom, modular or catalog corner cabinets.
End: For selecting and placing upper, base and special end cabinets.
Split Level: For selecting and placing of custom, modular or catalog split level
cabinets.
Wainscot Paneling: For selecting and placing wainscot paneling.
Closet Components: For selecting and placing closet component parts.
Face Frames: For selecting and placing face frame only cabinets.
Room Valance: For selecting and placing room valances.
Catalog Search: Select this option to search for a cabinet in the catalog.
Catalog: Selecting this option turns on and off the ability to pull cabinets from
your catalog.
Finished Back: Selecting this option turns on and off the ability to design a
cabinet with a finished back.
Modular: Selecting this option turns on and off the ability to design cabinets as
modules.
Max Fill Width: Selects the maximum size cabinets that you want to fast fill from your
library.
Fast Fill: Turns on the ability to have the program auto-design a wall by fast filling
a selected cabinet type.
Fill Right: Turns on the ability to have the program auto-design a wall by fast
filling a selected cabinet type to the right of a select wall location.
Fill Left: Turns on the ability to have the program auto-design a wall by fast filling
a selected cabinet type to the left of a select wall location.
Place: Turns on the ability to place a cabinet on the wall at any location.
Bump Right: Turns on the ability to bump cabinets to the right into other cabinets and objects.
Bump Left: Turns on the ability to bump cabinets to the left into other cabinets and objects.
Rotate: Turns on the ability to rotate a cabinet into the corner of a room at any angle.
1-18
CAD Menu
Line: Draws a straight line.
Parallel Lines: Draws a series of lines that are parallel to each other.
Polyline: Draws a series of straight lines connected in sequence.
Square: Draws a box with equal sides.
Rectangle: Draws a rectangular box of any size.
Polygon: Draws a series of straight lines connected in sequence that ends at
the beginning of the first line.
Circle: Draws a circle.
Curves: Draws arcs, curves, and S-curves.
Text: Allows user to enter text, such as comments and notes on the view.
Erase: Erases CAD from a view.
Preferences: Determines the default settings for CAD.
Cursor Control: CAD control options.
Origin: Picks a point of origin for mouse readouts.
Modify Menu
Cabinet: Displays the cabinet modify options for the selected cabinet.
Section: Displays the section modify options for the selected cabinet section.
Partitions/Dividers: Displays the partition and divider options for sub-dividing
a cabinet section with partitions and dividers.
Cabinet Cutlist: Displays a list of parts and materials for modifying the cutlist
on a selected cabinet.
Job Cutlist: Displays a list of parts and materials for modifying the cutlist on
all cabinet parts for the job.
Job Information: Inputs information for the job.
Room Defaults: Displays the current parameter defaults and allows
information to be input for the room.
Move Cabinet Name: Moves the location of a cabinet name on floor plan.
Accessories: Picks and reviews accessories for a cabinet or room.
1-19
Options Menu
Cutlist: Defines and prints a master, batched, or individual cutting list.
Proposal: Defines and prints a contract.
Screen to Machine: Sends all parts directly to the Planit Solutions CNC
Center.
CNC Center: Defines and creates machining operations for cabinet parts.
Panel Optimization: Defines and prints a material optimization report.
Metric: Displays dimensions in metric.
Tape Measure: Selects the electronic tape measure.
Window Menu
Cascade: Arranges all open windows in layers so each title bar is
visible.
Tile: Arranges all open windows so that all of them are visible on
your desktop.
Arrange Icons: Arranges all minimized window icons across the
bottom of your desktop.
New Window: Adds another view window on top of the open
window.
Minimize All: Closes all open windows to minimized icons.
Fit Views to Windows: Redraws each view to fit the current
window, as it is re-sized.
Help Menu
Contents and Index: Displays the Cabnetware Help Contents and an
index of all help subjects.
Tutorial: Displays an on-line tutorial.
How to Use Help: Displays step by step instructions for using
Cabnetware Help.
Quick Startup: Displays the Quick Startup dialog when loading the
program.
About Cabnetware: Displays the current program version and
information about the program and the amount of free disk space
available on your system.
1-20
Cabnetware Menu Bars and Toolbars
Screen to Machine
Main Menu Bar
Save
New
Room
Wall Right
Copy
Cursor Select
Vertical
Sections
Tape Measure
Pan
Restore
Print
Cut
Open
Room
Paste
Wall Left
Zoom-in
Undo Last
Zoom-out
Zoom-In
and out
Walls Toolbar
Exterior Wall
Interior Wall
Radius Wall
Peninsula/Island Wall
Window
Free Form Wall
Show Walls
Doors
View Toolbar
Floor Plan
Elevation
Rendering
Counter Top
Cabinet
1-21
Horizontal
Sections
Graphic Toolbar
Room Textures
Grid Options
Door Pulls/Handles
Drawer Pulls/Handles
Placement Toolbar
Fast Fill
Fill Right
Fill Left
Place
Bump Right
Bump Left
Finished Back
Catalog Cabinets
Modular Cabinets
Modify Toolbar
Cabinet Note
Break Cabinet
Cabinet Name
Stretch Cabinet
Cabinet Accessories
Move Cabinet Name
Room Defaults
Reports/Output Toolbar
Proposal
Cutlist
Screen to Machine
1-22
Appliance Toolbar
Refrigerator Cabinet
Refrigerator
Wall Oven
Undercounter Refrigerator
Undercounter Oven
Free Standing Range
Drop-in Range
Cooktop
Hood
Microwave Hood
Sink
Dishwasher
Compactor
Washer
Dryer
Closet Toolbar
Vertical Panel
Shelf
Diagonal Corner Shelf
L-Shape Corner Shelf
Closet Unit
Closet Door
Closet Drawer
Closet Rod
1-23
Cabinet Toolbar
Base
Upper
Pantry
Special
Diagonal Corner Base
Diagonal Corner Upper
Diagonal Corner Special
Lazy Susan Base
Lazy Susan Upper
Lazy Susan Special
Upper Filler
Base Filler
Corner Base Filler
Special Filler
Corner Upper Filler
Corner Special Filler
Base Face Frame Only
Upper Face Frame Only
Base End Cabinet
Special Face Frame Only
Special End Cabinet
Upper End Cabinet
Base Wainscot
Upper Wainscot
Valances
Special Wainscot
1-24
CAD Toolbar
Solid Line
Dashed Line
Center Line
Pointer Line
Solid Parallel Line
Dashed Parallel Line
Center Parallel Line
Pointer Parallel Line
Arc
Curve
S-Curve
Solid Polyline
Dashed Polyline
Center Polyline
Pointer Polyline
Solid Polygon
Box
Filled Polygon
Filled Box
Dashed Box
Dashed Rectangle
Rectangle
Circle
Filled Rectangle
Text
Dashed Circle
Dimension
Retrieve Text
Preferences
Erase
1-25
Shortcut Keys
Use the following shortcut keys to access windows and menu commands.
Moving among windows
To
Go to next window
Go to previous window
Make menu bar active
Cancel a menu
Press
Ctrl + F6
Ctrl + Shift + F6
F10
Esc
File menu shortcut keys
To
New
Open
Close
Save
Print
Exit
Press
Ctrl + N
Ctrl + O
Ctrl + W
Ctrl + S
Ctrl + P
Alt + F4
Edit menu shortcut keys
To
Copy
Cut
Paste
Delete
Press
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + X
Ctrl + V
Del
View menu shortcut keys
To
Floor Plan
Elevation
Perspective
Birds Eye
Pan
Regenerate
Select View in New Window
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Zoom Window
Press
Alt + Ctrl + F
Alt + Ctrl + E
Alt + Ctrl + P
Alt + Ctrl + B
Alt + P
Ctrl + R
Shift + Pick View
Ctrl + Z
Alt + Z
Ctrl + W
Modify menu shortcut keys
To
Cabinet Drag
Cabinet Sizing
Cabinet Modify
Press
Single Click
Single Click
Double Click
1-26
CAD menu shortcut keys
To
Snap
Press
“S” Key
Windows menu shortcut keys
To
Tile
Cascade
Open New Window
Open New Window with a View
Press
Shift + F4
Shift + F5
Shift + F6
Shift + View
Help menu shortcut keys
To
Contents
Press
F1
On-line Tutorial
Cabnetware has created an extensive on-line help system to assist you in learning the program. Running
the on-line tutorial will give you a quick start towards mastering your Cabnetware program. The on-line
tutorial can be accessed while running the program by following these steps:
1.
Select the Contents command from the Help menu.
2.
Select the Tutorial option from Help’s Table of Contents.
1-27
Chapter 2
Setup
Preferences
Preferences allow the user to identify default settings for the way the program operates. Accept the
default setting supplied with the program or customize them as needed.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu.
General Preferences
General preferences are default settings for the way the program functions.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the General tab from the Preferences dialog.
Fractions
Select this option if the cabinet dimensions and cutting lists are to be displayed and printed in fractions.
Decimals
Select this option if the cabinet dimensions and cutting list are to be displayed and printed in decimals.
Round to Nearest
Select the smallest fraction or decimal to which the program will round off all dimensions.
Parameters
Select whether the parameters will be entered in inches or millimeters.
Appliances
Select whether the appliances will be entered in inches or millimeters.
Room Design
Select whether a room design will be laid out in inches or millimeters.
Cutlists
Select whether the cutting list will be printed in inches or millimeters.
Material Prices
Select whether the price of materials will be entered as a cost per square foot or cost per square meter.
2-1
Undo Changes
Determines the number of changes done to a design before an undo file is saved. Undo files are for the
Undo and Auto-backup features of the program. Enter up to twenty design changes before an undo file is
created.
Undo Levels
An undo level consists of a given number of undo files. Enter up to ten undo levels.
Path Preferences
Path preferences are default path settings the program uses to find and save files. It is probably wise to
leave these preferences as the program has set them, unless you have valid reasons to change them.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Path tab from the Preferences dialog.
Parameters Button
Select this button to change the path the program uses to find and save parameters.
3D Objects Button
Select this button to change the path the program uses to find and save 3D objects.
Appliance Button
Select this button to change the path the program uses to find and save appliances to the appliance
catalog.
Jobs Button
Select this button to change the path the program uses to find and save job files.
User Graphics Button
Select this button to change the path the program uses to find and save user-created graphics.
User Information Preferences
User Information preferences are used to identify the user and company information on all printed
documents.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the User Info tab from the Preferences dialog.
Contact
Enter the name of the person to be contacted, as it is to appear on printed reports.
Company Name
Enter the name of the company, as it is to be printed on all reports.
2-2
Address
Enter the address of the company, as it is to appear on all printed reports.
Phone (Voice)
Enter the phone number of the company, as it is to appear on all printed reports.
Phone (FAX)
Enter a fax number, as it is to appear on all printed reports.
Phone (Cellular)
Enter a cellular phone number, as it is to appear on all printed reports.
Phone (Home)
Enter a home phone number, as it is to appear on all printed reports.
Scales & Dimensions Preferences
Scale and Dimension preferences identify the default drawing scales and dimensions used by the
program when outputting views.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Scales/Dimensions tab from the Preferences dialog.
Floor Plan/Elevations Button
Select this button to change the default scale for all floor plans and elevations.
Metric
Displays the selected scales as a ratio.
Font Button
Select this button to change the default font used for dimensions.
Height
Enter the height of dimensions for all drawings as they are to be printed. If it is preferred that all
dimensions are printed at a height of 1/8", enter ".125".
Spacing
Enter the amount of space that appears between dimensions when a drawing is printed. Entering "1" will
space dimensions one character height away from each other. The character height is determined by the
Dimension Height. A range of "1.5" to "2" is a good value for this option.
2-3
Cutlist Preferences
Cutlist preferences control the default setting for the format and type of information the cutting list uses for
printing parts.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Cutlist tab from the Preferences dialog.
Job Information
Select this option if a job information sheet is to be printed, listing all rooms and cabinets designed in a
job. Also, important information such as cabinet notes, accessories and special angle or radius
information is given.
Body Parts
Select this option to print cabinet body parts with the cutlist.
Face Frame Parts
Select this option to print face frame parts with the cutlist.
End Panel Parts
Select this option to print end panel parts with the cutlist.
Door Parts
Select this option to print door parts with the cutlist.
Drawer Parts
Select this option to print drawer parts with the cutlist.
Edge Banding
Select this option to print an edge banding report on the cutlist describing the edge banding applied to all
four edges of a part.
Material Cost List
Select this option to print a list of all materials, accessories, hardware, and their costs with the cutlist.
Rows
Select this option if all drawer and door parts for a particular door or drawer are to be listed horizontally
across the page. Door panels, stiles, and rails are printed across the page on one line. The drawer
fronts, ends, sides and bottoms are also listed across the page on one line.
Columns
Select this option if drawer fronts and drawer ends are to be on one page together in separate columns.
Drawer sides and drawer bottoms are listed on a separate page in separate columns. Door panels are
batched in one column, with stiles in another column, and rails in a separate column.
Print Hinging
Select this option if door hinging (i.e., left, right, and pair) is to be listed on the door cutlist.
Print Hardware
Select this option if hardware is to be listed on the door and drawer cutting lists.
Edge Banding
Select this option if edge banding is to be listed on the door and drawer cutting lists.
2-4
Fractions
Select this option to print cabinet part sizes in fractions.
Decimals
Select this option to print cabinet part sizes in decimals.
Adjust Part Sizes for the Edge Banding Thickness
Select this option if you want to print part sizes that are adjusted for edge banding thicknesses.
Print Door Overlaps on Individual Cutlist
Prints cabinet graphics on individual cutlist showing door and drawer overlaps.
Use Actual Material Thickness
This allows the user to use actual material thickness instead of the global interior and exterior thickness
when calculating the cutlist.
Font Button
Determines the font uses for printing cutlists.
Lines Per Page
Enter the number of cutlist lines that will print with the selected font on a given page length.
Display Preferences
Display Preferences control the default settings for the type of information displayed in a room design.
These options can also be controlled on a room-by-room basis from the Display command on the View
menu.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Display tab from the Preferences dialog.
All Dimensions
Select this option to display all dimensions.
Section Width Dimensions
Select this option to display the width of all cabinet section openings.
Section Height Dimensions
Select this option to display the height of all cabinet section openings.
Appliance Center Lines
Select this option to display appliance centerline dimensions.
Filler Dimensions
Select this option to display the width of all fillers.
Stile Dimensions
Select this option to display all stile and mullion widths.
2-5
Door and Window Casing Dimensions
Select this option to include door and windows casing as part of the dimension width for doors and
windows on both floorplan and elevation views.
Floorplan Cabinet Width
Select this option to display cabinet widths on a floorplan view.
Work Triangle
Determines if a work triangle dimensions will be displayed on floor plans.
Counter Tops
Select this option to display counter tops as solid lines and base cabinets as dashed lines on the floor
plan view.
CAD Text
Select this option to display CAD text in a room design.
CAD Line Weight
Select This Option to display CAD line widths.
Cabinet Information
Select this option to display cabinet numbers, partition locations, and finished end types.
Cabinet Shelves
Select this option to display cabinet shelves on elevation views.
Elevation Fill
Select this option to display filled color on cabinets and appliances in elevations.
Wood Grain
Select this option to display wood grain on cabinets.
Door Designs
Select this option to display door graphics.
Door Overlaps
Select this option to display the door overlaps on cabinets.
Door Hinging (Floor Plan)
Select this option to display cabinet door hinging on floor plan views.
No Report
Select this option to remove all reports from floor plan and elevation views.
Installation Reports
Select this option to display an installation report on floor plan and elevation views.
Cabinet Reports
Select this option to display a cabinet report on floor plan and elevation views.
2-6
Proposal Preferences
Estimator preferences controls the default setting for the format and the type of information the program
uses to print proposals.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Proposal tab from the Preferences dialog.
Proposal Wording
Select the text file used for wording on the proposal printout.
Terms
Select this option to display the terms on all printouts.
Date
Select this option to display the current date on all printouts.
Company Information
Select this option to display your company information on all printouts.
Customer Information
Select this option to display customer information on all printouts.
Contractor Information
Select this option to display contractor information on all printouts.
Architect/Designer Information
Select this option to display architect or designer information on all printouts.
Ship to Information
Select this option to display all ship to related information on all printouts.
Itemized Prices
Select this option to display itemized prices on all printouts.
Room Totals
Select this option to display room totals on all printouts.
Grand Totals
Select this option to display a grand total for all rooms on all printouts.
Metric
Select this option if prices entered are per lineal or square meter.
Tax 1
Select this option to calculate Tax 1 into all printouts.
Tax 2
Select this option to calculate Tax 2 into all printouts.
Tax 3
Select this option to calculate Tax 3 into all printouts.
2-7
Most Detailed
Select this option if a job costing report is to detail each type of cabinet for a job.
Less Detailed
Select this option if a job costing report is to detail each cabinet type as a group for a job.
Least Detailed
Select this option if a job costing report is to detail all aspects of a job together.
Render Preferences
Rendering preferences control the default setting for the way a room design is displayed in a rendered
view.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Rendering tab from the Preferences dialog.
Smooth
Select this option as a fast speed setting used to remove jagged lines from a rendered view with good
results.
Smoother
Select this option as a medium speed setting used to remove jagged lines from a rendered view with
better results.
Smoothest
Select this option as the slowest speed setting used to remove jagged lines from a rendered view with the
best results.
Render Detail
Controls the amount of detail given while rendering a design. The better the detail the slower the render.
Background Color
Select the background screen color to be used in a rendered view.
Show Screen Draws
Select this option if you want to watch a rendered view draw on the screen as it is processed by the
computer. This option will slow down the rendering process.
The better the results you want in rendering a room and cabinet design, the longer the program will
take to calculate and display the view.
2-8
Materials
Materials entered here are cabinet construction materials (i.e., hardwood, plywood, melamine, veneer,
fiberboard, laminate, and edge banding). These materials are used by the Interior and Exterior
parameter files to identify the material used for each cabinet part. For this reason, the materials must be
entered before the Interior and Exterior files can be created.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Material command from the Setup menu.
Entering Material Categories
Categories are a very good way of organizing the material list. A few good methods for categorizing
materials would be by wood species (Oak, Birch, Maple, Walnut, Cherry, etc.) or by material type (Solid
Stock, Plywood, Veneer, Laminate, Edge Banding). The steps for adding a category are:
1. Select the Categories button.
2. Select the New button.
3. Enter the name of the new category.
4. Select the OK button.
Editing Material Categories
1. Select the Categories button.
2. Select a category name from the list.
3. Select the Edit button.
4. Edit the category name.
5. Select the OK button.
Deleting Material Categories
1. Select the Categories button.
2. Select a category name from the list.
3. Select the Delete button.
4. Select the OK button.
A category cannot be deleted until all materials in that category have been deleted or moved to
another category.
2-9
Entering Materials
1. Select a category under which the new material is to be added.
2. Select the New button.
3. Select whether the new material is a panel material, solid stock, or edge banding.
4. Enter the material description.
5. Enter the material thickness for panel material or solid stock.
6. Enter the material cost.
7. Enter the width and length for panel material.
8. Select whether the material has a grain or not.
9. Select the OK button.
Editing Materials
1. Select the category that the material is located under.
2. Select a material.
3. Select the Edit button.
4. Make all necessary changes.
5. Select the OK button.
Warning: All information for a material can be changed at any time. If changing the description of
the material, it is important that the material be re-selected in all Interior parameters, Exterior parameters,
and Override files. Changing the material description here will not change it automatically in any
material-dependent files.
Changing Material Categories
1. Select the category that the material is located under.
2. Select a material.
3. Select the Edit button.
4. Pick a new category from the Category list.
5. Select the OK button.
Deleting Materials
1. Select the category that the material is located under.
2. Select a material.
3. Select the Delete button.
4. Select the OK button.
2-10
Hardware
Hardware entered here is cabinet construction hardware (i.e., drawer slides, pull-out slides, hardware
drawer sides, hinges, and pulls). This hardware is used by cabinets in a room and cabinet design.
Besides slides, hinges, pulls, and sides, other hardware can be added to the hardware list. Any
extra hardware can be used for setting up Linked Parts in Overrides or attached to cabinets as
accessories.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Hardware command from the Setup menu.
Entering Hardware Categories
Categorizing is a very good way of organizing the hardware list. A few good methods for categorizing
hardware are by brands (Blum, Mepla, Hettich, Salice, Amrock, Hafele, Accuride, etc.) or by hardware
type (hinges, slides, sides, pulls, etc.). The steps for adding categories are:
1. Select the Categories button.
2. Select the New button.
3. Enter the name of the new category.
4. Select the OK button.
Editing Hardware Categories
1. Select the Categories button.
2. Select a category name from the list.
3. Select the Edit button.
4. Edit the category name.
5. Select the OK button.
Deleting Hardware Categories
1. Select the Categories button.
2. Select a category name from the list.
3. Select the Delete button.
4. Select the OK button.
A Category cannot be deleted until all hardware in that category has been deleted or moved to
another category.
2-11
Entering Hardware
1. Select a category under which the new hardware is to be added.
2. Select the New button.
3. Enter the hardware description.
4. Enter the hardware cost.
5. Select the OK button.
Editing Hardware
1. Select the category that the hardware is located under.
2. Select a hardware.
3. Select the Edit button.
4. Make all necessary changes.
5. Select the OK button.
Warning: Hardware prices can be changed at any time. If changing the description of the hardware,
it is important that the hardware be re-selected in all Drawer Box parameters, Room Defaults, and Part
Overrides. Changing the hardware description here will not change it automatically in any hardwaredependent files.
Changing Hardware Categories
1. Select the category that the hardware is located under.
2. Select a hardware.
3. Select the Edit button.
4. Pick a new category from the Category list.
5. Select the OK button.
Deleting Hardware
1. Select the category that the hardware is located under.
2. Select a hardware.
3. Select the Delete button.
4. Select the OK button.
2-12
Parameters
Parameters are variables whose values determine the way in which rooms will be laid out and how
cabinets will be constructed. The parameters specified when a cabinet is designed include information
about overall cabinet sizes, toe kick heights, face frame widths, door and drawer overlaps, material types,
etc.
It is important to be thorough and not skip any parameter questions because it is thought they don't
apply, or their meaning is not understood.
The Cabnetware program looks at each parameter during the operation of the program. If there is a
value that has not been entered correctly or has been omitted, an error will be produced at some point in
the operation of the program. More simply put, if the parameters are not entered completely and
correctly, the screen designs and cutting lists will never be correct. The majority of technical support calls
that come in to Cabnetware are a result of parameters being set incorrectly.
The Cabnetware program disks include sample parameter files. These files may be edited to create new
files. The edited files can be renamed to any appropriate name chosen, or left as they are currently
named. The SAMPLE files furnished with the program are only meant to be examples, and will not
necessarily depict the way you construct cabinets. These files are meant to be used as templates to
customize the user's parameters.
Creating Parameter Files
New parameter files can be created to identify different cabinet types, construction methods, door types,
end panel types, interior materials, exterior materials, etc.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Parameter command from the Setup menu.
3. Select a radio button in front of a parameter type (Counter Tops, Layout, Cabinet, etc.).
4. Select the New button.
5. Enter the name of the new parameter file.
6. Answer all parameter questions in the new parameter file dialog box.
7. Select the OK button.
2-13
Modifying Parameter Files
The values in the parameter files can be modified.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Parameter command from the Setup menu.
3. Select a radio button in front of a parameter type (Counter Tops, Layout, Cabinet, etc.).
4. Pull down the combo box next to the selected radio button and choose a parameter file.
5. Select the Edit button.
6. Edit the parameter questions in the parameter file dialog box.
7. Select the OK button.
Copying Parameter Files
The best way to create a new parameter file is to use an existing parameter file as a template. By using
an existing parameter as a template for the new file, only the information that is different between the files
needs to be edited.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Parameter command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the radio button in front of a parameter type (Counter Tops, Layout, Cabinet, etc.).
4. Pull down the combo box next to the selected radio button and choose the parameter file to copy.
5. Select the Copy button.
6. Enter the name of the new file.
7. Select the OK button.
8. Follow the steps for Modifying Parameter Files to modify the new parameter file.
Deleting Parameter Files
When a parameter file is no longer needed, it can be deleted.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Parameter command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the radio button in front of a parameter type (Counter Tops, Layout, Cabinet, etc.).
4. Pull down the combo box next to the selected radio button and choose a parameter file.
5. Select the Delete button.
2-14
Printing Parameter Files
You may find it necessary to print a copy of your parameter files.
Printing Parameter Files
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Parameter command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the radio button in front of a parameter type (Counter Tops, Layout, Cabinet, etc.).
4. Pull down the combo box next to the selected radio button and choose the parameter file to print.
5. Select the Print button.
2-15
Counter Top Parameters
Counter top parameters describe to the program the way in which a counter top will interact with the room
and cabinet design. A variety of counter top files can be created with different names and values. Each
file will be available as options to choose from before beginning a room design.
Top Thickness
Enter the thickness of the counter top. If the buildup on counter tops is allowed to hang down over the
face frame, enter only the thickness of the deck itself. If the buildup of counter tops is even with the top of
the face frame, enter the thickness of the deck and buildup together.
The program subtracts the thickness of the counter top selected from the overall base cabinet
height. If entering a cabinet height, which does not include the counter tops in the Cabinet parameters,
then enter "0" for the Top Thickness parameter.
Back Splash Height
Enter the height of the back splash.
Front Edge Thickness
Enter the thickness of the front edge of counter tops. This value is used only for the graphic
representation of the counter top edge on the screen. It doesn't affect the height of the cabinet on the
cutlist.
Top Slat Thickness
This is the thickness of the decking for tile tops. If the decking is set behind the face frame, enter the
thickness of the decking. If the decking is set on top of the face frame, enter "0", since it was already
allowed for in the previous entry.
Click the Next button on the counter top wizard.
Counter Overhang at Front of Cabinet
Enter the distance the counter overhangs the front side of base cabinets.
Counter Overhang at Finished End
Enter the distance the counter top overhangs the finished ends of base cabinets.
Bar Overhang on Back Face of Peninsula/Island
Enter the distance the counter top normally overhangs the back of a peninsula or island cabinet.
Radius on Finished End
Enter the typical or default counter top radius that appears on all finished ends. Enter "0" if the default
should be for a square corner on all finished ends.
Radius on Peninsula/Island Overhang
Enter the typical or default counter top radius that appears on a peninsula or island overhang. This would
be the corner of the counter where the finished end and the finished back of the cabinet connect. If the
counter is to show a square corner on the overhang, set this parameter to "0".
2-16
TILE DECKING
FINISHED END
WALL END
Fig. 23
TILE DECKING
FINISHED END
WALL END
Fig. 24
2-17
COUNTER TOP
TOP
THICKNESS
Fig. 25
TOP OF CABINET
COUNTER TOP
SHIM
TOP THICKNESS
Fig. 26
TOP OF CABINET
2-18
Click the Next button on the counter top wizard.
Counter Top Method
Select the method of pricing for counter tops.
Counter Top Price
Enter a price for the selected method of pricing.
Edge Detail Method
Select the method of pricing for edge details.
Edge Detail Price
Enter a price for the selected method of pricing.
Back Splash Method
Select the method of pricing for back splashes.
Back Splash Price
Enter a price for the selected method of pricing.
End Splash Method
Select the method of pricing for end splashes.
End Splash Price
Enter a price for the selected method of pricing.
End Cap Method
Select the method of pricing the end caps.
End Cap Price
Enter a price for the selected method of pricing.
Clipped Corners Method
Only Each can be selected for this option.
Clipped Corners Price
Enter a price for each clipped corner.
Radius Corners Method
Only Each can be selected for this option.
Radius Corners Price
Enter a price for each radius corner.
Joints Method
Select the method of pricing for construction joints.
Joints Price
Enter a price for the selected method of pricing.
Cutouts Method
Only Each can be selected for this option.
Cutouts Price
Enter a price for each counter top cutout.
2-19
Layout Parameters
Layout parameters describe to the program the layout method used to automatically fill cabinets in a
room. A number of Layout files with different names and values can be created. Each Layout file is
available as options to choose from before beginning a room design.
(0) Integral (1) Modular
• Enter "0" if building integral cabinets.
•
Enter "1" if building modular cabinets that are custom in size or of any increment in width.
Modular Increments
If modular cabinets were selected for the previous parameter, and they are constructed on increments,
enter the increment size. If the modular cabinets are built on 3" increments, enter "3". If they are built on
1" increments, enter "1", etc. If the modular cabinets are all custom widths, leave this value at "0".
Modular End Adjustments: (0) Filler (1) Cabinet
When designing modular cabinets on increments, what is the typical procedure when it is not possible to
design a given wall length with incrementally sized modular cabinets?
•
Enter "0" if the difference is made up with a filler.
•
Enter "1" if the width of the last cabinet is customized to make up the difference.
Wall Height
Enter the default ceiling height for starting a room design.
Distance Door Opening to Cabinet
Enter the distance cabinets and appliances are held away from all door openings.
Distance Wall End to Cabinet
Enter the distance cabinets are held away from the end of a wall or sheetrocked opening.
Distance Window Opening to Cabinet
Enter the distance cabinets and appliances are held from all window openings.
Distance Base Return Pulled From Wall
If building integral or custom modular cabinets, enter the distance a base return cabinet is held away from
the adjacent wall. If butting the cabinet to the adjacent wall, enter "0". If the cabinet is held 1/2” from the
adjacent wall, enter ".5". See Fig. 1.
If building stock cabinets or modular cabinets built on increments, enter the maximum distance the base
return cabinet can be pulled out of a corner. While actually designing a room, depending on how the
walls are laid out, a cabinet with a return can be pulled any distance out of the corner up to the value
entered for this parameter. For example, if the cabinet is pulled a maximum of 3" out of the corner, enter
"3" for this parameter.
Minimum Distance Base Return Pulled From Wall
This parameter applies only to shops building stock cabinets or modular cabinets built on increments.
Enter the minimum distance base return cabinets can be pulled out of a corner. If building integral or
custom modular cabinets, leave this parameter set to "0".
2-20
Distance Upper Return Pulled From Wall
Enter a value for this parameter as was entered for the parameter Distance Base Return Pulled from
Wall.
Minimum Distance Upper Return Pulled From Wall
Enter a value for this parameter as was entered for the parameter Minimum Distance Base Return Pulled
From Wall.
Soffit Overhang
Enter the distance that a room soffit overhangs the front of the upper wall and floor-to-ceiling cabinets. If
there is no soffit in a room, leave this parameter set to "0".
Soffit Height Over Upper
Enter the soffit height over upper wall cabinets. If there is no soffit, leave this parameter set to "0".
Distance Upper Pulled From Ceiling/Soffit
Enter the distance upper wall cabinets are held down from the ceiling or soffit. This parameter is used for
leaving space between upper wall cabinets and the ceiling or soffit for ceiling scribes or molding. The
height of upper wall cabinets is determined by the value of this parameter, the Wall Height parameter and
the Minimum Distance from Floor to Upper Wall parameter.
The formula the program uses is:
Upper Wall Cabinet Height = Wall Height - (Distance Upper Wall Pulled from Ceiling/Soffit + Minimum
Distance from Floor to Upper Wall)
Soffit Height Over Pantries and Special Cabinets
Enter the soffit height over pantries and special cabinets. If there is no soffit, leave this parameter set to
"0".
Distance Pantries and Special Cabinets Pulled From Ceiling/Soffit
Enter the distance pantries and special cabinets are held down from the ceiling or soffit.
2-21
TOP VIEW OF CORNER RETURN CABINETS
DISTANCE RETURN PULLED FROM WALL
FACE FRAME
RETURN STILE WIDTH
CORNER STILE WIDTH
OPTION (0)
CORNER STILE BUTTS TO RETURN
OPTION (1)
CORNER STILE RUNS BEHIND RETURN STILE
RETURN STILE WIDTH
Fig. 1
STILE WIDTH
OPTION (2)
CORNER STILE BUTTS TO FACE FRAME RETURN
2-22
Cabinet Parameters
The purpose of the Cabinet parameters is to let the program know how a particular type of cabinet should
normally be designed. These files are used by the program to quickly do most of the cabinet designing
for the operator.
Right Partition: (0) No (1) Center (2) Flush Left (3) Flush Right
• Enter "0" if partitions are not placed behind cabinet mullions.
•
Enter "1" if partitions are placed behind most cabinet mullions and they are centered.
•
Enter "2" if partitions are placed behind most cabinet mullions and they are flush to the left of the
mullion.
•
Enter "3" if partitions are placed behind most cabinet mullions and they are flush to the right of the
mullion.
Uppers
Depth
Enter the typical depth of all upper wall cabinets. This amount will be from the front of the cabinet to the
back of the finished end. It does not include the doors. If backs are not rabbeted or dadoed in, but
applied to the back of the cabinets, this depth must include the back thickness.
Section Type: (0) Open (1) Doors
• Enter "0" to designate that all upper wall cabinets will have open sections.
•
Enter "1" to designate that all upper wall cabinets will have doors.
Doors: (0) Pair (1) Pair/Mullion (2) Hinge Left (3) Hinge Right
• Enter "0" if upper wall cabinets will be designed with a pair of doors.
•
Enter "1" if upper wall cabinets will be designed with a pair of doors separated by a door mullion.
•
Enter "2" if upper wall cabinets will be designed with doors hinged to the left.
•
Enter "3" if upper wall cabinets will be designed with doors hinged to the right.
If "0" or "1" is entered, the program will place a pair of doors on all sections or modules which are
close to the Optimum or Maximum Section/Module Width. If the program must make a section or module
that is half or less than the Optimum Section/Module Width, it will automatically place a single door.
Optimum Section/Module Width
Enter the optimum section or module width. When designing custom integral cabinets, this parameter
determines the number of sections added to each cabinet. It allocates just enough sections so that each
section size is as close as possible to this value.
The formula used is:
Number of sections = Cabinet Width / Optimum Section Width
If building modular cabinets, this value will be the ideal module width that the program will design the
overall cabinet width.
2-23
Maximum Section/Module Width
Enter the maximum section or module width the program will design. If the formula used in Optimum
Section/Module Width exceeds this value, then it will make another section or modular cabinet up to, but
not greater than the value of this parameter.
Minimum Section/Module Width
Enter the minimum section or module width the program will design. If the value of the section or module
is smaller than the minimum size, the program will automatically place a filler instead of a cabinet.
Fill 1 Max Catalog Module Width
The next four options only apply if saving stock catalog cabinets that will be used to do most or all cabinet
designs. For example, cabinets could be saved in 3" increments (B15, B18, B21, B27, B30, etc.). If
stock cabinets are not used, leave these four parameters at "0".
If saving catalog cabinets in specific increments, these four options will allow the designer to select how a
wall is filled with these catalog modular cabinets. Enter a value for each Fill option under upper wall and
base cabinets. For example, Fill 1 might have a value of "18", Fill 2 a value of "24", Fill 3 a value of "36"
and Fill 4 a value of "48". Later, while entering cabinets, these same options will be available. If Fill 1 is
chosen, point at a wall and "click". The maximum size catalog cabinet that will be used to fill a given
space will be 18" wide. If Fill 2 is chosen, the maximum size cabinet will be 24", etc. These four Fill
options allow flexibility in the size of cabinets used to design a given area.
Fill 2 Max Catalog Module Width
Fill 3 Max Catalog Module Width
Fill 4 Max Catalog Module Width
Number of Fixed Shelves
Enter the number of fixed shelves normally placed in upper wall cabinets.
Number of Adjustable Shelves
Enter the number of adjustable shelves normally placed in upper wall cabinets.
The program knows not to place shelves in cabinets over hoods, and it will only place one shelf
over a refrigerator or sink.
Drawer Side Length
Enter the length of drawer sides for upper cabinets.
Minimum Distance From Floor to Upper
Enter the distance from the floor to the bottom of an upper wall cabinet. If base cabinets are 36" high and
18" is desired between the counter and the bottom of wall cabinets, then enter "54". This parameter is
one of three used to determine the height of the upper wall cabinets.
The formula is:
Upper Wall Cabinet Height = Wall Height - (Distance Upper, Pantry and Special Cabinet Pulled from
Ceiling + Minimum Distance from Floor to Upper Wall)
2-24
Minimum Distance From Floor to Hood Top
Enter the distance from the floor to the bottom of an upper wall cabinet over a range or cook top. This
value is not the distance to the bottom of the hood, but to the bottom of the upper wall cabinet over the
hood.
Minimum Distance From Floor to Upper Over Sink
Enter the distance from the floor to the bottom of an upper wall cabinet that would be placed over a sink.
This would be an upper wall cabinet placed over a sink where there is no window.
Height Increment (Standard)
Enter the height increment that is to be used for upper wall cabinets. For example, if the typical wall
cabinets are to be 42" high in a room that is roughly 96" high, the program will change the cabinets to 411/4" if the room is actually 95-1/4" high and this parameter is set to "0". This parameter forces the
program to round the cabinet to the nearest increment of the value entered. If "2" were entered, the
cabinets in the example would still be generated at 42" until a 94” ceiling was entered. A 94” ceiling
height would generate a 40” high cabinet.
Access Door Opening Height
For upper wall and base cabinets, an access door can be placed on the backside of a peninsula cabinet
to provide access into the space next to the wall. Enter the typical access door opening height for upper
peninsula cabinets.
Access Door Opening Width
Enter the typical access door opening width for upper peninsula cabinets.
Bases
Section Type: (0) Open (1) Door(s) (2) Drawer/Door (3) Drawer Bank (4) Desk
Enter the default configuration for all base cabinet section or module openings as they will appear when
the program designs from this file.
• Enter "0" if all base sections will be left open.
•
Enter "1" if all base sections will all be designed with doors only.
•
Enter "2" if all base sections will all be designed as drawer over doors.
•
Enter "3" if all base sections will be designed as drawer banks.
•
Enter "4" if all base sections will be designed as desk sections.
Doors: (0) Pair (1) Pair/Mullion (2) Hinge Left (3) Hinge Right
• Enter "0" to design base cabinets with a pair of doors without a mullion.
•
Enter "1" to design base cabinets with a pair of doors separated by a mullion.
•
Enter "2" to design base cabinets with a single door hinged left.
•
Enter "3" to design base cabinets with a single door hinged right.
If "0" or "1" is entered, the program will place a pair of doors on all sections or modules which are
close to the Optimum or Maximum Section/Module Width. If the program must make a section or module
that is half or less than the Optimum Section/Module Width, it will automatically place a single door.
2-25
Depth
Enter the typical depth of all base cabinets. This amount will be from the front of the cabinet to the back
of the finished end. It does not include the doors. If backs are not rabbeted or dadoed but applied over
the back of the cabinet, this depth must include the back thickness.
Height
Enter the height of typical base cabinets. This should be the finished height including the thickness of the
counter top. The top thickness will be subtracted from the overall finished height when the program
calculates the cabinet parts. If you choose to enter the cabinet height and not include the counter top
thickness, make sure to enter a "0" for Counter Top Thickness in the Counter Top parameters.
Toe Kick Height
Enter the height of toe kicks from the floor to the bottom of the bottom rail.
Toe Kick Depth
Enter the depth of toe kicks, from the front of the cabinet to the front of the toe kick.
Toe Kick: (0) None (1) Attached (2) Detached (3) No Notch (Finished) (4) No Notch (All)
•
Enter "0" if the cabinets do not have toe kicks.
•
Enter "1" if the finished end extends all the way to the floor and is notched out for the toe kick.
•
Enter "2" if the finished end does not run to the floor and the toe kick is inset on the finished end. See
Fig. 3 to determine the appropriate toe kick construction.
•
Enter “3” if the finished end extends all the way to the floor and there is no notch for the toe kick. This
option causes the face frame left and right stiles to go to the floor on finished ends.
•
Enter “4” if both the all ends extend all the way to the floor and there is no notch for the toe kick. This
option causes the face frame left and right stiles to go to the floor.
Toe Kick Butts to Wall End (0) No (1) Yes
•
Enter "0" if the toe kick is to extend to the outside edge of the cabinet on all unfinished or wall ends.
•
Enter "1" if the toe kick butts to the inside edge of all unfinished or wall ends.
Front Toe Kick Finished End Adjustment
Enter a front toe kick adjustment for finished ends. The front toe kicks are calculated to be flush with the
outside face of unfinished and finished ends, if the value for this parameter is set to "0". If toe kicks are
held in from the outside of the finished end, an additional adjustment is entered here.
Front Toe Kick Wall End Adjustment
Enter any additional front toe kick adjustment needed at unfinished or wall ends.
Finished End Toe Kick Depth Adjustment
Enter a depth adjustment for a finished end toe kick on detached toe kicks. The program calculates the
finished end toe kick to be the depth of the cabinet, minus the value entered for the Toe Kick Depth
parameter.
2-26
OPTION (1)
Fig. 3
OPTION (2)
Optimum Section/Module Width
Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for upper wall cabinets.
It is recommended to place the same value in these parameters as was placed in the corresponding
parameters for upper walls. This will force the program to design the same amount of sections or
modules for both upper walls and bases on the same length of wall.
Maximum Section/Module Width
Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for upper wall cabinets.
Minimum Section/Module Width
Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for upper wall cabinets.
Fill 1 Max Catalog Module Width
Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for upper wall cabinets.
Fill 2 Max Catalog Module Width
Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for upper wall cabinets.
Fill 3 Max Catalog Module Width
Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for upper wall cabinets.
Fill 4 Max Catalog Module Width
Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for upper wall cabinets.
2-27
Number of Pull-Outs
Enter the number of pull-out shelves normally placed in base cabinets.
Number of Fixed Shelves
Enter the number of fixed shelves normally placed in base cabinets.
Number of Adjustable Shelves
Enter the number of adjustable shelves normally placed in base cabinets.
Height of Drawer over Door
Enter the height of the top drawer opening in a drawer over door cabinet.
Pull-Out Side Length
Enter the length of pull-out shelf sides.
Drawer Side Length
Enter the length of drawer sides.
Number of Drawers in Standard Bank
Enter the number of drawers in a typical bank or stack of drawers. Enter up to eight drawers.
Height of Drawer No. 1 (Top)
Enter the height of the top drawer opening in a typical drawer bank.
Height of Drawer Nos. 2-8
These seven fields apply to the remaining drawer openings in a typical drawer bank. Enter these as
Drawer No. 1 was entered, from top to bottom. If a typical drawer bank has only four drawers, enter "0"
for drawers 5 through 8.
If drawer heights are not entered correctly for a typical drawer bank, the program will automatically
override the entries here and calculate equal-height drawers when trying to enter a drawer bank. This
may be due to using a standard drawer bank on a non-standard height cabinet, or may be due to using
drawer heights that do not add up to the height of the cabinet. For convenience a worksheet has been
provided.
Drawer No. 1: (1) Single (2) Double (3) False (4) Double False
• Enter "1" for a single drawer.
•
Enter "2" for two drawers.
•
Enter "3" for a single false drawer.
•
Enter "4" for two false drawers.
Drawers Nos. 2-8: (1) Single (2) Double
• Enter "1" if the remaining seven drawers in a bank are typically single.
•
Enter "2" if the remaining seven drawers in a bank are typically double.
Access Door Opening Height
Enter the typical opening height for an access door on a base peninsula cabinet.
Access Door Opening Width
Enter the typical opening width for an access door on a base peninsula cabinet.
2-28
Pantry Cabinets
Depth
Enter the typical depth of all pantry cabinets. This amount will be from the front of the cabinet to the back
of the finished end. It does not include the doors. If backs are not rabbeted or dadoed but applied over
the back of the cabinet, this depth must include the back thickness.
Height of Bottom Section
Enter the opening height of the bottom section of a pantry cabinet.
Number of Fixed Shelves in Upper Section
Enter the number of fixed shelves normally placed in the upper section of a pantry cabinet.
Number of Adjustable Shelves in Upper Section
Enter the number of adjustable shelves normally placed in the upper section of a pantry cabinet.
Number of Pull Outs in Bottom Section
Enter the number of pull out shelves normally placed in the bottom section of a pantry cabinet.
Number of Fixed Shelves in Bottom Section
Enter the number of fixed shelves normally placed in the bottom section of a pantry cabinet.
Number of Adjustable Shelves in Bottom Section
Enter the number of adjustable shelves normally placed in the bottom section of a pantry cabinet.
Split-Level Cabinets
Overall Height
Enter the overall height of a typical split-level cabinet.
Upper Section Depth
Enter the depth of the upper level of a typical split-level cabinet.
The height and depth of the lower level of a split-level cabinet are determined by the base Height
and Depth parameters.
Type: (0) Open (1) Door (2) Drawer/Door (3) Drawer Bank
• Enter "0" if the upper level will be left open.
•
Enter "1" if the upper level will be designed with doors.
•
Enter "2" if the upper level will be designed as drawer over doors.
•
Enter "3" if the upper level will be designed as drawer banks.
2-29
Closet Components
Depth
Enter the typical depth of all closet components.
Drawer Side Length
Enter the length of drawer sides for a closet unit.
Distance Rod from Wall
Enter the distance the closet rod will be held from the wall.
Desk Sections
Desk Drawer: (0) None (1) Single (2) Double
• Enter "0" for desk sections with no drawer.
•
Enter "1" for desk sections with a single drawer.
•
Enter "2" for desk sections with two drawers.
Rail Under Desk Drawer: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" for no rail under the desk drawer(s).
•
Enter "1" for a rail under the desk drawer(s).
Rail Width Under Desk Drawer
Enter the rail width found below desk drawer(s).
Bottom Below Desk Drawer: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" if the desk drawer is not designed with an enclosed bottom.
•
Enter "1" if the desk drawer is designed with an enclosed bottom.
Extend Back Across Desk Section: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" if the back of the adjacent cabinet is not extended to cover the back of a desk.
•
Enter "1" if the back of the adjacent cabinet is extended to cover the back of a desk.
Break Desk Section: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" if the desk section is part of the adjacent cabinet, and the cabinet top or top stretchers of the
adjacent cabinet run over the drawer.
•
Enter "1" if the desk section is a separate unit.
2-30
Finished Ends
Finished End Type: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Laminated (Frame Cabinets Only)
• Enter “0” to design cabinets with normal finished ends.
• Enter “1” to design cabinets with paneled ends.
• Enter “2” to design cabinets with laminated finished ends.
Base Cabinet Ends next to Appliances: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Laminated (Frame Cabinets
Only)
• Enter “0” to design cabinets with normal finished ends.
• Enter “1” to design cabinets with paneled ends.
• Enter “2” to design cabinets with laminated finished ends.
The program will always place unfinished wall ends next to free-standing ranges, dishwashers and
compactors.
Miter Paneled Ends to Face Frame
•
Enter “0” if you want your paneled ends to butt to the back of your face frame.
•
Enter “1” if you want your paneled ends to miter into the face frames.
Face Frames
Face Frame Thickness
Enter the thickness of face frames.
Beaded Face Frames
•
Enter “0” if you want no bead.
•
Enter “1” if you want molding pieces to be provided and the opening to adjust accordingly.
•
Enter “2” if you want the beaded molding to be shaped into the frame parts themselves. The rails and
mullions will be extend the thickness of the bead, so that the bead may be coped.
Bead Width
Enter the thickness of the bead molding.
Refer to Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 8 to view the part names used in this parameter.
Rail Width
Enter the width of all cabinet middle rails.
Mullion Width
Enter the width of mullions used between cabinet sections.
Mullion Width Between Pair of Doors
Enter the width of mullions used between pairs of doors within a section.
Even if mullions are not used between a pair of doors, a value should be entered.
2-31
Finished Stile Width
Enter the stile width on all finished ends.
Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Wall)
Enter the stile width on all unfinished cabinet ends that but a wall
Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Cabinet)
Enter the stile width on all unfinished cabinet ends that but a cabinet
Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Appliance)
Enter the stile width on all unfinished cabinet ends that but an appliances.
Cutting Board Rail Width
Enter the width of the cutting board rails. Refer to Fig. 5 to view the part names used in this parameter.
Recessed Section Stile Width
These next three entries are only for manufacturers that recess face frames and doors under a sink or
cook top, as in Fig. 8. If inset doors are not used, enter "0" for both values. Enter the width of your
recessed section stiles.
RAIL
BASE TOP RAIL
CONT. MIDDLE RAIL
CUTTING
BOARD
RAIL
OPTION (0)
BROKEN MIDDLE
RAIL, OPTION (1)
MULLION
Fig. 5
BASE BOTTOM RAIL
FIG. 6
2-32
RECESSED SECTION STILE
FINISHED STILE
RECESSED SECTION
SET STILE
STILE
UPPER TOP RAIL
MULLION
BETWEEN
PAIR OF
DOORS
MULLION
UPPER
BOTTOM
RAIL
WALL SIDE
RECESSED SECTION STILE
STILE
Fig. 8
Fig. 7
Recessed Section Rail Width
Enter the width of your recessed section top rail.
Recessed Section Set Stiles Width
Enter the width of your recessed section set back stiles.
Base Top Rail Width
Enter the width of base cabinet top rails.
Upper Top Rail Width
Enter the width of top rails in upper wall cabinets. The same value will be used for the top rail in pantry
and special cabinets.
Base Bottom Rail Width
Enter the width of bottom rails in base cabinets. The same value will be used for the bottom rail in pantry
and special cabinets.
Upper Bottom Rail Width
Enter the width of bottom rails in upper wall cabinets.
Upper Return Stile Width
Enter the width of return stiles in upper wall cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1.
Upper Corner Stile Width
Enter the width of corner stiles in upper wall cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1.
2-33
Base Return Stile Width
Enter the width of return stiles in base cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1.
Base Corner Stile Width
Enter the width of corner stiles in corner base cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1.
Round Base Corner Cabinet: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" if base corner cabinets are angled at 45-degrees across the face of the cabinet.
•
Enter "1" if base corner cabinets are designed with an inside radius across the face of the cabinet.
Round Upper Corner Cabinet: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" if upper wall corner cabinets are angled at 45-degrees across the face of the cabinet.
•
Enter "1" if upper wall corner cabinets are designed with an inside radius across the face of the
cabinet.
Base Return Panel Width
Enter the width of returns on base cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1.
Base Return Construction (0-2)
Enter the construction method used for base cabinet returns. Refer to Fig. 1.
Upper Return Panel Width
Enter the width of returns on upper wall cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1.
Upper Return Construction (0-2)
Enter the construction method used for upper wall cabinet returns. Refer to Fig. 1.
Top Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken
This parameter applies to base, upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets.
• Enter "0" if top rails extend the full width of the cabinet, butting between the end stiles.
•
Enter "1" if top rails are broken by each section mullion, and the tops of the mullions will be flush with
the top of the top rail.
Middle Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken
This parameter applies to bases. Refer to Figs. 5 and 6.
• Enter "0" if middle rails will extend the full width of the cabinet, butting between the end stiles.
•
Enter "1" if middle rails will be broken by each section mullion.
Bottom Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken
This parameter applies to bases, upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets.
• Enter "0" if bottom rails extend the full width of the cabinet, butting between the end stiles.
•
Enter "1" if bottom rails are broken by each section mullion, and the bottoms of the mullions will be
flush with the bottom of the bottom rails.
Total Concept Face Frame: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" if separate face frame parts will be printed.
•
Enter "1" if face frame parts will not be printed, and a single piece is produced to cover the entire face
of the cabinet.
2-34
Face Frame Mortise and Tenon Depth
The value entered is added to both ends of rails and mullions where the mullion butts against another
face frame part.
2-35
Construction Parameters
Construction parameters are used to identify cabinet construction and relate directly to part sizes. If there
are problems with the cutlist not coming out accurately, it is most likely that a value in the Construction
parameters is not set correctly. Construction files are complex, and the operator needs to be very careful
when entering values. By entering a value for one parameter, it can unintentionally change the parts of a
cabinet, which might initially seem totally unrelated.
Description
Change the descriotion used to indentified this construction method.
Template
Select the CNC templates used to indentiy the CNC machining operation used for this construction
method.
Backs
Backs on Bases: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" for base cabinets with no back.
•
Enter "1" for base cabinets with backs.
Backs on Uppers: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" for upper wall cabinets with no back.
•
Enter "1" for upper wall cabinets with backs.
Backs on Pantries and Special Cabinets: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" for pantries and special cabinets with no back.
•
Enter "1" for pantries and special cabinets with backs.
Back Thickness
Enter the thickness of cabinet backs used on all cabinets.
Rabbet Backs into Finished Ends: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" for backs that are not rabbeted or dadoed into the finished ends. Refer to Fig. 10.
•
Enter "1" for backs that are rabbeted or dadoed into the finished end. Refer to Fig. 9.
By rabbeting or dadoing backs into the finished ends, the program automatically rabbets and dados
the backs into the upper wall bottoms, figuring the heights of the backs accordingly. If the finished end of
the cabinet is rabbeted or dadoed, but the backs are not rabbeted or dadoed into the upper wall bottoms,
it is necessary to enter a depth adjustment to the upper wall bottom. The back heights of upper wall
cabinets will also need an adjustment. These parameters will be discussed later.
Back Panel Clearance (Finished End - Finished End Cabinet)
Enter any additional clearance needed for the backs when a cabinet is finished on both ends and the
backs are rabbeted into the finished ends of the cabinets. The program will subtract this amount from the
overall width of the back. See Fig. 9.
2-36
Full Back Height: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" for backs that do not go all the way to the floor and are flush, rabbeted, or dadoed into the
base cabinet bottom.
•
Enter "1" for backs that extend pass the base cabinet bottom to the floor.
TOP OF CABINET
FINISHED END
FINISHED END
CABINET BACK
BACK PANEL CONDITIONAL CLEARANCE
REAR VIEW OF UPPER CABINET Fig. 9
2-37
TOP OF CABINET
FINISHED END
CABINET BACK
REAR VIEW OF UPPER CABINET Fig. 10
Stretchers
Stretcher Width
If top stretchers are placed in base cabinets, enter the width of the stretchers.
Top Stretcher Thickness
If top stretchers are placed in base cabinets, enter the thickness of the stretchers.
Number of Stretchers: (0) None (1) One (2) Two
• Enter "0" if top stretchers are not used in the construction of base cabinets.
•
Enter "1" if one top stretcher is used in the construction of base cabinets. This stretcher will appear in
the front of the base cabinet.
•
Enter "2" if two top stretchers are used in the construction of base cabinets. These stretchers appear
as one for the front and one for the rear of base cabinets.
Top Stretchers: (0) Butt Wall End (1) Over Wall End
• Enter "0" if stretchers normally butt, dado or rabbet to a wall end. See Fig. 11.
•
Enter "1" if stretchers run over wall ends of base cabinets. This option results in vertical partitions,
wall ends and backs being shortened by the thickness of the stretchers. See Fig. 12.
2-38
FINISHED END
OPTION (0)
BUTT WALL END
WALL END
Fig. 11
FINISHED END
OPTION (1)
OVER WALL END
WALL END
Fig. 12
2-39
Nailers
Upper, Pantry and Special Cabinet: (0) Broken (1) Continuous Nailer
• Enter "0" for separate nailers in each section between partitions in upper wall, pantry, and special
cabinets.
•
Enter "1" for notched partitions and a continuous nailer extending the entire length of the cabinet,
butting between the ends.
Distance from Face of Nailer to Back of Cabinet
Enter the distance from the inside face of the nailer to the back of the cabinet. The purpose of this
parameter is to determine exactly where the nailer is placed in a cabinet. This is used in determining a
nailer's length on a cabinet with a front, which is of a different width than the back, as with a cabinet on an
angled wall.
Number of Base Nailers: (0) None (1) One (2) Two
• Enter "0" if no nailers are used in the construction of base cabinets.
•
Enter "1" if one nailer is used in the construction of base cabinets. This nailer will appear at the top
back of the cabinet.
•
Enter "2" if two nailers are used in the construction of base cabinets. These nailers will appear at the
top and bottom of the cabinet.
Number of Upper Nailers
• Enter "0" if no nailers are used in the construction of upper wall cabinets.
•
Enter "1" if one nailer is used in the construction of upper wall cabinets. This nailer will appear at the
top of the cabinet.
•
Enter "2" if two nailers are used in the construction of upper wall cabinets. These nailers will appear
at the top and bottom of the cabinet.
Nailer Thickness
Enter the thickness of all nailer(s).
Base Nailer Width
Enter the width of nailer(s) used in base cabinets.
Upper Nailer Width
Enter the width of nailer(s) used in upper wall cabinets.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Nailer Width
Enter the width of nailer(s) used in pantry and special cabinets.
2-40
Shelves
Adjustable Shelf Depth Clearance
Enter the amount of clearance needed from the face of an adjustable shelf to the back of the face frame.
Adjustable Shelf Width Clearance
Enter the amount of clearance necessary for the width of adjustable shelves. This value should include
an amount to compensate for shelf hardware.
Base Fixed Shelf Depth Adjustment
The value entered here will be deducted from the depth of all base cabinet fixed shelves.
Closets
Closet Rod Length Adjustment
Enter a value to shorten the length of closet rods to accommodate any brackets used to hang the rod.
Peninsulas
Peninsula Cabinet Back Thickness
Enter the total thickness of backs on island and peninsula cabinets.
Double Backs on Peninsula and Island Cabinets: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0", if the constructed peninsula and island cabinets are to be the same depth as standard
cabinets after the peninsula cabinet backing is applied.
•
Enter "1" if the constructed peninsula and island cabinets are to be the same depth as standard
cabinets plus the thickness of the peninsula cabinet backing attached. This option will build a
standard cabinet and apply a second finished back.
Peninsula Finish Side Adjustment
If the depth of the finished sides on peninsula and island cabinets are greater than the depth of the
partitions and wall ends as in Fig. 13A, enter the difference. If there is no difference, enter "0" as would
be the case in Fig. 13B or Fig. 13C. To miter the back into the finished end, enter the back thickness.
Peninsula Finish Back Adjustment
If the finished backs on peninsula and island cabinets do not extend flush with the outside face of the
finished sides as in Fig. 13B, then enter that difference. If, as in Fig. 13A, the finished side is 3/4" thick,
enter ".75". If the finished backs do end up flush with the outside face of the finished sides, as in Fig.
13C, enter "0". If the width of the solid cap in Fig. 13B is to be deducted from the back width, enter the
width of the cap.
2-41
Construction Methods
Upper Bottom: (0) Butts To Wall Side (1) Under Wall Side (2) Under Wall Side-No Scribe
(3) Butts to Trimmed Wall Side
•
Enter "0" if the bottoms of upper wall cabinets butt, dado, or rabbet to all unfinished wall sides. See
Fig. 14.
•
Enter "1" if the bottoms of upper wall cabinets run under the wall sides and extends to the outside
edge of the stile. This option will deduct from the height of the wall side to accommodate the bottom
running underneath it. See Fig. 15.
•
Enter “2” if the bottoms of upper wall cabinets run under the wall sides but does not pass the outside
edge of the wall side. This option will deduct from the height of the wall side to accommodate the
bottom running underneath it. See Fig. 15.
•
Enter “3” if the bottoms of upper wall cabinets butt or rabbet to the unfinished wall sides, but does not
allow the wall end to extend past the bottom. See Fig. 14.
Upper Bottom: (0) Butts to (1) Under Finished Side
• Enter "0" if the bottoms of upper wall cabinets butt, dado, or rabbet to finished wall sides.
•
Enter "1" if the bottoms of upper wall cabinets run under the finished wall sides. This option will
deduct from the height of the finished wall sides to accommodate the bottom running underneath it.
Base Bottom: (0) Butts to (1) Under Wall Side
• Enter "0" if the bottoms of base cabinets butt, dado, or rabbet to unfinished wall sides.
•
Enter "1" if the bottoms of base cabinets run under unfinished wall sides. This option will deduct from
the height of the wall side to accommodate the bottom running underneath it. See Fig. 16.
2-42
FINISHED SKIN
FINISHED END
BACK
Fig. 13A
FINISHED BACK
WALL
END
SOLID CAP
FINISHED END
Fig.13B
FINISHED BACK
FINISHED END
Fig 13C
Fig. 13
FINISHED END
2-43
WALL END
BOTTOM
OPTION (1)
Fig. 16
WALL END
BOTTOM
OPTION (0)
2-44
Pantry and Special Cabinet Bottom: (0) Butts to (1) Under Wall Side
• Enter "0" if the bottoms of pantry and special cabinets butt, dado, or rabbet to unfinished wall sides.
•
Enter "1" If the bottoms of the pantry and special cabinets run under the unfinished wall sides. This
option will deduct from the height of the wall side to accommodate the bottom running underneath it.
Base, Pantry and Special Cabinet Bottom: (0) Butts to (1) Under Finished Side
• Enter "0" if the bottoms of base, pantry, and special cabinets butt, dado, or rabbet to finished wall
sides.
•
Enter "1" if the bottoms of base, pantry, and special cabinets run under the finished sides. This
option will deduct from the height of a finished side to accommodate the bottom running underneath
it.
Tops in Upper, Pantry, and Special Cabinets: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0", if no tops are found on upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets.
•
Enter "1" if tops are found on upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets.
Top: (0) Butts to (1) Over Wall Side (2) To Frame Edge
• Enter "0" if the top on upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets butt, dado, or rabbet to unfinished wall
sides.
•
Enter "1" if the top runs over unfinished wall sides, flush with the outside of the wall sides.
•
Enter "2" if the top runs over unfinished wall sides, flush with the outside edge of the face frame.
Top: (0) Butts to (1) Over Finished Side
• Enter "0" if the top on upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets butt, dado, or rabbet to finished sides.
•
Enter "1" if the top runs over the finished side, flush with the outside edge of the face frame edge.
This option will deduct the height of finished ends and add to the length of the top.
Base Partitions Extend to Floor: (0) No (1) Yes
• Enter "0" if partitions in base cabinets run down to the top of the bottom.
•
Enter "1", if partitions in base cabinets run all the way to the floor. This will create multiple bottoms
that break at all partitions.
Finished Side Inset from Frame Edge
Enter the amount the finished end insets from the frame edge on all finished ends. This value acts as a
scribe for finished sides. If the finished ends are flushed with the edge of the outside of the finished stile,
enter "0".
Paneled Finished Ends: (0) Single Side (1) Double Side
• Enter "0" if a single panel is placed on a finished end when using a paneled end.
•
Enter "1" if a double panel is placed on a finished end when using a paneled end. By selecting
Double Side on a paneled end, the program will place an interior wall end for the interior side and a
paneled end of the same size for the exterior side.
2-45
Bottom/Shelf/Toe Kick/Nailer Clearance
Enter the amount deducted from the length of the cabinet bottoms, shelves, nailers, etc., when a cabinet
is finished on both ends. The cabinet will be shorter by this dimension. This clearance allows the face
frame to overhang both finished ends. It also allows both finished stiles to be trimmed off flush with the
outside face of the finished ends. One-half of the amount entered will be allowed to overhang each
finished end. See Fig. 17.
Upper Interior Thickness Adjustment
The amount entered here is added to the interior thickness of upper wall cabinets. If the material is the
same but the thickness is different between upper wall and base cabinets, this entry controls the
compensating adjustments.
Upper Bottom Material: (0) Exterior (1) Interior (2) Laminate
• Enter "0" if the material used on the bottoms of upper wall cabinets is a finished exterior material.
•
Enter "1" if the material used on the bottoms of upper wall cabinets is an unfinished interior material.
•
Enter "2" if the bottoms of upper wall cabinets will be laminated.
FINISHED END
FINISHED END
STILE
FACE FRAME OVERHANG
Fig. 17
2-46
Height Adjustments
Base Wall Side Height Adjustment
Enter any necessary height adjustment to be applied to the unfinished wall sides on base cabinets.
Tip: Until a sample cutlist is printed to determine if the wall sides are calculated correctly, the height
adjustment parameters should remain at "0".
Upper Wall Side Height Adjustment
Enter any necessary height adjustment to be applied to unfinished wall sides on upper wall cabinets.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Wall Side Height Adjustment
Enter any necessary height adjustment to be applied to unfinished wall sides on pantry and special
cabinets.
Upper Top Scribe Adjustment
Enter the necessary adjustment to lower the top, wall ends, partitions, and backs in upper wall cabinets to
create a top scribe. See Fig. 18.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Top Scribe Adjustment
Enter the necessary adjustment to lower the top, wall ends, partitions, and backs in pantry and special
cabinets to create a top scribe. See Fig. 18.
Base Back Height Adjustment
Enter the necessary adjustment to change the back heights in base cabinets. The base cabinet back
height is calculated from the top of the cabinet to the bottom of the bottom.
Upper Back Height Adjustment
If "Rabbet Back into Finished Ends" was entered as "0", the program calculates the backs of upper wall
cabinets from the top of the top to the bottom of the bottom. Any adjustment to that length is entered
here.
If "Rabbet Back into Finished Ends" was entered as "1", the program calculates the backs of upper wall
cabinets from the top of the top to the top of the bottom, adding the "Rabbet Depth" set for the finished
ends. If the back is rabbeted or dadoed into the finished ends, the program rabbets or dados the backs
into the upper wall bottom, unless a value other than "0" is entered for the Upper Wall Bottom Depth
Adjustment. If, for any reason, there is a need to take off or add more than the program is making
adjustments for, enter a value here.
When upper wall cabinets are constructed with the top the full depth of the cabinet and the back rabbeted
or dadoed into the top, an adjustment needs to be made for the difference between the top thickness and
the rabbet or dado depth.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Back Height Adjustment
Enter the necessary adjustment to change the back heights in pantry and special cabinets. If the back is
run flush with the top of the top and the bottom of the bottom in pantry and special cabinets, enter "0".
2-47
FTOC and UPPER WALL
SIDE ADJUSTMENT
FINISHED END
WALL END
Fig. 18
Depth Adjustments
Wall Side Depth Adjustment
Enter any necessary adjustment to the depth of all unfinished wall sides.
Finish Side Depth Adjustment
Enter any necessary adjustment to be applied to the depth of finished sides. This adjustment is useful
mainly in three circumstances, which are (1) to add a scribe depth to the finished end; (2) to miter finished
ends into the face frame; and (3) to plow or dado the finished end into the back face of the face frame.
Upper, Pantry and Special Cabinet Top Depth Adjustment
Enter any necessary adjustment for the depth of upper, pantry, and special cabinet tops.
Base, Pantry and Special Cabinet Bottom Depth Adjustment
Enter any necessary adjustment for the depth of base, pantry, and special cabinet base bottoms.
Upper Bottom Depth Adjustment
Enter any necessary adjustment for the bottom of upper wall cabinets. If the back is rabbeted into the
upper bottom, enter "0".
If the back is fastened to the back edge of the bottom, enter the thickness of the back. The back height
will automatically be increased to bring the back flush with the bottom edge of the upper wall cabinet
bottom.
2-48
Laminated Adjustments
Oversize Width Value for Laminated Finished Ends
Enter a value to oversize the width of a piece of laminate applied over finished ends.
Oversize Length Value for Laminated Finished Ends
Enter a value to oversize the length of a piece of laminate applied over finished ends.
Oversize Width Value for Laminated Upper Bottoms
Enter a value to oversize the width of a piece of laminate applied over the bottoms of upper cabinets.
Oversize Length Value for Laminated Upper Bottoms
Enter a value to oversize the length of a piece of laminate applied over the bottoms of upper cabinets.
Oversize Width Value for Laminated Finished Backs
Enter a value to oversize the width of a piece of laminate applied over finished backs.
Oversize Length Value for Laminated Finished Backs
Enter a value to oversize the length of a piece of laminate applied over finished backs.
The oversize laminate values increase the size of any piece of laminate used on a cabinet, based
on the calculated size of the core material. Over-sizing the laminate allows it to be trimmed after it is
glued to the core material.
Corner Cabinets
The program accommodates for three styles of corner cabinets:
Diagonal (or radius) corner cabinet. See Fig. 19
Diagonal sink cabinet. See Fig. 20
Lazy Susan cabinet with drawers. See Fig.21
Lazy Susan cabinet without drawers. See Fig. 22
Base Corner Back Support Clearance
Enter the adjustment deducted from the back of the base corner cabinet, as shown in Fig. 20A. This
would be the distance from the wall to the edge of the back. This distance is from the wall, not from the
cabinet back.
Upper Corner Back Support Clearance
Enter the adjustment deducted from the back of the upper wall corner cabinet, similar to that shown in
Fig. 20A for base cabinets. The adjustment does not need to be the same as the Base Corner Back
Adjustment.
Base Left Back Adjustment
Enter a value to deduct from the width of the left back on all base corner cabinets. This might be the
case if you are not using Base Corner Back Supports on your base cabinets, but instead are overlapping
one back over another. Enter the back thickness if the left back is to be overlapped by the right back.
Base Right Back Adjustment
Enter a value to deduct from the width of the right back on all base corner cabinets.
Upper Left Back Adjustment
Enter a value to deduct from the width of the left back on all upper corner cabinets. This might be the
case if you are not using Upper Corner Back Supports on your upper cabinets, but instead are
2-49
overlapping one back over another. Enter the back thickness if the left back is to be overlapped by the
right back.
Upper Right Back Adjustment
Enter a value to deduct from the width of the right back on all upper corner cabinets.
Frame Construction (1-3)
Enter "1", "2" or "3", depending upon the construction method used, of the three options illustrated in Fig.
19 for joining diagonal corner cabinets to another cabinet. If a corner cabinet is finished on one side, it
will always be constructed as option “2”.
Sink Cabinet Outer Stile Width
Enter the width of the outer stile as indicated in Fig. 20A. The width is considered the longest face on a
beveled cut.
Upper Corner Bottom Clearance
If diagonal corner cabinets are constructed as in Fig. 19, option (1), enter the amount that is to be
deducted from the depth of the upper wall cabinets. By deducting from the depth of the cabinet, the
bottom will not touch the wall before the frame of the corner cabinet touches the frame of the adjacent
cabinet. Option (2) for Frame Construction above, usually will not require a deduction here.
Lazy Susan Corner Stile Width
Enter the width of the stile in the corner of lazy susan cabinets. This will cause one of the corner stiles to
lap in behind the edge of the other. See Fig. 21.
Lazy Susan Door Construction: (1-4)
Refer to Figs. 22A through 22D to identify the way lazy susan doors are constructed. Enter the number
that corresponds to the construction method used. The cutlist automatically adds the door thickness to
the inside stiles on both doors in options (1) and (3), and on the right door for option (2). In option (1),
with a stile and rail door; if the typical stile width is 2", then the left stile on the cutlist prints out at 2" with
the right stile on the same door printing out as 2" plus the thickness of the door. Option (4) prints the
inside stile widths as specified in the door parameters.
Lazy Susan Door Clearance
Enter the amount of door clearance as indicated in Figs. 22A through 22C. If using a double
demountable type hinge, some additional clearance will be needed in options (1) and (2). If not using a
double demountable hinge, there will probably not need to be any extra deductions, just increase the
overlay onto the stiles. If this is the case, enter "0". To determine door overall width in option (3), enter
the amount to deduct from the opening width of the lazy susan corner. In option (3), this amount is also
deducted from the top and bottom of the opening height in determining the door height.
2-50
SIDES
CORNER CABINET
OPTION (1)
FACE FRAME
CORNER CABINET
SIDES
OPTION (2)
FACE FRAME
CORNER CABINET
SIDES
OPTION (3)
DIAGONAL CORNER CABINET Fig. 19
FACE FRAME
BASE CORNER BACK ADJUSTMENT
BACK SUPPORT
BACK SUPPORT
Fig. 20A
NAILER
SINK
CABINET
OUTER
STILE
WIDTH
BACK
Fig. 20
2-51
LAZY SUSAN
WITH DRAWERS
LAZY SUSAN CORNER
STILE WIDTH
Fig. 21
LAZY SUSAN
WITHOUT
DRAWERS
Fig. 22
2-52
LAZY SUSAN
DOOR CLEARANCE
LAZY SUSAN
DOOR CLEARANCE
OPTION (1)
OPTION (2)
Fig. 22A
Fig. 22B
LAZY SUSAN
DOOR CLEARANCE
LAZY SUSAN
DOOR CLEARANCE
OPTION (3)
OPTION (4)
Fig. 22C
Fig. 22D
LAZY SUSAN
DOOR CLEARANCE
Joint Dimensions
Dado Depth
When using dados for cabinet bottoms, tops and fixed shelves are dadoed into the sides of cabinets, as
in Fig. 27, enter the depth of the dado used. If these parts are butted together, as in Fig. 28, enter "0".
Dado Depth into Face Frame
If the cabinet parts are dadoed into the face frame, enter that value here.
Dado Ends into Face Frame (0) No (1) Yes
•
Enter “0” if the Ends of the cabinets are not dadoed into the face frame.
•
Enter “1” if the Ends of the cabinets are dadoed into the face frame.
Dado Bottoms into Face Frame (0) No (1) Yes
•
Enter “0” if the Bottoms of the cabinets are not dadoed into the face frame.
•
Enter “1” if the Bottoms of the cabinets are dadoed into the face frame.
Dado Vertical Partitions into Face Frame (0) No (1) Yes
•
Enter “0” if the Vertical Partitions of the cabinets are not dadoed into the face frame.
•
Enter “1” if the Vertical Partitions of the cabinets are dadoed into the face frame.
2-53
Dado Horizontal Partitions into Face Frame (0) No (1) Yes
•
Enter “0” if the Horizontal Partitions of the cabinets are not dadoed into the face frame.
•
Enter “1” if the Horizontal Partitions of the cabinets are dadoed into the face frame.
Dado Top/Top Stretcher into Face Frame (0) No (1) Yes
•
Enter “0” if the Top/Top Stretcher of the cabinets are not dadoed into the face frame.
•
Enter “1” if the Top/Top Stretcher of the cabinets are dadoed into the face frame.
Partition Dado Depth
Enter the amount that partitions are dadoed into the tops and bottoms of base, upper wall, pantry and
special cabinets. Any amount entered here is added twice to upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets,
and once to base cabinets. If the bottom runs under a wall side, this amount will also be added to the
length of the wall end.
Divider Dado Depth
Dividers for the storage of trays, paper, etc., can be placed in each cabinet section opening while
designing a cabinet. Enter the depth that dividers are dadoed into the top, bottom, or sides of the
cabinet. If the dividers are simply butted to the top, bottom, or sides of the cabinet, enter "0". If some
type of divider clip is used and additional clearance is needed, enter a minus sign (-) followed by the
amount that needs to be deducted from the overall size of the dividers.
Nailer Dado Depth (Finished Ends)
If nailers are normally dadoed into the cabinet sides, then enter the depth the dado extends into the
finished ends.
Nailer Dado Depth (Unfinished Ends)
If nailers are normally dadoed into the cabinet sides, then enter the depth the dado extends into the
unfinished ends.
2-54
SIDE
DADO DEPTH
BOTTOM
Fig. 27
SIDE
BOTTOM
Fig. 28
2-55
Rabbet Depth for Backs (Finished Ends)
If the cabinet backs are rabbeted, as in Fig. 34, or dadoed, as in Fig. 35, into the finished ends of base
and upper wall cabinets, and the bottom of upper wall cabinets; enter the depth of the rabbet/dado. If the
backs are fastened flush onto the finished ends, as in Fig. 10, enter "0". The amount entered here will
also be used to calculate the height of the back on the upper wall cabinets.
Rabbet Depth for Backs (Unfinished Ends)
If the cabinet backs are rabbeted, as in Fig. 34, or dadoed, as in Fig. 35, into the unfinished ends of base
and upper wall cabinets, and the bottom of upper wall cabinets; enter the depth of the rabbet/dado. If the
backs are fastened flush onto the unfinished ends, as in Fig. 10, enter "0".
Back Inset into Cabinet
Enter the distance backs are inset into the back of all cabinets. If backs are fastened flush on finished
ends, as in Fig. 10, enter the thickness of the cabinet back. See Fig. 29.
Scribes
Upper Top Scribe Adjustment
Enter the necessary adjustment to lower the top, wall ends, partitions, and backs in upper wall cabinets to
create a top scribe. See Fig. 18.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Top Scribe Adjustment
Enter the necessary adjustment to lower the top, wall ends, partitions, and backs in pantry and special
cabinets to create a top scribe. See Fig. 18.
Base Scribe (Cabinet to Wall)
Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of base cabinets that butt to walls.
See Fig. 30.
Base Scribe (Cabinet to Cabinet)
Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of base cabinets that butt to other
cabinets.
Base Scribe (Cabinet to Appliance)
Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of base cabinets that butt to
appliances.
Peninsula Base Return Scribe
Enter the amount of scribe the unfinished wall end is typically set in from the outside edge of the finished
back.
Upper Scribe (Cabinet to Wall)
Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of upper cabinets that butt to walls.
See Fig. 32.
Upper Scribe (Cabinet to Cabinet)
Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of upper cabinets that butt to other
cabinets.
Upper Scribe (Cabinet to Appliance)
Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of upper cabinets that butt to
appliances.
2-56
Upper Return Scribe
Enter the amount of scribe on upper wall cabinets where they return into another cabinet. If the
unfinished wall end is not set in on a return side, as in Fig. 33, then enter "0".
Upper Bottom Rail Lip Adjustment
Enter the distance the upper cabinet bottom will be located from the top edge of the bottom rail.
Base, Pantry, Special bottom Rail Lip Adjustment
Enter the distance the base, pantry, or special cabinet bottom will be located from the top edge of the
bottom rail.
NAILER
BACK INSET INTO CABINET
BACK
SIDE
BACK
BACK INSET INT0
CABINET
Fig. 29
NAILER
SIDE
2-57
BASE SCRIBE
WALL END
Fig. 30
BASE PENINSULA RETURN SCRIBE
PENINSULA FINISHED BACK
WALL END
Fig. 31
2-58
UPPER SCRIBE
WALL END
Fig.32
SIDE
BOTTOM
WALL
UPPER
RETURN
SCRIBE
BOTTOM
Fig. 33
WALL
SIDE
2-59
BACK
BOTTOM
Fig. 34
BACK RABBETED INTO
BOTTOM
BACK
BOTTOM
Fig. 35
BACK DADOED INTO
BOTTOM
2-60
Door Parameters
Door files describe to the program the construction method, overlaps, and labor price for each door front
style. A nearly unlimited variety of Door files with different names and values can be created. The
following parameters must be completed for each door style produced.
1.
Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2.
Select the Parameter command from the Setup menu.
3.
Select the Door radio button.
4.
Pull down the combo box next to the Door radio button and choose a door file.
5.
Select the Edit button.
Description
Enter a descriptive name that best identifies this door style.
Door Type
• Select Slab to identify the construction of a one-piece door that might have edge banding applied.
•
Select Frame and Panel to identify the construction of a five-piece door. A raised panel door is a
good example of a frame and panel door.
•
Select Mitered to identify the construction of a five-piece door with mitered stiles and rails at the
corners of the doors.
•
Select MDF/RTF to identify the construction of a one-piece door that is routed to give the look of a
raised panel door.
•
Select Horizontal Battens to identify the construction of a batten door with horizontal slats.
•
Select Vertical Battens to identify the construction of a batten door with vertical slats.
Send Routing to CNC
Select this option if you have the Cabnetware MDF Door Enabler software and wish to shape the
profiles for this door style on your point-to-point machine or router.
This parameter option only appears if MDF is selected for the door type.
Sub Contract Door
Check this box if you order your doors from an outside source. With this option selected, the cutting list
prints only the overall door sizes.
2-61
Door Panel Material Type: (DOOR PANEL, TYPE 1-15)
Enter the number between 1 through 15 that indicates the type of material used for this door style's panel.
Warning: The numbers 1 through 15 represent the 15 screens available for defining panel material
types in the Exterior materials files that will be created later. The Exterior Materials files' Panel Material
lists will need to be organized so that the panel material for a particular door style is placed in the
same screen number position in each Exterior materials file. For instance, if a slab door is made
with 4/4 solid material and the Panel Material number is "1", the first item in the Oak exterior material file
will be 4/4 solid oak, in the Maple exterior file the first item would be 4/4 solid maple, and in the Cherry
exterior file the first item might be 4/4 solid cherry. See sample Panel Material Worksheet.
Door Labor
Enter the labor cost to build this particular door style. If the doors are built "in house", then this value will
be the labor cost per square foot, or the price to produce each door of this particular style. This value will
be defined as either per square foot or per door in the Pricing Setup. The value entered here is labor only
and should not include the cost of materials.
If the door is subcontracted, this value will be the price paid to the manufacturer for the door, whether
they charge by the square foot or for each door.
Door Thickness
Enter the overall thickness of this door.
Door Inset into Cabinet
Enter the distance the door insets into the cabinet. Enter the door thickness if you want to show an inset
door.
Clearance Between Pair of Doors
Enter the amount of space between pairs of doors when they are not separated with a mullion.
Oversize Door Value
Enter the value that the program should oversize this style of door. This value will be added to both the
stiles and rails of any panel door to increase the overall door size on a cutting list for milling of the door
edge to the door's finished size. If this door is identified as a slab door, the program will use this same
value to oversize the slab panel.
Third Hinge Door Height
Enter the minimum height at which the program should automatically place a third hinge on all doors. All
doors calculated to be this height or over will receive a third hinge.
Number of Panels Front to Back
Enter the number of panels that will be used for this door style. If this is a raised panel door, the value
would usually be "1". However, if this is to be a hollow core door, the value might need to be "2" for two
door panels, one on the front and one on the back of the frame.
Click the Next button on the door wizard.
2-62
Door Laminate
Front Laminate Type (0=none)
Select a number from 1 through 15 to indicate the type of material used for the laminate on the front of
the door. If you are not laminating the front of the door, leave this option set at “0”.
Back Laminate Type (0=none)
Select a number from 1 through 15 to indicate the type of material used for the laminate on the back of
the door. If you are not laminating the back of the door, leave this option set at “0”.
The Front Laminate Type and Back Laminate Type selections work in the same manner as the
numbering selection for the Door Panel Material type used for the door panel. The laminate number
selection references the Door Panel numbers identified in the Exterior parameter files. The Exterior
parameter files for Door Panel must be organized to identify any laminate materials selected here.
Oversize Laminate Value
Enter a value to oversize the laminate over the door core panel material. This value affects both the
width and length of the laminate size.
Alternate Door Style
Minimum Door Width
Enter a minimum width for which it would become necessary for the current door style to change to an
alternate door style.
Minimum Door Height
Enter a minimum height for which it would become necessary for the current door style to change to an
alternate door style.
Style
Select an alternate door style that will be used when either the minimum door width or length is reached.
When minimum door widths and lengths are reached, the program automatically switches a door
on a cabinet to the alternate door selected. This is useful if the identified door style becomes to small to
physically build and you want to swap to an alternate door style.
Click the Next button on the door wizard.
The displayed wizard screen pertains to the different overlaps given to the door style on upper, pantry,
and special cabinets. The program allows the door overlaps to vary in any direction. All door overlaps
are calculated from the face frame opening.
If this is an overlay door, enter the amount of overlay in each direction. If this is an inset door, enter the
amount by which the door is to be made smaller than the face frame opening in each direction. To make
the door smaller, as with an inset door, put a minus (-) sign before the amount entered. Enter the
overlaps or inset values given this door style for base, upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets in each
direction.
2-63
Special cabinets in the program are cabinets that are used to design any type of cabinet that is not a
typical base, upper wall, or pantry cabinet. This cabinet could be a bookcase, entertainment center,
hutch, microwave cabinet, etc. It allows any type of cabinet design. A special cabinet can also be
designed as a base, upper wall, or pantry cabinet. If building a special cabinet that is on the floor, then
the overlap for the bottom is taken from the parameter for the "Overlap of Bottom Rail" for base cabinets.
If the special cabinet is off the floor with a bottom that is visible, as in upper wall cabinets, then the door
will use the value of the parameter for the "Overlap of Bottom Rail" for upper wall cabinets.
Overlap of Top Rail
Enter the amount this door style overlaps the top rail of upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets.
Overlap of Finished Ends
Enter the amount this door style overlaps the finished stiles on upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets.
Overlap of Unfinished Ends
Enter the amount this door style overlaps wall end stiles on upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets.
Overlap of Mullions
Enter the amount this door style overlaps all mullions on upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets.
Overlap of Intermediate Rails
Enter the amount this door style overlaps any intermediate horizontal rails placed in upper wall, pantry,
and special cabinets.
Overlap of Bottom Rail
Enter the amount this door style overlaps the bottom rails in upper wall cabinets.
Click the Next button on the door wizard.
The displayed wizard screen pertains to the different overlaps given to the door style on base cabinets.
The program allows the door overlaps to vary in any direction. All door overlaps are calculated from the
face frame opening.
Overlap of Top Rail
Enter the amount this door style overlaps the top rail on base cabinets.
Overlap of Finished Ends
Enter the amount this door style overlaps the finished stiles on base cabinets.
Overlap of Unfinished Ends
Enter the amount this door style overlaps the non-finished stiles on base cabinets.
Overlap of Mullions
Enter the amount this door style overlaps all the mullions on base cabinets.
Overlap of Intermediate Rails
Enter the amount this door style overlaps any intermediate horizontal rails in a base cabinet.
Overlap of Bottom Rail
Enter the amount this door style overlaps the bottom rail of base, pantry, and special cabinets.
Click the Next button on the door wizard.
2-64
Top Rail Width
Enter the width of the top rail. See Fig. 36. If the top rail is arched, enter the width at its widest point.
See Fig. 37.
Bottom Rail Width
Enter the width of the bottom rail. See Fig. 36. If the bottom rail is arched, enter the width at its widest
point. See Fig. 37.
Stile Width
Enter the width of the door stile for this style door. See Fig. 36.
Rail Inset into Stiles
Enter the amount rails are inset into stiles. If using a mortise and tenon, or cope and stick, as in Fig. 36,
enter the length of the tenon. If butting the rails into the stiles, enter "0". If the frames are mitered
together, as in Fig. 38, enter the width of the stile.
Panel Inset into Top Rail
Enter the distance that the panel will inset into the top rail. If the top rail and stile are the same width, this
entry would usually be the same as the inset into the stiles. See Fig. 37. If the door is an inset panel
door with an arched top, enter the total amount that the panel insets past the inside, or bottom, edge of
the top rail. See Fig. 37. If the door has an arched top and the panel is applied to the back, enter the
value as if the panel does inset into the rail. If the top rail is 4" at its widest point and the panel is to be
flush with the top edge of the top rail, enter "4". If the panel is inset 1/8" from the top edge of a 4" top rail,
enter "3.875" (3-7/8").
Panel Inset into Bottom Rail
Enter the distance the panel will inset into the bottom rail. If the bottom rail and stile are the same width,
this entry would usually be the same as the inset into the stiles. See Fig. 37. If the door is an inset panel
door with an arched bottom, enter the total amount that the panel insets past the inside, or top, edge of
the bottom rail. See Fig. 37. If the door has an arched bottom and the panel is applied to the back, enter
the value as if the panel does inset into the rail.
Panel Inset into Stiles
Enter the distance the panel will inset into the stiles. If this is an inset panel door as in Fig. 36, enter this
amount here. If the plow depth in the stile is 1/2" and there is a 1/8" space between the edge of the panel
and the bottom of the plow, enter ".375" (3/8"). If the door is built with a back applied panel, as in Fig. 38,
enter the amount the panel insets past the inside edge of the stile. If the panel is the same width as the
door, making the edge of the panel flush with the outside of the frame, enter the width of the stile. If the
panel is not brought out flush with the frame, but is left in from the outside edge, enter the width of the
frame less the amount of the inset from the outside frame edge.
2-65
STILE WIDTH
TOP RAIL WIDTH
Fig. 36
BOTTOM RAIL WIDTH
PANEL INSET INTO STILES
DOOR PANEL
STILE WIDTH
Fig. 37
PANEL INSET
INTO TOP RAIL
TOP RAIL WIDTH
PANEL EDGE
BOTTOM OF PLOW
INTO STILE
PANEL INSET
INTO BOTTOM
RAIL
BOTTOM RAIL WIDTH
2-66
RAIL INSET INTO STILE
Fig. 38
PANEL INSET INTO STILES
PANEL
Click the Next button on the door wizard.
Top Rail Shape
Select the type of shape used for the top rail.
Straight Bottom Rail
Select this option if you want a straight bottom rail.
Mirror Top Rail Shape to Bottom Rail
Select this option if you want the same top rail shape mirrored to the bottom rail.
Flip Top Rail Shape to Bottom Rail
Select this option if you want the same top rail shape mirrored to the bottom rail and flip from right to left.
Create or Modify Rail Shapes
Select the Create or Modify Rail Shapes button to enter and modify your collection of available rail
shapes.
Click the Next button on the door wizard.
Inside Frame Edge
Select the type of profile used for the inside edge of the doorframe.
Outside Frame Edge
Select the type of profile used for the outside edge of the doorframe.
Raised Panel
Select the type of profile used for the door panel.
2-67
Create or Modify Profiles
Select the Create or Modify Profiles button to enter and modify your collection of available frame and
panel profiles.
Click the Next button on the door wizard.
Middle Rail/Mullion Width
Enter the width of middle rails or mullions that divide the panels on a multi-panel door.
Middle Rail/Mullion Cope Depth
Enter the cope depth for the rails and mullions on this style door. This parameter will lengthen the middle
rails and mullions to accommodate for this profile cut on the cutting list for both ends.
Panel Inset into Middle Rails/Mullions
Enter the distance the panel will inset into middle rails and mullions. All panels are calculated to be on
the inside edge of the middle rails and mullions when a "0" is entered here. Any value entered here will
make the panel larger in the direction of any middle rails and mullions.
Mullion Button
Select this button to add vertical mullions to the door style.
Middle Rail Button
Select this button to add horizontal rails to the door style.
Delete Button
Selecting this button with the complete middle rail or mullion highlighted will delete it. Also, selecting this
button with a segment of a middle rail or mullion highlighted will delete just that segment.
Move Button
Selecting this button with a middle rail or mullion highlighted will display a dialog box for identifying its
location.
Click the Next button on the door wizard.
Panel Texture
Select the Panel Texture button and choose a unique render texture to represent the panel of your door.
You will only select a texture here when you don’t want the door panel material changing when different
wood grain textures are selected for the room design. A good example for selecting a panel texture here
would be if you are selecting a texture that would represent a glass door panel.
No Grain
Select this option if you want no grain to appear on the door panel.
Vertical Grain
Select this option if you want vertical grain to appear on the door panel.
Horizontal Grain
Select this option if you want horizontal grain to appear on the door panel.
If the door has more than one panel as in a multiple panel door, click on each panel to change the
grain direction.
2-68
Click the Done button on the door wizard.
Two doors now appear on the screen. The left door represents a base cabinet door and the right door
represents an upper wall cabinet door. This screen allows you to create and modify the elevation design
of the door.
1. Select the Generate Default CAD button from the Main toolbar to generate the basic look of the door
style using the options selected in the Door wizard.
2. Select from the Panel Graphics for Elevations dialog the options you wanted displayed on door in
an elevation view.
3. Select the OK button.
4. Next select the Enhancements command from the CAD menu.
5. Select the Vertical Handle Location command from the Enhancements menu for a marker that will
place handles and pulls vertically; or select the Horizontal Handle Location that will place handles
and pulls horizontally.
6. Move the mouse over the door and click the mouse at the desired handle location.
7. Again select the Enhancements command from the CAD menu.
8. Select the Alternate Vertical Handle Location command from the Enhancements menu for a
marker that will place handles and pulls vertically; or select the Alternate Horizontal Handle
Location that will place handles and pulls horizontally.
9. Move the mouse over the door and click the mouse at the desired handle location.
10. Using the commands found on the CAD menu, create any additional details for each of the door
panels.
11. Select the Close button to save and exit the design.
2-69
Drawer Front Parameters
Drawer Front parameter files describe to the program the construction method, overlaps, and labor price
for each drawer front style. A nearly unlimited variety of Drawer Front parameter files with different
names and values can be created. The following parameters must be reviewed and completed for each
exiting drawer front style.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Parameter command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Drawer Front radio button.
4. Pull down the combo box next to the Drawer Front radio button and choose a drawer front file.
5. Select the Edit button.
Description
Enter a descriptive name that best identifies this drawer front style.
Drawer Type
• Select Slab to identify the construction of a one-piece drawer that might have edge banding applied.
•
Select Frame and Panel to identify the construction of a five-piece drawer. A raised panel drawer is a
good example of a frame and panel drawer.
•
Select Mitered to identify the construction of a five-piece drawer with mitered stiles and rails at the
corners of the drawers.
•
Select MDF/RTF to identify the construction of a one-piece drawer that is routed to give the look of a
raised panel drawer.
•
Select Horizontal Battens to identify the construction of a batten drawer with horizontal slats.
•
Select Vertical Battens to identify the construction of a batten drawer with vertical slats.
Sub Contract Drawers
Check this box if you order your drawer fronts from a sub-contractor. With this option selected, the cutting
list prints only the overall size of the drawer fronts.
Drawer Panel Material Type: (DRAWER FRONTS, TYPE 1-10)
Enter the appropriate Panel Material type number for drawer front material in the same manner as that
entered for "Panel Material" for doors at the beginning of Door Parameters. Also, see the Panel Material
worksheet.
Send Routing to CNC
Select this option if you have the Cabnetware MDF Door Enabler software and wish to shape the
profiles for this drawer style on your point-to-point machine or router.
This parameter option only appears if MDF is selected as the drawer type.
2-70
Drawer Labor
Enter the labor cost to build this particular drawer front style. If the drawer fronts are built "in house", this
value will be the labor cost per square foot, or the price to produce each drawer of this particular drawer
front style. This value will be defined as either per square foot or per drawer front in Pricing Setup. The
value entered here is the labor only and should not include the cost of materials.
If the drawer front is sub-contracted this value will be the price paid to the manufacturer for the drawer
front, whether they charge by the square foot or for each drawer front.
Drawer Thickness
Enter the overall thickness of this drawer.
Drawer Inset into Cabinet
Enter the distance the drawer insets into the cabinet. Enter the drawer thickness if you want to show an
inset door.
Oversize Drawer Value
Enter the value that the program should oversize this style of drawer on the cutlist. This value will be
added to both the stiles and rails of any frame and panel drawer to increase the overall drawer size on a
cutting list for milling of the drawer edge to the drawer's finished size. If this drawer is identified as a slab
drawer, the program will use this same value to oversize the slab drawer front.
Number of Panels Front to Back
Enter the number of panels that will be used for this drawer style. If this is a raised panel drawer, the
value would usually be "1". However, if this is to be a hollow core drawer, the value might need to be "2"
for two drawer panels, one on the front and one on the back of the frame.
Click the Next button on the Drawer Front wizard.
Drawer Laminate
Front Laminate Type (0=none)
Select a number from 1 through 15, which indicates the type of material used for the laminate on the front
of the drawer. If drawer fronts will not be laminated, leave this option set at “0”.
Back Laminate Type (0=none)
Select a number from 1 through 15, which indicates the type of material used for the laminate on the back
of the drawer. If drawer backs will not be laminated, leave this option set at “0”.
The Front Laminate Type and Back Laminate Type selections work in the same manner as the
numbering selection for the Drawer Panel Material type used for the drawer front. The laminate number
selection references the Drawer Front numbers identified in the Exterior parameter files. The Exterior
parameter files for Drawer Fronts will need to be organized to identify any laminate materials selected
here.
Oversize Laminate Value
Enter a value to oversize the laminate over the drawer core panel material. This value effects both the
width and length of the laminate size.
Select the Next button on the Drawer Front wizard.
2-71
Alternate Drawer Style
Minimum Drawer Width
Enter a minimum width for which it would become necessary for the current drawer style to change to an
alternate drawer style.
Minimum Drawer Height
Enter a minimum height for which it would become necessary for the current drawer style to change to an
alternate drawer style.
Style
Select an alternate drawer style that will be used when either the minimum drawer width or length is
reached.
When minimum drawer widths and lengths are reached, the program automatically switches a
drawer on a cabinet to the alternate drawer selected. This is useful if the identified drawer style becomes
too small to physically build and you want to swap to an alternate drawer style.
Select the Next button on the Drawer Front wizard.
Overlap of Top Rail
Enter the amount the drawer front overlaps the top rail on base cabinets.
Overlap of Finished Ends
Enter the amount the drawer fronts overlap finished stiles on base, pantry, and special cabinets.
Overlap of Unfinished Ends
Enter the amount the drawer fronts overlap unfinished stiles on base, pantry, and special cabinets.
Overlap Mullions
Enter the amount the drawer fronts overlap all mullions on base, pantry, and special cabinets.
Overlap Intermediate Rails
Enter the amount the drawer fronts overlap any intermediate horizontal rails on base, pantry, and special
cabinets.
Overlap Bottom Rail
Enter the amount the drawer fronts overlap the bottom rail on base, pantry, and special cabinets.
Click the Next button on the Drawer Front wizard.
Top Rail Width
Enter the width of the top rail. See Fig. 36. If the top rail is arched, enter the width at its widest point.
See Fig. 37.
Bottom Rail Width
Enter the width of the bottom rail. See Fig. 36. If the bottom rail is arched, enter the width at its widest
point. See Fig. 37.
2-72
Stile Width
Enter the width of the door stile for this style door. See Fig. 36.
Rail Inset into Stiles
Enter the amount rails are inset into stiles. If using a mortise and tenon, or cope and stick, as in Fig. 36,
enter the length of the tenon. If butting the rails into the stiles, enter "0". If the frames are mitered
together, as in Fig. 38, enter the width of the stile.
Panel Inset into Top Rail
Enter the distance that the panel will inset into the top rail. If the top rail and stile are the same width, this
entry would usually be the same as the inset into the stiles. See Fig. 37. If the door is an inset panel
door with an arched top, enter the total amount that the panel insets past the inside, or bottom, edge of
the top rail. See Fig. 37. If the door has an arched top and the panel is applied to the back, enter the
value as if the panel does inset into the rail. If the top rail is 4" at its widest point and the panel is to be
flush with the top edge of the top rail, enter "4". If the panel is inset 1/8" from the top edge of a 4" top rail,
enter "3.875" (3-7/8").
Panel Inset into Bottom Rail
Enter the distance the panel will inset into the bottom rail. If the bottom rail and stile are the same width,
this entry would usually be the same as the inset into the stiles. See Fig. 37. If the door is an inset panel
door with an arched bottom, enter the total amount that the panel insets past the inside, or top, edge of
the bottom rail. See Fig. 37. If the door has an arched bottom and the panel is applied to the back, enter
the value as if the panel does inset into the rail.
Panel Inset into Stiles
Enter the distance the panel will inset into the stiles. If this is an inset panel door as in Fig. 36, enter this
amount here. If the plow depth in the stile is 1/2" and there is a 1/8" space between the edge of the panel
and the bottom of the plow, enter ".375" (3/8"). If the door is built with a back applied panel, as in Fig. 38,
enter the amount the panel insets past the inside edge of the stile. If the panel is the same width as the
door, making the edge of the panel flush with the outside of the frame, enter the width of the stile. If the
panel is not brought out flush with the frame, but is left in from the outside edge, enter the width of the
frame less the amount of the inset from the outside frame edge.
Click the Next button on the Drawer Front wizard.
Inside Frame Edge
Select the type of profile used for the inside edge of the drawer front.
Outside Frame Edge
Select the type of profile used for the outside edge of the drawer front.
Raised Panel
Select the type of profile used for the drawer panel.
Create or Modify Profiles
Select the Create or Modify Profiles button to enter and modify your collection of available drawer frame
and panel profiles.
Click the Next button on the Drawer Front wizard.
2-73
Panel Texture
Select the Panel Texture button and choose a unique render texture to represent the panel of your
drawer. You will only select a texture here when you don’t want the drawer panel material changing
when different wood grain textures are selected for the room design. A good example for selecting a
panel texture here would be if you were selecting a texture that would represent a plastic laminate.
No Grain
Select this option if you want no grain to appear on the drawer panel.
Vertical Grain
Select this option if you want vertical grain to appear on the drawer panel.
Horizontal Grain
Select this option if you want horizontal grain to appear on the drawer panel.
Click the Done button on the Drawer Front wizard.
A drawer front now appears on the screen. This screen allows you to create and modify the elevation
design of the drawer front.
1. Select the Generate Default CAD button from the Main toolbar to generate the basic look of the
drawer front style using the options selected in the Drawer Front wizard.
2. Select from the Panel Graphics for Elevations dialog the options you wanted displayed on drawer
in an elevation view.
3. Select the OK button.
4. Next select the Enhancements command from the CAD menu.
5. Select the Vertical Handle Location command from the Enhancements menu for a marker that will
place handles and pulls vertically; or select the Horizontal Handle Location that will place handles
and pulls horizontally.
6. Move the mouse over the drawer front and click the mouse at the desired handle location.
7. Again select the Enhancements command from the CAD menu.
8. Select the Alternate Vertical Handle Location command from the Enhancements menu for a
marker that will place handles and pulls vertically; or select the Alternate Horizontal Handle
Location that will place handles and pulls horizontally.
9. Move the mouse over the drawer front and click the mouse at the desired handle location.
10. Using the commands found on the CAD menu, create any additional details for each of the drawer
front panels.
11. Select the Close button to save and exit the design.
2-74
Drawer Box Parameters
The Drawer Box parameters pertain to the drawer boxes themselves, not the style of drawer fronts. A
variety of Drawer Box parameter drawer files with different names and values can be created. Each file
will be available as options to choose from before beginning a room design.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Parameter command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Drawer Box radio button.
4. Pull down the combo box next to the Drawer Box radio button and choose a drawer box file.
5. Select the Edit button.
Drawer Box Description
Enter a descriptive name that best identifies this drawer box style.
Sub Contract Drawer Box
• Select “No” if your drawer boxes are made in house.
•
Select “Yes” if your drawer boxes will be ordered from an outside contractor. This causes the
program to produce an overall drawer box size on the cutlist.
Drawer Box Labor
Enter the labor cost to build this particular drawer box style. If the drawer box are built "in house", then
this value will be the labor cost per square foot, or the price to produce each drawer box of this particular
style. This value will be defined as either per square foot or per door in the Pricing Setup. The value
entered here is labor only and should not include the cost of materials.
If the drawer box is subcontracted, this value will be the price paid to the manufacturer for the drawer box,
whether they charge by the square foot or for each drawer box.
Drawer Slide Clearance (Each Side)
Enter the clearance required for drawer slides on each side of the drawer box.
Drawer Side Height Clearance
Enter the total amount deducted from the overall drawer opening height to determine the drawer side
height. If there is a 4-1/2" drawer opening height and a 4" high drawer side is used, enter ".5". See Fig.
40.
Drawer Side Thickness
Enter the thickness of the drawer sides. See Fig. 40.
2-75
FRONT
Fig. 39A
SUB FRONT
SIDE
FRONT
SIDE
SIDE
Fig. 39B
END
END
DRAWER SIDE
Fig. 39C
BOTTOM
Fig. 39D
DRAWER SIDE
END
END INSET INTO SIDES
DRAWER END
BOTTOM
DRAWER SIDE
Fig. 39E
BOTTOM INSET INTO
SIDES
DRAWER SIDE
DRAWER SLIDE
CLEARANCE
DRAWER
SIDE
HEIGHT
CLEAR.
SIDE THICKNESS
DRAWER END HEIGHT CLEARANCE
Fig. 40
2-76
FACE
FRAME
Drawer Box Sub Front
• Select “No” if no sub front is used. A sub front refers to an end attached directly to the drawer front.
If a sliding dovetail joint is used to fasten the sides to the front as in Fig. 39, a sub front is not used.
•
Select “Yes” if, however, a complete drawer box is built. The cutlist will print information for two ends,
one front and one back. See Fig. 39.
Drawer Sub Front Height Clearance
Enter the total amount deducted from the drawer side height to determine the drawer sub front height. If
the drawer sub front is the same height as the side, enter "0" for this parameter.
Drawer End Height Clearance
Enter the total amount deducted from the drawer side height to determine the drawer end height. If the
drawer end is the same height as the side, enter "0" for this parameter.
Drawer End Inset into Sides
Enter the amount by which drawer box ends inset into drawer box sides. This parameter applies to those
who use a locking, dovetail or miter joint in the construction of drawer boxes. If the ends butt to the sides
of the drawer box sides, enter "0". See Figs. 39C and Fig. 39D.
Drawer Bottom Inset into Side
Enter the depth of the dado or rabbet cut into the drawer box sides for the insertion of the bottom, as
shown in Fig. 39E. If the bottoms are fastened onto the bottom edge of the sides flush with the outside of
the drawer sides, enter the thickness of the drawer sides for this value.
Drawer Bottom Width Clearance
Enter the amount deducted from the width of the bottoms if the bottoms are dadoed or rabbeted into the
sides. If 1/4" is cut into each drawer side and 1/16" is to be deducted from the overall width of the bottom
so it will slide in easily, enter ".0625" (1/16"). If the tolerances are so close that no clearance is needed,
enter "0". See Fig. 39E.
Drawer Bottom Length Relative to Side Length
Enter the amount by which the bottom length differs from the drawer side length. If the bottoms are the
same length as the sides, enter "0". If the bottoms are 1/4" less than the sides, enter ".25".
2-77
Use Stock Drawer Sides
• Select "No" for drawer box sides that are produced "in house" and the flexibility of letting the program
figure the best custom drawer size is desired.
•
Select "Material" if purchasing manufactured drawer box sides or building them with stock of specific
heights.
•
Select "Hardware" if purchasing hardware for drawer sides, such as Metabox, Unigrass, or some
other prefabricated system with built-in slides.
Placing a value other than "No" tells the program to pick from a list of stock drawer box sides or
hardware and not to design custom drawer box sizes. The stock material or hardware sizes will be
entered in the next set of parameters.
When using stock drawer sides, the program still figures the maximum custom drawer box size as if not
using stock drawer sides. After figuring the maximum size drawer side needed for the drawer face, the
program reviews the drawer side list and selects a drawer side of the same height, or the next smaller
one available.
When using hardware sides for drawer sides, the program still figures the maximum custom drawer box
size as if not using hardware sides. After figuring the maximum size drawer side needed for the drawer
face, the program reviews the drawer side/slide sizes that are in the stock drawer side/slide list and
selects a drawer side/slide of the same height and length, or the next smaller one available.
Click the Next button on the drawer box wizard.
The following Stock Drawer Side/Slide Height questions only appear in the Drawer Box wizard if
“Material” or “Hardware” were selected in the "Stock Drawer Sides" parameter above. Otherwise they will
be skipped.
Stock Drawer Side/Slide Height No.1
• If "Material" was entered in the "Stock Drawer Sides" parameter above, enter the height of the
smallest pre-manufactured drawer side here and the progressively larger heights available in "Stock
Drawer Side/Slide Height" parameters 2 through 8.
•
If "Hardware" was entered in the "Stock Drawer Sides" parameter above, enter the height of the
smallest hardware drawer side/slide here and the progressively larger heights available in "Stock
Drawer Side/Slide Height" parameters 2 through 8.
2-78
Stock Drawer Length
• If "Material" was entered for the "Stock Drawer Sides" parameter above, enter the length of the
shortest stock drawer side available first and then progressively longer in the next five length boxes.
Enter "0" for each of these lengths if you want the program to create custom drawer side lengths for
each Stock Drawer Side Height.
•
If "Hardware" was entered for the "Stock Drawer Sides" parameter above, enter the length of the
shortest hardware available first and then progressively longer hardware in the next five Length
parameters.
Up to six side/slide lengths and types can be identified for each drawer side/slide height. For the
program to select the correct length they must be listed in order from shortest to longest.
Stock Drawer Hardware
If "Hardware" was entered in the "Stock Drawer Sides" parameter above, "click" the button and select
from the hardware list the drawer slide that represents the side height and length described in the
previous parameters.
Click the Next button on the drawer box wizard.
Stock Drawer Side/Slide Height Nos. 2 - 8
The next seven height parameters also pertain to the size of pre-manufactured drawer sides or slides.
Enter the drawer side/slide height of the stock sides or slides in increasing order of size. Enter the next
largest height as "Stock Drawer Side/Slide Height No. 2" and the largest size as the last parameter
completed. Not all eight parameter sections need to be completed.
Drawer Back Clearance
Enter the value for the space between the back of the drawer box and the face of the back panel.
Drawer Maximum Side Length
Enter the value of the largest length of drawer side that you produce in this style of drawer box.
Drawer Side Length Divisor
Enter the depth increment that is to be used for drawer boxes. This parameter forces the program to
round the drawer box to the nearest increment of the value entered. If "2" were entered, the drawer box
length would change in the increments of 2”.
Click the Next button on the drawer box wizard.
2-79
Pull-Outs
Sub Contract Pull Outs
• Select “No” If you pull outs are produced in house.
•
Select “Yes” if your pullout boxes will be ordered from an outside contractor. This causes the
program to produce an overall pullout box size on the cutlist.
Pull Out Labor
Enter the labor cost to build this particular pull out style. If the pull out are built "in house", then this value
will be the labor cost per square foot, or the price to produce each pull out of this particular style. This
value will be defined as either per square foot or per door in the Pricing Setup. The value entered here is
labor only and should not include the cost of materials.
If the pull out is subcontracted, this value will be the price paid to the manufacturer for the pull out,
whether they charge by the square foot or for each drawer box.
Pull Out Slide Clearance (Each Side)
Enter the amount of clearance required for pullout slides. This amount is deducted from the opening
width of each cabinet section. If the slides require a 1/2" clearance for each side, enter ".5". If extra
clearance is needed for an inset door and it is necessary to shim out past the opening, add this amount to
the slide clearance.
Pull Out Additional Clearance (Hinge Side)
Enter the amount of additional clearance required for a pullout slide to clear a hinged side of a cabinet
opening. This value is added to the Slide Clearance (Each Side) value entered previously.
Pull Out Front Width Clearance
Enter the amount of clearance that is needed for pullout fronts. The pullout front will be calculated from
the width of the cabinet section opening. If the front needs to clear each side of the section opening by
1/4", then enter ".5" for a 1/4" clearance on each side.
Pull Out Front Height
Enter the height of pullout shelf fronts.
Pull Out Side Height
Enter the height of pullout shelf sides.
Pull Out Side Thickness
Enter the thickness of pullout shelf sides. This parameter is used along with Slide Clearance to figure the
length of the pullout end.
Pull Out Sub Front:
• Select “No” if no sub front is used. A sliding dovetail joint good example when no sub front is needed.
•
Select “Yes” if a complete drawer box is built. The cutlist will print information for two ends, one front
and one back.
Pull Out Sub Front Height
If yes was entered in sub front, enter the height of the sub front used.
Click the Next button on the drawer box wizard.
2-80
Pull Out End Height
Enter the height of pullout shelf ends. See Fig. 40.
Pull Out End Inset into Sides
Enter the distance that your pullout shelf ends inset into each side. This applies mainly to those who use
a lock joint or dado to fasten the ends to the sides. If the ends butt to the sides, enter "0". See Fig. 39C
and Fig. 39D
Pull Out Bottom Inset into Sides
Enter the depth of the dado or rabbet used to inset the bottom into sides. See Fig. 39E. If the bottoms
are fastened onto the bottom edge of sides and flush with the outside face, enter the thickness of the side
for the amount of inset.
Pull Out Bottom Width Clearance
Enter the amount deducted from bottoms if the bottoms are dadoed or rabbeted into the sides.
If a 1/4" plow is cut into each pull-out side and a deduction of 1/16" from the overall width of the bottom is
needed so it will slide in easily, enter ".0625". If tolerances are so close no clearance is needed, enter
"0". See Fig. 39E.
Pull Out Bottom Length Relative to Sides
Enter the amount by which the bottom length differs from the side length of the pullout shelves. If the
bottoms are the same length as the sides, enter "0". If the bottoms are 1/4" less than the sides, enter
".25".
Distance from Cabinet Bottom to Bottom of First Pull Out
Enter the distance from the bottom of the cabinet opening to the bottom of the first pullout.
Pull Out Back Clearance
Enter the value for the space between the back of the pull out and the face of the back panel.
Pull Out Maximum Side Length
Enter the value of the largest length of pull out side that you produce in this style of pull out.
Pull Out Side Length Divisor
Enter the depth increment that is to be used for pull out. This parameter forces the program to round the
pull out to the nearest increment of the value entered. If "2" were entered, the pull out length would
change in the increments of 2”.
Click the Done button on the drawer box wizard.
The identification and selection of materials for drawer box and pull-out parts are now displayed on the
Drawer Box wizard. Each drawer box and pull-out part needs to have materials, waste factors, edge
bandings, grain directions, etc. selected.
The first part listed in the wizard is Drawer Sides. Click on the Material bottom to select a material used
for drawer sides. Continue entering information for Drawer Sides. Each drawer side option is listed and
explained below:
Part Name
The program has defined and listed the most common parts for interior construction. As each part is
selected from the "list box," the specific details for each may be entered.
2-81
Material
Select the material used for this drawer part by clicking on the Material button and selecting a material
from the material list.
Waste Add on %
Enter the percent of waste anticipated for this part and material. The value entered here affects the price
on the Estimates, Contacts, and the Material Cost List.
Stock Part:
Select this option if this is a part that is stocked in inventory. A list of the different-sized stock parts and
the materials they are made of will be entered in the "Stock Parts" option of the program. These parts will
not be printed on the cutlist with the cabinet parts which need to be cut, but will have their own listing at
the bottom of the cutlist. This will tell the cabinet assembler the quantity of each Stock Part to pull from
inventory for each job.
Send to Cutlist:
Select this option if this part is to be printed to the cutlist.
All parts are sent to an Individual cutlist regardless of the way this parameter is answered.
Send to Optimizer:
Select this option to send this part to the optimization program.
Send to CNC
Select this option to send this part to the CNC Center program.
Special Operations
Enter any special operations to be done to this part. This comment appears on the Master and Batched
cutlist.
Top Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Bottom Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Front Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Back Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Print: Width First Length First
Select whether the part will be listed first by width or length on the cutlist.
Grain Direction: Don't Care Width Length
This parameter only applies if you have the Panel Optimization program. Select whether the grain of the
material runs the width of the panel, or runs the length of the material, or you "Don't Care".
Pull down the Part Name drop-down list and select Drawer Ends. Select a material and enter all
necessary information for drawer ends. Continue this process for all the following drawer box and pullout parts.
2-82
Drawer Sides
Enter the parameters used for drawer sides in cabinets.
Drawer Ends
Enter the parameters used for drawer ends in cabinets.
Drawer Bottoms
Enter the parameters used for drawer bottoms in cabinets.
Pull-Out Fronts
Enter the parameters used for pullout fronts in cabinets.
Pull-Out Sides
Enter the parameters used for pullout sides in cabinets.
Pull-Out Ends
Enter the parameters used for pullout ends in cabinets.
Pull-Out Bottoms
Enter the parameters used for pullout bottoms in cabinets.
Select the Done button when materials and all other information have been entered for all drawer box
and pull-out parts have been filled out.
2-83
End Panel Parameters
The following parameters define construction methods for end panels, panel backs and wainscot
paneling.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Parameter command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the End Panel radio button.
4. Pull down the combo box next to the End Panel radio button and choose an end panel file.
5. Select the Edit button.
The following End Panel Wizard example will show the steps for creating a square raised panel end
panel. Other end panel styles will be created in the same manner. Depending on the type of end panel
selected, the end panel wizard will display different parameter options.
• Select the End Panel button from the End Panel wizard.
Panel Type
• Select Slab to identify the construction of a one-piece end panel that might have edge banding
applied.
•
Select Frame and Panel to identify the construction of a five-piece end panel. A raised panel end
panel is a good example of a frame and panel end panel.
•
Select MDF/RTF to identify the construction of a one-piece end panel that is routed to give the look of
a raised panel end panel.
Sub Contract End Panels
Check this box if you order your end panels from an outside source. With this option selected, the cutting
list prints only the overall end panel sizes.
Panel Material:
Enter a number from 1 through 15, which indicates the type of material used for this end panel.
Warning: The Panel Material referred to here is the same list referred to in the "Door and Drawer
Parameters". The Panel Material Worksheet developed at that time should be reviewed and used here.
The numbers 1 through 15 represent the 15 screens available for defining panel material types in the
Exterior materials files that will be created later. This number MUST correspond to the screen number of
the Panel Material used for this end panel style in each of the Exterior material files. The Exterior
Materials files' Panel Material lists will need to be organized so that the panel material for a
particular door style is placed in the same screen number position in each Exterior materials file.
For instance, if an end panel is made with 4/4 solid material and the Panel Material number is "1", the first
item in the Oak exterior material file will be 4/4 solid oak, in the Maple exterior file the first item would be
4/4 solid maple, and in the Cherry exterior file the first item might be 4/4 solid cherry. See sample Panel
Material Worksheet.
2-84
Applied/Paneled End Price
Enter the labor cost to build this particular end panel style. If the end panels are built "in house"; then this
value will be the labor cost per square foot, or the price to produce each end panel of this particular style.
This value will be defined as either per square foot or per door in the Pricing Setup. The value entered
here is labor only and should not include the cost of materials.
Panel Thickness
Enter the overall thickness of the end panel.
Oversize Panel Value
Enter the value that the program should oversize this style of end panel on the cutlist. This value will be
added to both the stiles and rails of any end panel to increase the overall end panel size on a cutting list
for milling of the edges to the end panel's finished size. If this end panel is identified as a slab end panel,
the program will use this same value to oversize the slab panel.
Click the Next button on the end panel wizard.
Base Top Rail Width
Enter the width of the top rail for base end panels. See Fig. 36. If the top rail is arched, enter the width at
its widest point. See Fig. 37.
Base Bottom Rail Width
Enter the width of the bottom rail for base end panels.
Base Front Stile Width
Enter the width of the stiles for a base end panel that will be near the front side of the cabinet.
Base Back Stile Width
Enter the width of the stiles for a base end panel that will be near the backside of the cabinet.
Tip: This parameter allows for the identification of a different width for the back stile to accommodate
for material to scribe the end panel against a wall.
Base Middle Rail/Mullion Width
Enter the width of any middle rails or mullions that might be added to an end panel.
Base Rails Inset into Stiles
If using a mortise and tenon, or cope and stick joint, as shown in Fig. 36, enter the amount that the rails
inset into the stiles on a base end panel. If the rails butt into the stiles, enter "0".
Base Panel Inset into Stiles
Enter the distance the panel will inset into the stiles on a base end panel. If this is an inset panel door as
in Fig. 36, enter the inset amount here.
Base Panel Inset into Top Rail
Enter the distance that the panel will inset into the top rail on a base end panel. If the top rail and stiles
are the same width, this entry should be the same as the inset into the stiles. If the panel insets into an
arched top rail, enter the total amount that the panel insets past the inside, or bottom, edge of the top rail.
See Fig. 37.
2-85
Base Panel Inset into Bottom Rail
Enter the distance that the panel will inset into the bottom rail on a base end panel. If the bottom rail and
stiles are the same width, this entry should be the same as the inset into the stiles. If the panel insets into
an arched bottom rail, enter the total amount that the panel insets past the inside, or top, edge of the
bottom rail. See Fig. 37.
Base Panel Inset into Middle Rail/Mullion
Enter the distance that the panel will inset into the middle rail, or mullion, on a base end panel. If the
middle rail, or mullion, and stiles are the same width, this entry should be the same as the inset into the
stiles.
Click the Next button on the end panel wizard.
Upper Top Rail Width
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Upper Bottom Rail Width
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Upper Front Stile Width
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Upper Back Stile Width
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Upper Middle Rail/Mullion Width
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Upper Rails Inset into Stiles
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Upper Panel Inset into Stiles
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Upper Panel Inset into Top Rail
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Upper Panel Inset into Bottom Rail
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Upper Panel Inset into Middle Rail/Mullion
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Click the Next button on the end panel wizard.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Top Rail Width
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Bottom Rail Width
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Front Stile Width
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
2-86
Pantry and Special Cabinet Back Stile Width
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Middle Rail/Mullion Width
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Rails Inset into Stiles
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Panels Inset into Stiles
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Panels Inset into Top Rail
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Panels Inset into Bottom Rail
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Pantry and Special Cabinet Panels Inset into Middle Rail/Mullion
Enter a value in the same manner as for the Base End Panel parameters.
Click the Next button on the end panel wizard.
Top Rail Shape
Select the type of shape used for the top rail.
Mirror Top Rail Shape to Bottom Rail
Select this option if you want the same top rail shape mirrored to the bottom rail.
Create or Modify Rail Shapes
Select the Create or Modify Rail Shapes button to enter and modify your collection of available rail
shapes.
Base
Select this option if you want to see the effect of the selected shape on the top or bottom rail sizes of a
base cabinet.
Upper
Select this option if you want to see the effect of the selected shape on the top or bottom rail sizes of an
upper cabinet.
Pantry/Special
Select this option if you want to see the effect of the selected shape on the top or bottom rail sizes of a
pantry or special cabinet.
Click the Next button on the end panel wizard.
Inside Frame Edge
Select the type of profile used for the inside edge of the end panel frame.
Raised Panel
Select the type of profile used for the end panel.
2-87
Create or Modify Profiles
Select the Create or Modify Profiles button to enter and modify your collection of available frame and
panel profiles.
Click the Next button on the end panel wizard.
Glass Panel
Select the Glass Panel button and choose a unique glass material to represent the panel of your end
panel.
No Grain
Select this option if you want no grain to appear on the end panel.
Vertical Grain
Select this option if you want vertical grain to appear on the end panel.
Horizontal Grain
Select this option if you want horizontal grain to appear on the end panel.
Click the Finished button on the door wizard.
You have completed the editing of your end panel parameters by way of the end panel wizard.
2-88
End Panel Graphics
After completing the end panel wizard, the graphical look of the end panel needs to be designed for
elevation viewing.
Warning: Because of the change to the end panel wizard, all end panel files will need to be modified
to identify end panel profiles and to regenerate elevation graphics. This should go fairly quickly since
most of your previous end panel parameters will already be transferred to the End Panel wizard.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Parameter command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the End Panel radio button.
4. Pull down the combo box next to the End Panel radio button and choose an end panel file.
5. Select the Edit button.
6. Select the End Panel/Wainscot Elevation Details button from the End Panel wizard.
7. Two blank end panels now appear on the screen. The panel on the left represents the base end
panel. The panel on the right represents the upper end panel.
8. Select the Generate Default CAD button from the Main toolbar to generate the basic look of the end
panel style from the options selected in the End Panel wizard.
9. Select from the Panel Graphics for Elevations dialog the options you wanted displayed on end
panels in an elevation view.
10. Select the OK button.
11. Using the commands found on the CAD menu, create any additional details for each of the door and
drawer panels.
12. Select the Close button to save and exit the design.
It is important to note when designing an end panel that you only design the look of the panel
itself, not the stiles and rails.
2-89
Interior Parameters
The Interior parameter files instruct the program regarding the material used for each part in the interior of
a cabinet. Each part is given a name, material type, waste factor, edge banding, grain direction, etc.
An interior file will be created for each type of interior material. The file name serves as a reminder of the
general type of interior each file name represents. For example, in the 3/4 SHOP BIRCH PLY file, the
wall ends may be listed as 3/4 SHOP BIRCH PLY, the shelves as 3/4 SHOP BIRCH PLY, the partitions
as 3/4 SHOP BIRCH PLY and backs as 1/4 LUAN. A file does not need to be created for every material
used in a cabinet. Instead, you just need to create one for each basic material type used. For instance, if
the interior always consists of the same materials, regardless of the exterior, only one file would be
necessary. The exact material description for each part will be entered in the specific Interior file.
Warning: If the Materials file has not been created, do not attempt to edit either the Interior or
Exterior files. The Materials file must be created first.
File Description
Enter a more descriptive extended file name, if desired. If a new description is not entered, the program
will retain the file name.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the basic material. In the 3/4 BIRCH PLY file this would be .75, or 3/4", which is
the thickness of the basic material of birch plywood. This is not necessarily the thickness of the part
currently being entered. If the parameters are being set up in metric, enter a metric value.
Interior thicknesses can vary depending on the type of cabinet designed. For example, a 1/2" fir
might be used on the interiors of base cabinets and 5/8" fir on upper wall cabinets. In this case, create a
file for 1/2" fir for base cabinet interiors and another file for 5/8" fir on upper wall cabinets. Later, when
entering a job, a different material type for upper wall and base cabinets can be specified.
Laminated End Cores
Enter the interior part of a finished end if laminated. This parameter has been renamed from previous
versions, but serves the same function.
Laminated Upper Bottom Cores
Enter the interior part of an upper bottom if laminated. This parameter has been renamed from previous
versions, but serves the same function.
Laminated Finished Back Cores
Enter the interior part of a finished back if laminated. This parameter has been renamed from previous
versions, but serves the same function.
Warning: The first three parts listed are core parts that will be laminated later. The parameters for
the laminate parts to be applied to these core parts can be found in the Exterior parameter file.
Return Blank Panels
Enter the parameters used for return blank panels.
Nailers
Enter the parameters used for nailing strips.
2-90
Back Panels
Enter the parameters used for cabinet backs.
Vertical Partitions
Enter the parameters used for interior partitions between cabinet sections.
Horizontal Partitions
Enter the parameters used for horizontal partitions between sections in pantry and special cabinets.
Fixed Shelves
Enter the parameters used for fixed shelves.
Adjustable Shelves
Enter the parameters used for adjustable shelves.
Dividers
Enter the parameters used for section dividers.
Wall Base Sides
Enter the parameters used for unfinished sides in base cabinets.
Wall Upper Sides
Enter the parameters used for unfinished sides in upper wall cabinets.
Bottoms
Enter the parameters used for bottoms on base, pantry, and special cabinets.
Interior Upper Bottoms
Enter the parameters used for the bottom of the upper wall cabinets. If "0" was entered for "Upper Wall
Bottoms" in the "Standard" file, then there will be no need to enter any values here. The program will look
in the exterior material file for this part.
Tops/Top Stretchers
Enter the parameters used for tops/top stretchers in cabinets.
Upper/Pantry/Special Cabinet Tops
Enter the parameters used for tops in upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets.
Corner Back Support
Enter the parameters used for the back support in corner and lazy susan cabinets.
User Defined No. 4
Enter the parameters used for a user-defined interior part that is placed in cabinets. Refer to the
Overrides setup for creating user-defined linked parts.
User Defined No. 5
Enter the parameters used for a second user-defined interior part that is placed in cabinets. Refer to the
Overrides setup for creating user-defined linked parts.
User Defined No. 6
Enter the parameters used for a third user-defined interior part that is placed in cabinets. Refer to the
Overrides setup for creating user-defined linked parts.
2-91
Part Information
Part Name
The program has defined and listed the most common parts for interior construction, plus three userdefined parts. As each part is selected from the "list box," the specific details for each may be entered.
Part Description
If the cutlist should print a description other than the current "Part Name", enter that name variation here.
If this parameter is left blank, the program uses the "Part Name" listed in the preceding "list box". This
option will not be available for all interior cabinet parts, as the program does not allow the names of some
parts to be changed.
Material
Select the material used for this cabinet part by clicking on the Material button and selecting a material
from the material list.
Waste Add on %
Enter the percent of waste anticipated for this part and material. The value entered here affects the price
on the Estimates, Contacts, and the Material Cost List.
Send to Cutlist:
Select this option if this part is to be printed to the cutlist.
All parts are sent to an Individual cutlist regardless of the way this parameter is answered.
Special Operations
Enter any special operations to be done to this part. This comment appears on the Master and Batched
cutlist.
Tip: This option also allows the operator to effect the manner in which cabinet parts are sorted. The
program normally sorts parts listed on the cutlist first by material, second by width, and lastly by length
from longest to shortest. If any "Special Operations" comments are entered, the program sorts the
material to be listed first by "Special Operations" comments, second by material, third by width, and lastly
by length from longest to shortest.
If the cabinet ends need to be listed separately from all other parts, enter a comment specifically for
cabinet ends, such as "Ends", in Special Operations, and the cutlist will print out all ends grouped
together and separate from other parts of similar material types and widths. To assure the program lists
parts with the same "Special Operations" together, it is extremely important that the comments be spelled
exactly the same.
First Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Second Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Third Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Fourth Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
2-92
Print: Width First Length First
Select whether the part will be listed first by width or length on the cutlist.
It is very important to clarify what the program considers width and length on parts cut from panels.
On the cutlist the width of a specific material is listed first and the length in order of longest to shortest is
listed second. The following parts are defined as follows:
•
End Panels and Partitions - Looking from the side of a cabinet at an end panel or a partition, the
width of the part is from the front to the back of the cabinet and the length of the part corresponds to
the height of the cabinet.
•
Tops, Bottoms and Shelves - Looking from above a cabinet at the tops, bottoms and shelves; the
width of the part is from the front to the back of the cabinet. The length of parts corresponds to the
length of the cabinet.
•
Backs and Door Panels - Looking from the front of a cabinet at the cabinet back or door panels; the
width of the part corresponds to the width of the cabinet, and the length of the part corresponds to the
height of the cabinet.
•
Drawer Fronts and Nailers - Looking from the front of a cabinet at the drawer fronts or nailers; the
width of the part corresponds to the height of the cabinet and the length corresponds to the width of
the cabinet.
Grain Direction: Don't Care Width Length
This parameter only applies if you have the Panel Optimization program. Select whether the grain of the
material runs the width of the panel, or runs the length of the material, or you "Don't Care".
2-93
Exterior Parameters
The Exterior files instruct the program regarding the material used for each part on the exterior of a
cabinet.
If values were entered for Laminated Finished Ends, Upper Wall Bottoms or Finished Backs in the Interior
files; then a special Exterior file will need to be created to print out the exterior piece of all the parts
mentioned.
An example of this would be a cabinet that is using a material such as Melamine, Kortron, Decolam, etc.,
for the interior piece of the finished ends, backs, and upper wall bottoms in the cabinet. The exterior
piece could be a wood veneer. In this circumstance the program will print two pieces for the finished
ends, finished backs and upper wall bottoms, one interior and one exterior. For this reason, an Exterior
file is needed that will tell the program what material is used for the exterior piece. In the case of wood, a
file will need to be created for every type of wood exterior that is used on laminated cabinets.
It is important that the thickness of the Exterior file represent the thickness of both the Interior
and Exterior materials together if any of these parts are being laminated.
If an exterior material is purchased pre-laminated or is laminated before the cabinet parts are cut, enter
the name of the material for that laminated part in the Exterior file only. An example of a material name
would be 3/4 MELAMINE/OAK. This would be a panel that has oak veneer on one side and melamine on
the other and is either purchased pre-laminated or is laminated before cutting.
File Description
Enter a more descriptive extended file name, if desired. If a new description is not entered the program
will retain the file name.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the basic material. In the 3/4 OAK PLYWOOD file this would be .75, or 3/4", which
is the thickness of the basic material of oak plywood. This is not necessarily the thickness of the part
currently being entered. If the parameters are being set up in metric, enter a metric value.
Part Name
The program has defined and listed the most common parts for exterior construction, plus three userdefined parts. As each part is selected from the "list box," the specific details for each may be entered.
Listed below are brief instructions for the various exterior parts that need to have their parameters edited.
Each part will have its own screen. Each parameter will be edited based on the instructions given above.
Laminated Finished Ends
Enter the parameters and material for an exterior laminate material that is applied to the side of the
cabinet for laminated finished ends.
Laminated Upper Bottoms
Enter the parameters and material for an exterior laminate material that is applied to the bottom of the
cabinet for laminated finished bottoms.
Laminated Finished Backs
Enter the parameters and material for an exterior laminate material that is applied to the back of the
cabinet for laminated finished backs.
Toe Kicks
Enter the parameters used on the front exposed portion of the toe kick.
2-94
Finished Base Sides
Enter the parameters used for the finished ends on the base cabinet.
Finished Upper Sides
Enter the parameters used for the finished ends on the upper wall cabinet.
Finished Backs
Enter the parameters used for the finished backs on island and peninsula cabinets.
Exterior Upper Bottoms
Enter the parameters used for the bottom of the upper wall cabinets.
Finished Upper Partitions
Enter the parameters used for the finished partitions of the upper wall cabinets.
Face Frames
Enter the parameters used for face frames.
Beads
Enter the parameters used for beads.
Drawer Stiles/Rails
Enter the parameters used for drawer stiles and rails.
Door Stiles/Rails
Enter the parameters used on door stiles and rails.
Valances
Enter parameters used for valances that are placed over windows or between cabinets.
Closet Vertical Panels
Enter the parameters used for closet verticals.
Closet Shelves
Enter the parameters used for closet shelves.
User Defined No. 1
Enter the parameters used for a user-defined exterior part that is placed on cabinets. Refer to the
Overrides setup for creating user-defined linked parts.
User Defined No. 2
Enter the parameters used for a second user-defined exterior part that is placed in cabinets. Refer to the
Overrides setup for creating user-defined linked parts.
2-95
User Defined No. 3
Enter the parameters used for a third user-defined exterior part that is placed in cabinets. Refer to the
Overrides setup for creating user-defined linked parts.
Warning: Following User Defined No. 3 will be ten screens for Drawer Fronts and fifteen screens for
Door Panels. These screens refer to the two lists that were developed when the Door and Drawer
Parameters file was created. See Panel Material Worksheet. The entries in the Material parameter of
these screens must coincide with the entries that were made in the Front Material parameter of the
Drawer section and the Panel Material parameter of the Door section. It may be necessary to review
the Door and Drawer Parameters file before proceeding.
Drawer Fronts (1-10)
Enter the parameters for each Drawer Front as was entered for the other cabinet parts in the Exterior file.
Add a New Drawer
Select this option if you need to add an additional drawer front material to the default 10 drawer fronts.
Door Panels (1-15)
Enter the parameters for each Door Panel as was entered for the other cabinet parts in the Exterior file.
Add a New Door
Select this option if you need to add an additional door panel material to the default 15 door panels.
Part Information
Part Description
If the cutlist should print a description other than the current "Part Name", enter that name variation here.
If this parameter is left blank, the program will use the "Part Name" listed in the preceding "list box". This
option will not be available for all interior cabinet parts, as the program does not allow the names of some
parts to be changed.
Material
Select the material used for this cabinet part.
Waste Add on %
Enter the percent of waste anticipated for this part and material. The value entered here will affect the
price on the Estimates or Contracts.
Send to Cutlist:
Select this option if this part is to be printed to the cutlist.
All parts are sent to an Individual cutlist regardless of the way this parameter is answered.
2-96
Special Operations
Enter any special operations to be done to this part. This comment appears on the Master and Batched
cutlist.
Tip: This option also allows the operator to effect the manner in which cabinet parts are sorted. The
program normally sorts parts listed on the cutlist first by material, second by width, and lastly by length
from longest to shortest. If any "Special Operations" comments are entered, the program sorts the
material to be listed first by "Special Operations" comments, second by material, third by width, and lastly
by length from longest to shortest.
If the cabinet ends need to be listed separately from all other parts, enter a comment specifically for
cabinet ends, such as "Ends", in Special Operations, and the cutlist will print out all ends grouped
together and separate from other parts of similar material types and widths. To assure the program lists
parts with the same "Special Operations" together, it is extremely important that the comments be spelled
exactly the same.
First Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Second Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Third Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Fourth Edge Band Button
Select the edge band material used for the identified edge of the part.
Print: Width First Length First
Select whether the part will be listed first by width or length on the cutlist.
It is very important to clarify what the program considers width and length on parts cut from panels.
On the cutlist the width of a specific material is listed first and the length in order of longest to shortest is
listed second. The following parts are defined as follows:
•
End Panels and Partitions - Looking from the side of a cabinet at an end panel or a partition, the
width of the part is from the front to the back of the cabinet; and the length of the part corresponds to
the height of the cabinet.
•
Tops, Bottoms and Shelves - Looking from above a cabinet at the tops, bottoms and shelves; the
width of the part is from the front to the back of the cabinet. The length of parts corresponds to the
length of the cabinet.
•
Backs and Door Panels - Looking from the front of a cabinet at the cabinet back or door panels; the
width of the part corresponds to the width of the cabinet, and the length of the part corresponds to the
height of the cabinet.
•
Drawer Fronts and Nailers - Looking from the front of a cabinet at the drawer fronts or nailers; the
width of the part corresponds to the height of the cabinet and the length corresponds to the width of
the cabinet.
2-97
Grain Direction: Don't Care Width Length
This parameter only applies if you have the Panel Optimization program. Select whether the grain of the
material runs the width of the panel, or runs the length of the material, or you "Don't Care".
2-98
Overrides
In some cases, parameters do not allow enough flexibility to accommodate every construction method.
The part override feature allows you to change the manner in which cabinet parts are calculated.
Overrides also allow additional parts and hardware to be linked to existing parts for printing on a cutlist.
Use the part overrides only in the event that the parameters cannot possibly handle a particular
construction situation.
Adjusting Part Sizes
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Overrides command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Construction parameter that you want the override applied to from the Construction File
combo box.
4. Select the part that you want the override applied to from the Part Type combo box.
5. Select each of the cabinet types that you want the override applied to from the Cabinet Types group
box.
6. Select the cabinet condition that you want the override applied to from the Condition group box.
7. Enter the amount you want to add or subtract from the existing part size by placing a value in the
Width or Length box under Current Part Modification. Entering a negative value will subtract the
value from the part size. Selecting the Fixed Width or the Fixed Length check box will cause the
program to fix the value(s) to always be that width or length.
8. Select the Done button.
Changing Part Materials
The following allows you to change the default materials selected for a part in your Interior and Exterior
parameter files.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Overrides command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Construction parameter that you want the override applied to from the Construction File
combo box.
4. Select the part that you want the override applied to from the Part Type combo box.
5. Select each of the cabinet types that you want the override applied to from the Cabinet Types group
box.
6. Select the cabinet condition that you want the override applied to from the Condition group box.
7. Pick a new material from the Material combo box under Current Part Modification.
8. Select the Done button.
2-99
Changing Part Descriptions
The following allows you to change the default part description of an existing part.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Overrides command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Construction parameter that you want the override applied to from the Construction File
combo box.
4. Select the part that you want the override applied to from the Part Type combo box.
5. Select each of the cabinet types that you want the override applied to from the Cabinet Types group
box.
6. Select the cabinet condition that you want the override applied to from the Condition group box.
7. Enter a new part description in the Description box under Current Part Modification.
8. Select the Done button.
Creating Linked Parts
Linked parts allow you to create a new part that is not currently on the cutlist. This new part will be linked
to an existing part of similar characteristics.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Overrides command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Construction parameter that you want the linked part applied to from the Construction
File combo box.
4. Select an existing part that you want the linked part applied to from the Part Type combo box.
5. Select each of the cabinet types that you want the linked part applied to from the Cabinet Types
group box.
6. Select the cabinet condition that you want the linked part applied to from the Condition group box.
7. Enter the number of linked parts in the Quantity box under Linked Parts.
8. A linked part is the same size as the existing part it is attached to. Enter the amount you want to add
or subtract from the existing part size for creating the linked part by placing a value in the Width or
Length box under Linked Parts. Entering a negative value will subtract the value from the existing
part size. Selecting the Fixed Width or the Fixed Length check box will cause the program to fix the
value(s) to always be the width or length.
9. Pick a material from the Material combo box if you want the material for the linked part different from
the material used on the existing part.
10. Enter a description for the new linked part in the Description box under Linked Parts.
11. Select the Done button.
2-100
Creating Linked Hardware
Linked parts allow you to link hardware to existing parts.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Overrides command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Construction parameter that you want the hardware applied to from the Construction File
combo box.
4. Select an existing part that you want the hardware applied to from the Part Type combo box.
5. Select each of the cabinet types that you want the hardware applied to from the Cabinet Types
group box.
6. Select the cabinet condition that you want the hardware applied to from the Condition group box.
7. Enter the number of pieces of hardware in the Quantity box under Linked Parts.
8. Pick a hardware from the Material combo box under Linked Parts.
9. Select the Done button.
Creating Appliance Files
Appliance files can be created to build a catalog of different appliances.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu.
3. Select a radio button in front of an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.).
4. Select the New button.
5. Enter the name of the new appliance file.
6. Answer all parameter questions in the Appliance Parameter dialog box.
7. Select the OK button.
Modifying Appliance Files
The values in the appliance files can be modified.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu.
3. Select an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.) and model from the desired
combo box.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. Edit the parameter questions in the Appliance Parameters dialog box.
6. Select the OK button.
2-101
Copying Appliance Files
The best way to create a new appliance file is to use an existing appliance file as a template. By using an
existing appliance file as a template for the new file, you edit only the information that will be different
between the files.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu.
3. Select the radio button in front of an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.).
4. Select an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.) and model from the desired
combo box.
5. Select the Copy button.
6. Enter the name of the new appliance in the New Appliance dialog box.
7. Select the OK button.
8. Follow the steps for Modifying Appliance Files to modify the new appliance file.
Deleting Appliance Files
When an appliance file is no longer needed, it can be deleted.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu.
3. Select an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.) and model from the desired
combo box.
4. Select the Delete button.
5. Select the OK button.
Creating Graphics for Appliance Files
The user can create custom graphical look of an appliance.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu.
3. Select an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.) and model from the desired
combo box.
4. Select the Graphics button.
5. Select either the Left, Front, Right, Back, or Top button from the Main toolbar to view each of the
appliance faces.
6. Create the look on the desired face using the tools from the CAD menu.
7. Continue this process for each of the appliance faces that you want to create custom graphics for.
2-102
Printing Appliance Files
You may find it necessary to print a copy of an appliance file.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu.
3. Select an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.) and model from the desired
combo box.
4. Select the Print button.
2-103
Pricing
Pricing allows the entry of values used by the program for calculating proposals, quotes and order forms
for a job. These prices include profit, overhead, tax percentages, markups and discount percentages;
and cabinet and accessory prices.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. Select the Pricing command from the Setup menu.
Profit/Overhead/Taxes
Profit, overhead, and tax percentages are entered and used by the program for proposal calculations.
1. From the File menu select Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select the Profit/Overhead/Taxes radio button.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. Enter percentages for profit and overhead.
6. Enter a description and percentage for up to three tax rates.
7. Select the OK button.
If profit and overhead are already included in your basic cabinet prices, enter a zero value for profit
and overhead.
2-104
Markups/Discounts
A list of different markup and discount rates can be created and made available for selection before a
proposal is calculated.
1. From the File menu select Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select the Markups/Discounts radio button.
4. Select the New button.
5. Select the Markup radio button if this is a markup, or the Discount radio button if this is a discount
on the Markup/Discount dialog.
6. Enter a Description and Percentage for the markup or discount.
7. Under Apply Percentage to, select the check box in front of each item the markup or discount will
apply to.
8. Under Apply to Percentage, select the appropriate check box as to whether profit, overhead or
taxes will apply to the percentage.
9. Select the Hidden Price check box if you do not want the markup or discount to be printed as a line
item on a proposal, quote or order form. This markup or discount will still be calculated as a
percentage into each appropriate line item.
10. Select the OK button.
11. Continue this process for each markup or discount you want to create.
Editing Markups and Discounts
1. From the File menu select Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select the Pricing.
3. Select a markup or discount from the Markup/Discount combo box.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. Make any necessary changes.
6. Select the OK button.
Deleting Markups and Discounts
1. From the File menu select the Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select a markup or discount from the Markup/Discount combo box.
4. Select the Delete button.
2-105
Price Lists
This option allows for the entry of labor values and any applicable upcharges for each cabinet type. A
number of different price list files can be created for different pricing values.
The program uses the labor values found in the price list, material cost from the material file, and
profit and overhead percentages to calculate cabinet prices.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select Pricing from the Setup menu.
3. Select the Price List radio button.
4. Select the New button.
5. Enter a price list name.
6. Select the OK button.
7. The following screen displays a grid with cabinet and cabinet item names down the right column, as
they are known by the program.
8. Enter your own descriptive name down the Item column for each price list item.
9. Enter a labor value for each item down the Price column.
10. Select a pricing method for each item down the Method column.
11. Select any applicable markups or discounts you want applied to each item in the Applicable box.
12. Select the OK button.
Modifying Price Lists
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select Pricing from the Setup menu.
3. Select a price list file from the Price List combo box.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. The following screen displays the Price List grid.
6. Make all necessary changes.
7. Select the OK button.
2-106
Copying Price Lists
The best way to create a new price list is to use an existing price list file as a template. By using an
existing price list as a template for the new file, only the information that is different between the files
needs to be modified.
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select a price list file from the Price List combo box to use as a template for the new file.
4. Select the Copy button.
5. Enter the name of the new price list file.
6. Select the OK button.
Pricing Using Labor Table Ranges
Besides entering labor values for cabinets by a straight lineal foot or square foot method, labor can also
be entered by a range of cabinet sizes.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select Pricing from the Setup menu.
3. Select a price list file from the Price List combo box.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. The following screen displays the Price List grid.
6. Select the pricing method L Table from the Method column for each cabinet type you want to price
from a range of cabinet sizes.
7. Select the Labor Table button.
8. The following screen displays the Labor Table grid.
9. Select a cabinet from the Cabinet column.
10. Select a pricing method from the Method column for the selected cabinet.
11. Enter range values in the Min. Ranges and Max. Ranges edit boxes for the selected cabinet.
12. Enter a labor value for each range in the Price columns for the selected cabinet.
13. Continue this process for each cabinet type being priced from the Labor Table.
14. Select the OK button.
2-107
Deleting Price Lists
1. Select the Setup command from the File menu.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select a price list file from the Price List combo box.
4. Select the Delete button.
Warning: Deleting a price list removes all prices for that file.
2-108
Accessories
Accessories are items or charges that are applied to a cabinet or room.
1. From the File menu select Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select the Accessories radio button.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. The following screen displays the accessory grid.
6. Enter a descriptive name for all accessories down the Accessory Name column.
7. Enter a price for the accessory material down the Master column.
8. Enter a price for the labor to apply or install the accessory down the Labor column.
9. Select the pricing method in the Pricing column for each accessory
10. Select the Applicables button and choose which markups or discounts you want applied to each
accessory item.
11. After entering accessories, select the Close button from the Main toolbar.
12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button.
Arranging Accessories
Accessories can be moved to a new location in the grid. This allows you to arrange accessories in any
order.
1. From the File menu select Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select the Accessories radio button.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. The following screen displays the accessory grid.
6. Select a number to the left of the accessory that you want to move.
7. Select the Move Row command from the Edit menu.
8. Select a number to the left of the accessory just below the location to which you want to move the
accessory. The accessory is moved above the selected row automatically.
9. Continue this process for each accessory that you want to move.
10. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar.
11. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button.
2-109
Creating Accessory Categories
1. From the File menu select Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select the Accessories radio button.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. The following screen displays the accessory grid.
6. Select the Categories command from the Edit menu.
7. Select the New button from the Category dialog.
8. Enter a category name.
9. Select the OK button.
10. Continue this process for each category that you wish to create.
11. If sub-categories are desired, select a category name and the Sub Cats button from the Category
dialog.
12. Select the New button from the Sub Categories dialog.
13. Enter a sub-category name.
14. Select the OK button.
Organizing Accessories Using Categories
1. From the File menu select Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select the Accessories radio button.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. The following screen displays the accessory grid.
6. Select categories and sub-categories for each accessory in the Category and Sub Category
columns.
7. After entering categories and sub-categories for all accessories, select the Close button from the
Main toolbar.
8. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button.
2-110
Setting Filters
When entering accessory names and prices in the grid, all accessories are displayed on the screen.
Sometimes you will find it helpful to focus on one specific accessory type by setting a filter.
1. From the File menu select Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select the Accessories radio button.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. The following screen displays the accessory grid.
6. Select the Set Filters command from the Edit menu.
7. Select the accessory type that you want displayed from the list.
8. Select the OK button.
Deleting Accessories
1. From the File menu select Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select the Accessories radio button.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. The following screen displays the accessory grid.
6. Select a number to the left of the accessory that you want to delete.
7. Select the Delete Row command from the Edit menu.
8. Continue this process for each accessory that you want deleted.
9. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar.
10. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button.
2-111
Proposal Wording
Proposal wording is the contractual text used by the program to print on a proposal. Separate contractual
wording can be used on both the top and bottom portion of the proposal.
1. From the File menu select Setup.
2. From the Setup menu select Pricing.
3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box.
4. Select the Proposal Wording radio button.
5. Select the Edit button.
6. The following dialog is divided into two parts - Upper Text Lines and Lower Text Lines.
7. Click on the Upper Text Lines text box and type in the wording, as you want it to appear at the top of
your bid.
8. Click on the Lower Text Lines text box and type in the wording, as you want it to appear at the
bottom of your bid.
9. Select the OK button.
Creating User Graphic Files
User Graphics allow the creation of moldings, floor patterns, windows, entrance doors, color palettes and
3D objects. The user may also import wallpaper patterns.
Become familiar with the CAD features found in the program. Most of the User Graphics options
use CAD extensively.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select a radio button in front of the graphic type being created (Molding, Flooring, Windows, etc.).
4. Select the New button.
5. Enter the name of the new graphic file.
6. Using the CAD options, create the desired graphical look.
7. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar.
2-112
Modifying User Graphic Files
The designs in user-created graphic files can be modified.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select a radio button in front of the graphic type being edited (Molding, Flooring, Windows, etc.).
4. Pull down the combo box next to the selected radio button and choose a file.
5. Select the Edit button.
6. Edit the graphics using the CAD options.
7. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar.
Copying User Graphic Files
Sometimes it is quicker to use an existing graphic file as a template for creating a new file. By using an
existing graphic file as a template for a new file, only the information that will be different needs to be
edited.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Pull down the combo box next to the selected radio button and choose the graphic file to copy.
4. Select the Copy button.
5. Enter the name of the new graphic file.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Follow the steps for Modifying User Graphic Files to modify the new graphic file.
Deleting User Graphic Files
When a user-created graphic file is no longer needed, it can be deleted.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select a radio button in front of the graphic type deleted. (Molding, Flooring, Windows, etc.).
4. Pull down the combo box next to the selected radio button and choose a graphic file.
5. Select the Delete button.
2-113
Molding Graphics
Molding profiles can be created and displayed on the tops of wall, pantry, and special cabinets.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select the radio button in front of Molding.
4. Select the New button.
5. Enter a description for the molding.
6. Enter the width and height of the molding. If the molding is built-up from several pieces, indicate the
overall molding size when all pieces are assembled.
7. Enter the molding offset. This is the distance the molding is pulled down from the top front edge of
the cabinet.
8. Enter a labor price for the molding.
9. Enter a material price for the molding.
10. Enter a waste factor for the molding.
11. Select the OK button.
12. A dashed bounding box representing the width and height of the molding is now displayed on the
screen. The upper left corner of the box will be where the top of the molding is located. The lower
right hand corner of the box will be the location of the bottom part of the molding where it meets the
cabinet front.
13. Select Preferences from the CAD menu.
14. Select 3D Enabled from the Preferences dialog.
15. Select Cursor Control from the CAD menu.
16. Select Snap Grid Size from the Cursor Control dialog and enter a grid value of “.125”.
17. Select Polyline from the CAD menu.
18. From the upper left corner of the molding box, move the cursor and click at each line segment
location until you have formed your molding shape.
19. To finish the last line segment, press the right mouse button and select the End Polyline command
from the Pop Up menu. The program finishes the polyline in the lower right corner.
20. Click on any line segments that you want to shape, and press the right mouse button selecting the
Modify Shape command from the Pop Up menu.
21. Select a shape from the CAD Modify dialog.
22. Select the OK button.
23. Continue this process for all curved-shaped line segments.
24. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar.
25. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button.
The molding face profile must always be drawn from the upper left corner to the lower right corner
and facing the left of the screen.
2-114
Molding Profile Example
In this example we will be drawing a 2” x2” crown molding.
1. Select the radio button in front of Molding.
2. Select the New button.
3. Enter “2” for the depth and “2” for the height of the molding.
4. Enter a molding offset. This is the distance the bottom of the molding will be held down from the top
of the cabinet.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Select Preferences from the CAD menu.
7. Select 3D Enabled from the Preferences dialog.
8. Select Cursor Control from the CAD menu.
9. Select Snap Grid Size from the Cursor Control dialog and enter a grid value of “.125”.
10. Select Polyline from the CAD menu.
11. From the upper left corner, move the mouse down until the X coordinate displays 0" and the Y
coordinate displays 1-3/4" and click the mouse.
12. Move the mouse down until the X coordinate displays 1-1/2” and the Y coordinate displays 1/2" and
click the mouse.
13. Move the mouse down until the X coordinate displays 1-1/2” and the Y coordinate displays 1-7/8" and
click the mouse.
14. Move the mouse down until the X coordinate displays 1-7/8” and the Y coordinate displays 0", and
click the mouse.
2-115
15. To finish the last line segment, press the right mouse button and select the End Polyline command
from the Pop Up menu. The program finishes the polyline in the lower right corner.
16. Click on the longest diagonal line segment to select it, and press the right mouse button and select
the Modify Shape command from the Pop Up menu.
17. Select the S-Curve radio button from the CAD Modify dialog.
18. Select the OK button.
19. With the s-curve line still selected, press the right mouse button and select the Reverse Curve
command from the Pop Up menu.
20. Click on the shorter diagonal line segment to select it, and press the right mouse button and select
the Modify Shape command from the Pop Up menu.
21. Select the Curve radio button from the CAD Modify dialog.
22. Select the OK button.
Because we don't want the back lines of the molding detail to show in perspective and elevation views,
it's important to turn off the 3D Enabled option from the CAD Preference dialog before drawing any more
lines. Any work done to the front of the molding should be done with the 3D Enabled option turned on,
so that it will display in elevations and perspectives. All CAD work done to the back of the molding should
be done with the 3D Enabled option turned off.
Draw the back of the molding with a polygon line.
Flooring Graphics
A repeating floor pattern can be created and displayed in a room layout.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select the radio button in front of Flooring.
4. Select the New button.
5. Enter the width and length of the repeating floor pattern.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Using the options found on the CAD menu, create a repeating floor pattern within the floor outline.
8. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar to save and exit the design.
2-116
Window Graphics
Custom window designs can be created and displayed in a room layout.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select the radio button in front of Windows.
4. Select the New button.
5. Enter the width and height of the window.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Using the options found on the CAD menu, create a window design within the window outline.
8. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar to save and exit the design.
Entrance Door Graphics
Custom entrance door designs can be created and displayed in a room layout.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select the radio button in front of Entrance Doors.
4. Select the New button.
5. Enter the width and height of the entrance door.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Using the options found on the CAD menu, create an entrance door design within the entrance door
outline.
8. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar to save and exit the design.
2-117
Color Graphics
Colors used by the program for different items in a cabinet and room design can be changed. Separate
color files can be created and selected during a room design to display different color combinations. The
default color file used by the program is called Colors.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select the radio button in front of Colors.
4. Select the New button.
5. Enter the name of the new colors file.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Select a color from the Custom Palette.
8. Click the fill and outline color buttons for each item using the selected color.
9. Select the OK button to save and exit the color file.
Changing the Custom Palette
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select a file from the Colors combo box.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. Double click on a color in the Custom Palette.
6. Select a new color from the Change Color dialog box.
7. Select the OK button.
8. Continue this process for any colors that you wish to change in your Custom Palette.
9. Select the OK button to save and exit the color file.
Changing Printer Line Weights
Line weights for different items being sent to the printer can be controlled.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select a file from the Colors combo box.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. Select the Line Weight button from the Color dialog box.
6. Select a printer line weight for each of the displayed options.
7. Select the OK button.
8. Continue this process for all color files that you wish to change.
2-118
Changing Wood Grain Colors
Wood grain is made up of four different colors. Changing any of the four colors allows you to change the
type of stain color the wood is displaying.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select a file from the Colors combo box.
4. Select the Edit button.
5. Double click on a color in the Wood Palette.
6. Select a new color from the Change Color dialog box.
7. Select the OK button.
8. Continue this process for each of the Wood Palette colors until the desired wood color is achieved.
9. Select the OK button to save and exit the color file.
Pull and Handle Graphics
The elevation representation and colors used to display cabinet pulls and handles can be changed.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select a pull or handle from the Pull/Handles combo box.
4. Select the Graphics button.
5. Using the options found on the CAD menu, create an elevation representation of the pull or handle.
6. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar to save and exit the design.
Wallpaper Graphics
Wallpaper samples can be scanned with a scanner and imported into the program to represent room
walls in designs.
Scanning Wallpaper
1. Scan only the repeating portion of the wallpaper sample into a paint program.
2. Reduce the pixel size of the image to 250 X 250 for a total of 62,500 pixels in the paint program. You
can change the number of pixels that represent the height and width, but the total number of pixels
can equal no more than 63,000 pixels.
3. Mask any unwanted edges of the wallpaper image with black. The program will not display any edges
of the wallpaper that have a black mask.
4. Save the image as a .PCX file with a .PCX extension.
2-119
Importing Wallpaper
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu.
3. Select the radio button in front of Wallpaper.
4. Select the Import button.
5. Select the drive where the .PCX file is located.
6. Select the directory where the .PCX file is located.
7. Select a .PCX file.
8. Enter the size of the sample, as you want it to appear on a wall in the Convert to Scale edit box.
9. Select the OK button.
Customer Information
Customer information is a database of customers, contractors, architects and designers. This information
is used to complete job-related information and reports.
1. Select Setup from the File menu.
2. Select Customer Information from the Setup menu.
3. Select the New button.
4. Select whether the information about to be entered will be for a Customer, Contractor or
Architect/Designer.
5. Enter all applicable Customer information.
6. Enter all applicable Ship To information.
7. Enter all applicable Bill To information.
8. Enter any applicable Notes.
9. Select the OK button.
Editing Customers
1. Select the customer being edited from the customer list.
2. Select the Edit button.
3. Make all necessary changes.
4. Select the OK button.
Deleting Customers
1. Select the customer being deleted from the customer list.
2. Select the Delete button.
2-120
Chapter 3
Features
Starting a New Room Design
Before beginning a room and cabinet design, you must first create a new room window.
1. Select the New Room command from the File menu, or select the New Room button from
the Main toolbar.
2. Select the Parameters tab.
3. Select parameter files from the Parameters dialog box.
4. Select the Information tab.
5. Fill out all necessary room information from the Information dialog box.
6. Select the Hardware tab.
7. Select your hardware from the Hardware dialog box.
8. Select the OK button.
9. Begin entering walls from the Wall menu.
Starting a Quick Job
A quick job allows the entry of custom cabinets, and accessories into a room for a job without
designing a room. The selected cabinets and accessories can be used to generate a proposal or
cutlist.
1. Select the New Room command from the File menu, or select the New Room button from
the Main toolbar.
2. Select the Parameters tab.
3. Select the Quick Job check box.
4. Select parameter files from the Parameters dialog box.
5. Select the Information tab.
6. Fill out all necessary room information from the Information dialog box.
7. Select the Hardware tab.
8. Select your hardware from the Hardware dialog box.
9. Select the OK button.
10. Begin picking cabinets and accessories.
3-1
Entering Room Defaults
When a new room is started, the program prompts for the room defaults. The room defaults
consist of the parameter files that will be used for the room design and the calculation of cutting
lists.
1. Select the New Room command from the File menu, or select the New Room button from
the Main toolbar.
2. Select the Parameters tab.
3. Select a Counter Top parameter for the new room.
4. Select the Interior parameter files required for the new room.
5. Select the Exterior parameter files required for the new room.
6. Select a Layout parameter for the new room.
7. Select a Cabinet parameter for the new room.
8. Select the Construction parameter files required for the new room.
9. Select the Door parameter files required for the new room.
10. Select the Drawer Front parameters file required for the new room.
11. Select a Drawer Box parameter file.
12. Select the End Panel parameter files required for the new room.
13. Enter a value for Room Quantity.
14. Enter a cabinet starting number.
15. Select the Information tab.
16. Fill out all necessary room information from the Information dialog.
17. Select the Hardware tab.
18. Select your hardware from the Hardware dialog.
19. Select the OK button on the Room Default dialog box.
20. Begin entering walls from the Wall menu.
3-2
Changing Room Defaults
Sometimes a previously entered room will need the defaults changed from those that were
selected when the room was first designed.
1. Select the Open Room command from the File menu to open a previously saved room.
2. Select the Room Defaults command from the Modify menu.
3. Change the parameters and room information in the Room Defaults dialog box.
4. Select the OK button on the Room Defaults dialog box.
5. Select the Save or Save As command from the File menu, or choose the Save button from
the Main toolbar to save the room default changes.
The counter top parameters should not be changed unless the new counter top parameter
is the same thickness as the thickness of the counter top when the room was first designed.
Entering Job Information
Once a room is saved to a job, information can be entered concerning the job.
1. With a current room loaded and saved to a job, select the Job Information command from
the Modify menu.
2. Select the Customer button to access customer information from the customer database, or
enter customer information manually.
3. Select the Contractor to access contractor information from the customer database, or enter
contractor information manually.
4. Select the Architect/Designer button to access Architect or Designer information from the
customer database, or enter Architect/Designer information manually.
5. Enter Ship to information.
6. Enter Job information.
7. Enter any job notes.
8. Select the OK button to automatically save the information with the job.
3-3
Opening a Job and Room File
To view or modify a saved room design, you must first open a job and room file.
1. Select the Open Room command from the File menu, or select the Open Room button from
the Main toolbar.
2. Select the drive where the job and room file is located from the Open Room dialog box.
3. Select the directory where the job and file is located.
4. Select a job from the Job list.
5. Select a room from the Room list.
6. Select the OK button.
Both a job file and a room file must be selected to open a room.
Closing a Design
A design can be closed without quitting the program. If a design is displayed in more than one
window, the program closes all windows containing the active design.
•
Select the Close Room command from the File menu, or choose the Close Room button
from the Main toolbar.
Warning: If the design is not saved before choosing the Close Room option, the program
prompts you to save the design. If you changed the design since it was last saved, the program
prompts you to save the design. If you close a design without saving it, all changes since it was
last saved are lost.
Saving a Design
The current room and cabinet design can be saved to disk by using either the Save or Save As
command.
1. Select the Save or Save As command from the File menu, or choose the Save button from
the Main toolbar.
2. From the Save As dialog box, select a drive in which to store the document.
3. Select the directory where the document is to be stored.
4. Enter the name of the job.
5. Select the OK button.
3-4
Updating Saved Room Designs
To routinely save modifications performed to the active design with the same file name and path.
•
Select the Save command from the File menu, or choose the Save button from the Main
toolbar.
This automatically saves all changes since the design was last saved.
It is very important to routinely save your work as you progress on a job. A good rule of
thumb is to save your current room design about every ten minutes. This insures that if there is
an interruption to the power supply, you lose only a minimal amount of work.
Saving an Existing Room Design to a New Room or Job
Sometimes it is necessary to save a copy of a previously saved room to a new room, new job, or
both. This can be useful for making several copies of the same floor plan to show a client
different cabinet layouts.
1. Select the Save As command from the File menu.
2. From the Save As dialog box, select a job to store the design to, or enter a new job name.
3. Select the OK button.
Saving a Room Design to a Different Location
Sometimes it may be necessary to save a design to a different location.
1. Select the Save As command from the File menu.
2. From the Save As dialog box, select a drive to store the design to.
3. Select a directory where the document is to be stored.
4. Select the OK button.
Job Copy
All rooms from a single job can be copied to a new job. This is useful if you are using the same
room and cabinet designs in different jobs.
1.
Select the Open Room command from the File menu, or select the Open Room button.
2.
Select the drive where the job and room file is located from the Open Room dialog box.
3.
Select the directory where the job file is located.
4.
Select a job from the Job list.
5.
Select the Copy Job button.
6.
Enter a new job name.
7.
Select the OK button.
3-5
Printing a Design
Before printing for the first time, you must connect the printer to the computer or network and
select the desired printer. To install a printer, see your Printer or Windows documentation. To
select a printer, see the Printer Setup dialog box.
Printing the Current View
1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main
toolbar.
2. Select the Current View radio button.
3. Specify any printing options.
4. Select the OK button.
Printing Floor Plans and Elevations
The floor plan and all elevations can be printed at one time for the current room design.
1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main
toolbar.
2. Select the Floor Plan and Elevation radio button.
3. Specify any printing options.
4. Select the OK button.
Printing in Color
1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main
toolbar.
2. Select the Print in Color check box.
3. Specify any printing options.
4. Select the OK button.
Printing in color with wood grain or wallpaper displayed will take some time depending on
your printer or printer setup.
Printing to Fit
The current view can be printed to fit the printer’s selected paper size.
1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main
toolbar.
2. Select the Fit radio button.
3. Specify any printing options.
4. Select the OK button.
3-6
Printing to Scale
The current view can be printed to the scale set in your Preference dialog.
1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main
toolbar.
2. Select the Scale radio button.
3. Specify any printing options.
4. Select the OK button.
Printing to Window
The current view can be printed at its current size in relationship to its window. This feature is
useful when you want to print a zoomed up or zoomed down view in relationship to its current
window.
1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main
toolbar.
2. Select the Window radio button.
3. Specify any printing options.
4. Select the OK button.
It is a good idea to save your design before printing. This insures that if a printer error or
other problem should occur, you will not lose your work.
Selecting Printers or Output Devices
Room views, proposals, cutting lists; etc., can be printed on any printer supported by Windows
with a printer driver. If you have a Fax/Modem card and a Windows Fax program you can fax
drawings, cutting lists, estimates, contracts; etc., directly through your Cabnetware program.
1. Select the Printer Setup command from the File menu.
2. From the Printer Setup dialog box; select the printer, plotter, or Fax driver from the list of
available drivers.
3. Select the desired paper orientation, paper size, and paper source.
4. Select the Options button to select any special features unique to the selected device driver.
5. Select the OK button.
3-7
Backing Up Information
It is important to back up your work on a regular basis. This insures that if anything should
happen to the hard drive or computer, you can quickly restore the information from the backup.
Backing Program Data to a Local Drive
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Backup command from the System Backup/Restore menu.
4. The following Backup Utility dialog now appears on the screen.
5. By default all program data is selected for backup as it is highly recommended that all
program data be backed up. If you prefer not to backup selected data, deselect those items
by removing the check mark.
6. Select the Local Drive radio button.
7. Enter a drive letter (C:\), or a drive letter and folder name (C:\Backup) in the Backup Path
edit box. This is the location you want the backup file to be stored. If the backup path
doesn’t exist, the program will create the path automatically during the backup process.
8. Select the Backup button to begin the backup process.
9. Select the Done button when the backup process is complete.
If you are backing up your files to a blank CD or DVD drive, make sure you format the disk
prior to using the backup utility.
Backing Program Data to a Server
3-8
The backup utility can be setup to copy selected files across the internet to a remote server.
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Backup command from the System Backup/Restore menu.
4. The Backup Utility dialog now appears on the screen.
5. By default all program data is selected for backup as it is highly recommended that all
program data be backed up. If you prefer not to backup selected data, deselect those items
by removing the check mark.
6. Select the Server radio button.
7. Enter a network path in the Backup Path edit box.
8. Enter the server host name in the Host Name edit box.
9. Enter the user name in the User Name edit box.
10. .Enter the password in the Password edit box.
11. Select the Backup button to begin the backup process.
12. Select the Done button when the backup process is complete.
Using Auto Backup
The backup utility can be programmed to automatically backup selected files to a local drive or
across the internet to a remote server. In order for the automatic backup function to work, you
have to have the program running at the time the backup is to occur. If the program is not
running during the scheduled backup time, the program will start the backup the next time the
program is stated.
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Backup command from the System Backup/Restore menu.
4. The Backup Utility dialog now appears on the screen.
5. By default all program data is selected for backup as it is highly recommended that all
program data be backed up. If you prefer not to backup selected data, deselect those items
by removing the check mark.
6. Select the Local Drive or Server radio button.
7. Enter a network path in the Backup Path edit box.
8. Enter the server host name in the Host Name edit box if you are backing up to a remote
server.
9. Enter the user name in the User Name edit box if you are backing up to a remote server.
10. .Enter the password in the Password edit box if you are backing up to a remote server.
11. Select the Auto Backup check box.
12. Select the Daily, Weekly, or Monthly radio button.
3-9
13. Select the desired time that you want the backup to occur.
14. Select the day you want the backup to occur if a Weekly or Monthly automatic backup is
chosen.
15. Select the Done button.
Warning: It is highly recommended that you do not store your backup files to the local hard
drive. If the local hard drive should fail you would lose both your program and backup files.
Backing up your files to a removable disk like a CD, flash drive, or a separate network computer
is suggested
System Restore Utility
Files backed up using the backup utility can be restored into the program should something
happen to your data, hard drive, or computer.
Warning: Restoring files overwrites all changes made to files since the last backup. If you
had to completely reinstall the software the Path preferences should also be set before restoring
any user backup files.
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Restore command from the System Backup/Restore menu.
4. The following Restore Utility dialog now appears on the screen.
5. Select the Local Drive or Server radio button.
6. Enter the path in were your backup files are located in the Backup Path edit box.
3-10
7. Enter the server host name in the Host Name edit box if you are restoring from a remote
server.
8. Enter the user name in the User Name edit box if you are restoring from a remote server.
9. Enter the password in the Password edit box if you are restoring from a remote server.
10. It is recommended that you leave the Restore Path edit box blank. This allows the Restore
Utility to restore the data into the proper program folders as selected in the Path preferences.
Enter a path in the Restore Path edit box only if you want the data to be restored in a folder
of your choice.
11. By default all program data is selected to restore. Notice the root of the data tree is
highlighted in the upper left hand box. This root of the data tree is showing the (Month Day
Year – Hour Minute Second) that the backup took place. If you prefer only selected data to
be restored, click on the desired data name from the tree. Holding the Control key down
allows you to select multiple data names from the tree.
12. When a backup file is created the file is stamped with the computers ID. If you are backing
up data from multiple computers to a central network backup folder, you will end up with
multiple backup files from each computer. Selecting the My Computer radio button will
display only the files backed up files created from the computer you are currently on.
Selecting the Show All radio button will display the backup files from all computers.
13. Selecting the Enable Roll Back check box will create a roll back file of all your data before
any files are restored into your program. This is an insurance policy that allows you to roll
back your previous data files should you accidentally restore the wrong backup file into your
program.
14. Select the Restore button to begin the restore process.
15. Select the Done button when the restore process is complete.
3-11
Rolling Back Program Files
If you restored a wrong backup file or you change your mind after the restoration of a backup file
has taken place, you can roll back the program to the way it was just before any backup file was
restored.
You can only use the roll back feature of the program if the checkbox for the Enable Roll
Back feature was checked before restoring any backup file.
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Restore command from the System Backup/Restore menu.
4. The Restore Utility dialog now appears on the screen.
5. Select the Roll Back button to begin the roll back.
6. Select the Done button when the roll back is complete.
If the Roll Back button is grayed out, there is no roll back file available.
Deleting Backup Files
If a backup file is no longer needed, you can delete it from your backup folder.
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Restore command from the System Backup/Restore menu.
4. The Restore Utility dialog now appears on the screen.
5. Select the Local Drive or Server radio button.
6. Enter the path in were your backup files are located in the Backup Path edit box.
7. Enter the server host name in the Host Name edit box if your backup file is on a remote
server.
8. Enter the user name in the User Name edit box if your backup file is on a remote server.
9. .Enter the password in the Password edit box if your backup file is on a remote server.
10. Click on the root of the data tree that you want to delete in the upper left hand box to highlight
it. This root of the data tree is showing the (Month Day Year – Hour Minute Second) that the
backup took place.
11. Select the Delete button to delete the highlighted file.
12. Continue this process until all desired backup files are deleted.
13. Select the Done button when you are done deleting backup files.
3-12
Deleting Files
Jobs, rooms and different files can be deleted from the computer when they are no longer
needed.
Warning: Be very cautious when deleting files from your computer. Once files have been
deleted, there is no easy way to bring them back.
Deleting Jobs
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the Delete command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Job radio button.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Select the drive where the job file is located.
6. Select the directory where the job file is located.
7. Select a job from the Job list.
8. Select the Delete button.
Deleting Rooms
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the Delete command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Rooms radio button.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Select the drive where the job file is located.
6. Select the directory where the job file is located.
7. Select a job from the Job list.
8. Select a room from the Room list.
9. Select the Delete button.
Deleting Saved Graphics
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the Delete command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Saved Graphics command from the Delete menu.
4. Select a file from the list.
5. Select the Delete button.
3-13
Deleting Saved CAD Text
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the Delete command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Saved CAD Text command from the Delete menu.
4. Select a file from the list.
5. Select the Delete button.
Job Packages
A Job Package allows you to compress all files for one or more jobs into a single zip file that can
be emailed or transported to another computer to be loaded.
This option only works if you are using a Microsoft Windows email service like Outlook or
Outlook Express. Contact you local email service concerning implementation of your email
service within Outlook or Outlook Express.
If you cannot hook up your email service to Outlook or Outlook Express, a copy of the email file
will be placed in the \cabware\email folder for emailing manually.
Creating a Job Package
Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
Select the Job Package command from the Utilities menu.
Select the Pack command from the Job Package menu.
Enter the path to the location of your job files in the Path edit box. By default the program enters
the job path located in your Path Preferences.
Click on the job name that you want added to your job package. Holding the Control key down
while clicking on jobs allows you to select multiple jobs to add to the package.
Enter the path were your backup files are located in the Create Package To Path edit box.
Enter the name of the package file in the Create Package To Name edit box
Select the Pack button.
3-14
Restoring a Job Package
1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu.
2. Select the Job Package command from the Utilities menu.
3. Select the Unpack command from the Job Package menu.
4. Enter the path to the location of your job package file in the Path edit box.
5. Click on the job package you want unpack in your jobs folder. Clicking on the + symbol in
front of your package file displays all jobs in the package file. Holding the Control key down
while clicking on each job allows you to select multiple jobs to be unpacked.
6. Enter the job path were you want to unpack your selected job(s) into in the Unpack Package
To Path edit box. By default the program enters the job path located in your Path
Preferences.
7. Select the Unpack button.
All views emailed are zipped into a single file. This reduces the size of that attached
images being emailed. The recipient of the email will need a program such as WinZip to unzip
the contents of the file. WinZip can be downloaded at www.winzip.com.
Exiting the Program
Use one of the following methods to exit the program:
•
Select the Exit command from the File menu.
•
Open the Control menu by pressing Alt+Spacebar and then choose the Close command.
•
Double-click the application Control menu box.
•
Press Alt + F4.
3-15
Viewing a Floor Plan
A floor plan is a two-dimensional view looking directly down on a room layout.
•
Select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
•
Select the Floor Plan button from the View toolbar.
Viewing an Elevation
An elevation is a two-dimensional view looking directly at a wall displaying its height and width.
Viewing an Elevation
Select the Elevation command from the View menu, or the Elevation button from the View
toolbar. The active window automatically switches to a floor plan view.
From the floor plan view, click on the wall to be elevated.
Viewing Elevation to Elevation
•
With an elevation displayed, click on the Wall Right and Wall Left icons on the Main toolbar.
Viewing a Cabinet
A cabinet view allows a cabinet to be viewed on all sides for modifying of section ends & backs,
and panel ends & backs.
Select the Cabinet command from the View menu, or the Cabinet button from the View toolbar.
Select the cabinet to be viewed.
Select the Front, Back, Left, or Right button from the Main toolbar to choose the appropriate
cabinet face to view and modify.
3-16
Rendering a View
A rendered view allows you to create a 3-dimensional view of a room with lighting effects and real
material textures added to different objects in the room.
First, select lighting for the room. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View
menu. Select the Render Lighting command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
Second, select material textures for the room and cabinets. Select the Pick User Graphics
command from the View menu. Select the Render Textures command from the Pick User
Graphics menu.
Select the Render command from the View menu, or the Render button from the View toolbar.
The active window automatically switches to a floor plan view with a displayed camera.
From the floor plan view, move the mouse pointer over the camera handle until the cursor
changes to four-arrows.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the camera to the desired location and release the mouse button.
Move the mouse pointer over the camera direction handles until the cursor changes to fourarrows.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the camera direction handle to represent the direction you want the camera to view the
room and release the mouse button.
With the camera location and viewing direction set, click the OK button next to the camera.
The active window automatically switches to a solid color rendered view. This is your preliminary
view. You can now select the Architectural button to process the current view into a line
drawing, or use the following toolbar buttons to reposition the view:
Tip: The options found in Render Preferences control the quality of your rendered view.
Lighting location and properties have the greatest impact on the results of a rendered room
design.
3-17
Viewing Counter Tops
A counter top view can be displayed for adding, deleting, modifying, and printing of counter tops
within the room design.
•
Select the Counter Top command from the View menu.
•
Select the Counter Top button from the View toolbar.
Viewing Counter Tops by Layers
If there are counter tops at different heights in a room design, you must first go to the appropriate
counter top layer before a counter top can be modified.
Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the
View toolbar.
Select the Up or Down button from the Main toolbar.
Entering Counter Tops
Counter tops are placed automatically on all base cabinets when designing a room. At times, it
may be necessary to add additional counter tops to a design where there are no base cabinets
located.
•
Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the
View toolbar.
Adding a Rectangle Counter Top
Select the Add Counter command from the Counter menu.
Select the Rectangle command from the Add Counter menu.
Enter the height of the new counter top.
Click to anchor a starting point for the rectangular counter top.
Move the flexible counter top box with the mouse to an opposite end location.
When you are satisfied with the counter top size and location, click the mouse button.
Adding a Round Counter Top
Select the Add Counter command from the Counter menu.
Select the Round command from the Add Counter menu.
Enter the height of the new counter top.
Click on the screen location where the center of the counter top will be located.
Move the mouse to create the counter top size.
When you are satisfied with the counter top size, click the mouse button.
3-18
Adding a Polygon Counter Top
Select the Add Counter command from the Counter menu.
Select the Polygon command from the Add Counter menu.
Enter the height of the new counter top.
Click on a screen location where the first corner of the counter top will be located.
Move the mouse in a clockwise direction to mark the second point of the polygon.
When you are satisfied with the first edge length and direction, click the mouse button.
Move the flexible line with the mouse to a third location.
When you are satisfied with the second edge length and direction, click the mouse button.
Continue with this process to add more edges to the polygon counter top.
When all but the last edge is complete; press the ESC key, or click the right mouse button and
select the End Polygon command from the Pop Up menu. The program automatically
returns the last edge back to the starting point.
Modifying Counter Tops
The size, configuration, and location of a counter top can be modified after a room and cabinet
layout is complete.
•
Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the
View toolbar.
Counter tops cannot be modified if there are counter tops at different heights in the room
design. Select the Up or Down button from the main tool bar to display the counter top level that
you wish to modify.
Changing Counter Top Types
Any counter top in the room design can be changed to another type of counter top.
1. Click on a counter top to select it.
2. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
3. Select a new counter top from your counter top parameter list.
4. Click on the OK button.
3-19
Changing Counter Top Render Textures`
The texture selected for rendering a counter top can be changed for any counter top in the room
design.
1. Click on a counter top to select it.
2. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
3. Click on the Pick Texture button to select a new render texture material.
4. After selecting a new texture, click on the OK button.
Changing Counter Top Heights
The height of a counter top can be changed.
1. Click on a counter top to select it.
2. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
3. Enter the new counter top height.
4. Click on the OK button.
Modifying Counter Top Edges
The counter top edge type, height, thickness, and shape can be modified for any counter edge.
1. Select a counter edge from the counter top view.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
3. Change the edge type, height, and shape.
4. Select the OK button.
Modifying Counter Top Corners
The counter top corners can be modified.
1. Select a counter corner or break point from the counter top view.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
3. Change the corner to a square, radius, or clipped corner.
4. Select the OK button.
3-20
Adding End Splashes
End splashes can be added to the end of a counter.
1. Select a counter edge from the counter top view.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
3. Change the edge type to End Splash.
4. Select the OK button.
Adding End Caps
End caps can be added to the end of a counter.
1. Select a counter edge from the counter top view.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
3. Change the edge type to End Cap.
4. Select the OK button.
Adding Break Points
Break points allow a single counter top edge to be divided into multiple sections. This is useful
for adding extensions to a counter top or to change segments of a back splash to different
heights. Break points can be placed on any counter top edge. They are represented by small
circles.
1. Select the Display command from the View menu.
2. Select Break Points from the Display dialog to display the break points on the screen.
3. Select the OK button on the Display dialog.
4. Select the Add Break Points command from the Counter Top menu.
5. Click on a counter top edge to add the break point.
6. Click on the break point with the mouse.
7. Move the mouse pointer over the break point until the cursor changes to four arrows.
8. Click and hold the mouse button.
9. Move the mouse to move the break point.
10. When the break point is at the desired location, release the mouse button.
Break points can only be moved along a counter top edge or perpendicular to the edge the
first time it is moved. If a break point is moved perpendicular to the counter edge, the next time
you move the break point it will move in any direction giving X and Y readouts.
3-21
Adding Perpendicular Construction Joints to Counter Tops
Perpendicular construction joints can be added to a continuous run of counter tops to identify
where two or more counter tops will be joined to form a single counter top The following
example shows how a perpendicular joint is added to a counter top.
Click of the front edge of the counter top to select it.
Click the right mouse button and select the Add Break Point command from the Pop Up menu.
5. Double-click the new break point added to the front counter top edge.
6. Enter 74 in the Left edit box to move the break point from the left 74”.
7. Select the OK button.
8. Click on the break point that you just moved to select it.
9. Click the right mouse button and select the Add Joint (Perpendicular) command from the
Pop Up menu.
10. The joint is added to the counter top.
3-22
Adding Construction Joints using Break Points
Construction joints can be added to a counter tops to identify where two or more counter tops will
be joined to form a shaped counter top The following example will show how a 45-degree joint is
added to a L-shape counter top by connecting two break points.
1. Click on the break point that is located on the inside corner of the L-shape counter top.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Add Joint (Break Points) command from the
Pop Up menu.
3. Click on the break point that is located on the outside corner of the L-shape counter top.
4. The joint is added to the counter top.
3-23
If you will be pricing counter tops, it is very important that joints are identified where two or
more counter tops join for the program to price correctly.
Adding a Mason Miter Construction Joint
Construction joints can be added to a counter tops to identify where two or more counter tops will
be joined to form a L-shaped counter top The following example will show how a mason miter is
added to a L-shape counter top by connecting two break points.
Click on the break point that is located on the inside corner of the L-shape counter top.
Click the right mouse button and select the Add Joint (Mason Miter) command from the Pop Up
menu.
Move the mouse and click on the back edge of the 108” counter top as shown below.
3-24
5. When prompted to enter the length of the mason miter angle, enter 6 for 6”.
6. Select the OK button.
7. The mason miter joint is added to the counter top.
Breaking Counter Tops
Using the same methods explained for adding a perpendicular joint or a joint connecting two
break points, you can break counter tops. Breaking counter tops takes one top and breaks it into
two separate tops that can be modified separately.
3-25
Counter Top Pricing Preview & Overrides
Counter tops can be priced automatically. Counter top pricing can be previewed and changes
made before a proposal is printed.
Pricing Preview
A counter top pricing grid can be turned on or off on a counter top view to review the area of the
counter top that is being priced.
1. Select the Counter Top command from the View menu; or select the Counter Top button
from the View toolbar.
2. Select the Display Option command from the View menu.
3. Click on the Price Hatching check box.
4. Select the OK button.
The following shows the Pricing Hatching applied to the counter top view.
You will notice that the hatch shows outside the counter top area. This is because there is no
joint located where the counters would be mitered. The program thinks that this counter top is
going to be made out of one piece of material. If we were pricing counter tops by Lin. Ft., the
program would calculate 9 Lin. Ft. If you were pricing counter tops by Sq. Ft., the program would
calculate 65.7 Sq. Ft.
Let’s add a joint at the corner of the counter top angle to create a miter.
3-26
Now that we have added a miter joint, the hatching is contained within the counter top area. Only
the counter top area will be priced.
You will notice that the hatching overlaps in the miter area. The program calculates the pricing of
the counter top before any miters are cut on a piece.
If you will be pricing counter tops, it is very important that joints are identified where two or
more counter tops join for the program to price correctly.
Pricing Overrides
Quantities and prices of counter tops can be overridden before a proposal is printed to
accommodate for waste factors.
1. Select the Counter Top command from the View menu; or select the Counter Top button
from the View toolbar.
2. Click on a counter top to select it.
3. Click the right mouse button to select the Pricing Overrides command from the Pop Up
menu.
4. The following dialog now appears on the screen showing the current calculated price for the
selected counter top:
5. Click on the Counter Top button to change the quantity and price of the counter top.
6. Continue this process for each item you wish to modify.
7. Click on the OK button when finished.
3-27
Sizing Counter Tops
Counter tops can be shaped or re-sized.
Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the
View toolbar.
Click on a counter top edge to select it.
Move the mouse pointer over the selected edge until the cursor changes to a four-directional
arrow.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the mouse to resize the counter top.
When the counter top edge is at the desired size, release the mouse button.
Moving Counter Tops
Counter tops can be moved to a new location.
Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the
View toolbar.
Click on a counter top until the complete counter is selected.
Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the counter top until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the mouse to move the counter top.
When the counter top is at the desired location, release the mouse button.
Deleting Counter Tops
Counter tops can be deleted from a room design.
Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the
View toolbar.
Click on a counter top to select it.
Press the Delete key.
3-28
Cut
If you want to remove a cabinet from one location in a room and move it to another, you must first
cut the cabinet.
1. Click on a cabinet to select it.
2. Select the Cut command from the View menu; or select the Cut button from the Main
toolbar.
3. The cabinet is removed from the room and stored into memory until the Paste option is
selected to position the stored cabinet into a new location.
Copy
If you want to make a duplicate of a cabinet and place that duplicate in a new location, you must
use the Copy option.
1. Click on a cabinet to select it.
2. Select the Copy command from the View menu; or select the Copy button from the Main
toolbar.
3. A copy of the cabinet is stored into memory until the Paste option is selected to position the
stored cabinet into a new location.
Paste
Once a cabinet has been cut or copied into memory, it can then be pasted into a new location
within the same room on into a different room.
1. Select the Paste command from the View menu; or select the Paste button from the Main
toolbar.
2. Click on a wall and location to place the cabinet.
3. Move the cabinet along the wall to the position the cabinet.
4. Click the mouse when the cabinet is at the desired location.
5. Continue this process for pasting the cabinet more than one time.
If the cabinet you are pasting has a saved cutlist, multi-cross section, or cabinet notes the
program will not change the cabinet end types from their original configuration when pasting into
a new location. All other cabinets will change their end type according to the layout situation
Undo
The Undo option restores the design back to its previous condition before the last modification.
The Undo feature can be selected multiple times to remove more then one modification.
•
Select the Undo command from the View menu; or select the Undo button from the Main
toolbar.
3-29
Regenerating a View
Regenerating a view redraws a design to its original size and location after zooming or panning
has taken place. It can also be used to clear the screen of "dirt" left over after modifying a view.
•
Select the Regenerate command from the View menu, or select the Regenerate button from
the Main toolbar.
Zooming In a View
Zooming in magnifies a view to allow a closer look at the detail of an object.
Select the Zoom in command from the View menu, or select the Zoom in button from the Main
toolbar.
Click on the area of the view you want to zoom in on.
Zooming in a View with a Window
Select the Zoom in command from the View menu, or select the Zoom in button from the Main
toolbar.
Click and hold the mouse button over the upper left corner of the area to be magnified.
Without releasing the mouse button, drag the cursor to the lower right corner of the area to be
magnified.
Release the mouse button when you are satisfied with the zoom window size.
Zooming Out a View
Zooming out reduces the size of a view.
Select the Zoom out command from the View menu, or select the Zoom out button from the
toolbar.
3-30
Real Zoom
Zooming magnifies a view allowing a closer look at the design found in the current window. One
of the ways to zoom in or out of a view is by the use of real zoom.
Zooming In
1. Select the Real Zoom command from the View menu, or select the Real Zoom
from the Main toolbar.
button
2. Click and hold the mouse button over the center of the current view.
3. Without releasing the mouse button, drag the cursor down the screen to zoom in on the
design.
4. Release the mouse button.
5. Continue this process until the desired zoom factor is achieved.
Zooming Out
4. Select the Real Zoom command from the View menu, or select the Real Zoom
from the Main toolbar.
button
1. Click and hold the mouse button over the center of the current view.
2. Without releasing the mouse button, drag the cursor up the screen to zoom out of the design.
3. Release the mouse button.
4. Continue this process until the desired zoom factor is achieved.
Rotate View
Rotating allows a rendered cabinet or room to be spun around to view from different angles.
1. Select the Rotate
button from the Main toolbar while in a rendered view.
2. Click and hold the mouse button over the area of the view to be rotated.
3. Without releasing the mouse button, move the cursor to rotate the current rendered object(s).
4. Release the mouse button when the design is at the desired rotation.
3-31
Pan View
Panning allows a view to be moved to a new location on the screen.
1. Select the Pan command from the View menu, or select the Pan
toolbar.
button from the Main
2. Click and hold the mouse button over the area of the view to be moved.
3. Without releasing the mouse button, move the cursor to drag the design to a new location on
the screen.
4. Release the mouse button when the design is at the desired location.
Moldings
User-created molding can be selected for placement on the tops of all upper cabinets.
1.
Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
2.
Select the Molding command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
3.
Select the Upper Room tab from the Molding dialog.
4.
Select a molding design from the list.
5.
Select the OK button.
Upper room molding is displayed on all upper cabinets, and any pantry and special
cabinets that are within 18" of the ceiling.
Flooring
User-created flooring can be selected for placement in a room design.
Picking a Flooring
Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
Select the Flooring command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
Select a floor design from the list.
Select the OK button.
Deleting Flooring
User-selected floor patterns can be removed from a room design.
1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
2. Select the Flooring command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
3. Select the None button.
3-32
Picking Colors
A user-created color palette can be selected for a quick change of room colors.
1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
2. Select the Colors command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
3. Select a color palette from the list.
4. Select the OK button.
Picking Grain
A variety of different wood grain patterns can be selected for cabinets. By picking and combining
different wood grain patterns with different color palettes, there are an unlimited variety of
possible cabinet colors and grain combinations.
1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
2. Select the Grain command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
3. Select a grain palette from the list.
4. Select the OK button.
Pulls and Handles
There are a variety of pulls and handles that can be selected for placement on doors and drawer
fronts.
1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
2. Select Door Pulls/Handles or Drawer Pulls/Handles from the Pick User Graphics menu.
3. Select a pull or handle from the list.
4. Select the OK button.
Pulls and handles are only displayed on doors and drawer fronts if a pull or handle marker
was placed on the door and drawer design when created.
Deleting Pulls and Handles
Pulls and handles can be deleted from doors and drawers.
1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
2. Select Door Pulls/Handles or Drawer Pulls/Handles from the Pick User Graphics menu.
3. Select the None button.
3-33
Wallpaper
A large number of wallpaper patterns have been supplied with the program to place on walls.
Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
Select the Wallpaper command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
Select a wallpaper pattern from the list.
Select the OK button.
Deleting Wallpaper
User-selected wallpaper can be removed from a room design.
Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
Select the Wallpaper command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
Select the None button.
Display Options
Display options allow the user to turn on or off such display features as dimensions, door
overlaps, wood grain, color, etc., for the current room design.
Select the Display Option command from the View menu.
Click on the options you want displayed; or click off the options you do not want displayed.
Select the OK button.
The display options may change for certain views. These changes only affect the view of
the current room and have no effect on the default preference setting for the program.
Counter Top Display Options
A counter top view has its own unique set of display options. Counter top display options allow
the user to turn on or off such display features as dimensions, CAD text, walls, cabinets, and
break points.
Select the Counter Top command from the View menu.
Select the Display Option command from the View menu.
Click on the options you want displayed; or click off the options you do not want displayed.
Select the OK button.
3-34
Floating Toolbars
Toolbars contain buttons that give quick access to many program commands and features. The
two types of toolbars found in the program are the Main toolbar and Floating toolbars. The Main
toolbar is displayed at the top of the window just under the pull-down menus. Floating Toolbars
can be dragged and placed at any location on the screen.
Displaying Floating Toolbars
1. Select the Toolbar command from the View menu.
2. Select the toolbars you want displayed.
3. Select the OK button.
Closing Floating Toolbars
•
Select the Close command from the Control menu on the toolbar.
•
Double-click on the Control menu.
Moving Floating Toolbars
1. Click and hold the mouse on the title bar of the toolbar.
2. Drag the toolbar to a new position and release the mouse button.
Resizable Toolbars
Toolbars can be resized on the screen to any width or length. To resize a toolbar, simply move
the cursor to the left or right side of a toolbar until the cursor changes to a two-directional arrow.
Click and drag the cursor left or right until the toolbar is the desired size and shape, then release
the mouse button.
Docking Toolbars
When a toolbar is moved to the edge of the program window it becomes a docking toolbar. You
can dock a toolbar below the program’s title bar or to the left, right, or bottom edge of the program
window. When a toolbar becomes docked, the buttons will automatically run the length of the
side.
To undock a toolbar, simply click on the edge of the docked toolbar and drag it towards the
center of the program window.
3-35
Creating Custom Toolbars
Any number of custom toolbars can now be created with only the icon buttons that you would like
to access on a regular basis.
1. Select the Toolbar command from the View menu.
2. Select the New button from the Toolbar dialog box.
3. The Custom Toolbar dialog box now appears on the screen:
4. First enter the name of your new Toolbar in the left-upper edit box. In my example, I will
create an Edit Toolbar with buttons to Cut, Copy, Paste, and Undo.
5. Select the Main Toolbar option from the Toolbar combo box.
6. Click on the Cut icon from the Main Toolbar.
7. Click on the Left Arrow
button to move the Cut icon to the left window.
8. Click on the Copy icon from the Main Toolbar.
9. Click on the Left Arrow
button to move the Copy icon to the left window.
10. Click on the Paste icon from the Main Toolbar.
11. Click on the Left Arrow
button to move the Paste icon to the left window.
12. Click on the Undo icon from the Main Toolbar.
13. Click on the Left Arrow
button to move the Undo icon to the left window.
14. The Custom Toolbar dialog should now appear as follows:
3-36
15. If you want to rearrange the icon buttons in a certain order, click on an icon button in the left
window and use the Up Arrow
or Down Arrow
buttons to move the button to a new
location.
16. Select the OK button, now that the Edit toolbar contains all the icon buttons we require.
17. Verify that your new Edit Toolbar has a check in the checkbox.
18. Select the OK button on the Toolbars dialog to display the Edit toolbar on the screen as
shown below.
3-37
Entering Walls
Entering walls is one of the first steps in identifying the room layout before cabinets and
appliances can be entered. The first wall entered is always designated as Wall A. Succeeding
walls are lettered in ascending order in a clockwise rotation. Walls drawn in succession
automatically join when the beginning of the new wall segment is in close proximity to the end of
the last wall.
Be sure to plan the layout of walls so that they are entered in a clockwise direction,
moving around the room. This is very important since the program makes a distinction between
the inside and outside of exterior walls. This insures that cabinets are always positioned inside
the room.
Entering Exterior Walls
1. Select the Exterior command from the Wall menu, or select the Exterior button from the
Wall toolbar.
2. Click on the screen to represent a starting location.
3. Move the mouse in the direction you wish to draw the wall.
4. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse.
Pressing the Shift key while moving the mouse fractions the length of a wall segment.
Pressing the right mouse button after marking the starting location of a wall segment displays the
Pop Up menu, allowing you to manually enter information about the wall length and angle.
Entering Interior Walls
1. Select the Interior command from the Wall menu, or select the Interior button from the Wall
toolbar.
2. Click on an existing wall to mark the connecting point of the interior wall.
3. Move the mouse back and forth along the existing wall to mark an attachment point and click
the mouse.
4. Move the mouse in the direction in which you wish to draw the wall.
5. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse.
Entering Island Walls
1. Select the Island/Peninsula command from the Wall menu, or select the Island/Peninsula
button from the Wall toolbar.
2. Click on the screen within the room to represent your starting location.
3. Move the mouse in the direction in which you wish to draw the wall.
4. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse.
3-38
Entering Peninsula Walls
Select the Island/Peninsula command from the Wall menu, or select the Island/Peninsula
button from the Wall toolbar.
Click on an existing wall to mark the connecting point of the peninsula wall.
Move the mouse back and forth along the wall to mark an attachment point and click the mouse.
Move the mouse in the direction in which you wish to draw the wall.
With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse.
Entering Free Form Walls
Free form walls allow for an alternative way of designing freestanding island cabinets. Free Form
walls allow the user to define the outside perimeter of cabinets filled or placed on the island
instead of the back of the cabinets as in using regular island walls.
1. Select the Free Form Cabinets command from the Walls menu.
2. Click on the screen within the room to represent your starting location for drawing a free form
wall.
3. In a counter clockwise direction on the screen, move the mouse in the direction you wish to
draw the wall.
4. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse.
5. To draw the second wall segment, click your mouse at the end of the previous wall segment.
6. In a counter clockwise direction on the screen, move the mouse in the direction you wish to
draw the second wall segment.
7. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse.
8. Repeat this process for each wall segment until the perimeter of the island is defined.
9. Cabinets and appliances can now be placed or filled in the island space to complete the
island design.
Be sure to enter free form walls in a counter clockwise direction, moving around the
space for the island. This is very important since the program makes a distinction between the
inside and outside of free form walls. This insures that cabinets are always positioned inside the
island perimeter drawn.
3-39
The following is an example of the perimeter of an island space drawn with the Free Form wall
feature.
The following is an example of base cabinets filled within the free form wall perimeter.
3-40
Angle Walls
Angled walls can be drawn as either inside or outside angles.
Wall Layout Method
This method is the quickest way to design angle walls with standard angles.
1. Click a starting location for beginning a new wall segment.
2. Move the mouse in the desired direction to achieve the desired angle.
3. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse.
Angle Command Method
1. Select the Angle command from the Wall menu before starting your next wall segment; or
click the right mouse button and select the Angle command from the Pop Up menu after
marking your starting point for your new wall.
2. Select the Angle radio button.
3. Enter the wall angle in the Angle edit box.
4. Select the OK button. The wall is now locked into the entered angle.
5.
Pull the wall to the desired length and click the mouse.
Angle Calculator Method
1. Select the Angle command from the Wall menu before starting your next wall segment; or
click the right mouse button and select the Angle command from the Pop Up menu after
marking your starting point for your new wall.
2. Select either the Inside Angle Calculator or Outside Calculator radio button.
3. Enter the wall measurements taken from the job site for A, B and C.
4. Select the OK button. The wall is now locked into the calculated angle.
5. Pull the wall to the desired length and click the mouse.
3-41
Radius Walls
Radius walls can be drawn as either inside or outside radiuses.
Angle/Radius Method
This is the most common method used for designing radius walls.
Select the Radius command from the Wall menu after completing your last wall segment; or click
the right mouse button and select the Radius command from the Pop Up menu after
marking your starting point for your new wall.
Select either the Inside Radius or Outside Radius wall radio button.
Select the Angle/Radius Method radio button.
Enter the Arc of the radius.
Enter the Radius.
Select the OK button.
Cord Method
1. Select the Radius command from the Wall menu after completing your last wall segment; or
click the right mouse button and select the Radius command from the Pop Up menu after
marking your starting point for your new wall.
2. Select either the Inside Radius or Outside Radius wall radio button.
3. Select the Cord Method radio button.
4. Enter the Cord Length.
5. Enter the Cord to Arc distance.
6. Select the OK button.
Modifying Walls
The type, size, angle, location, and radius of a wall can be modified after a room layout is
complete.
1. Double click on a wall; or single click on a wall to select it and click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
2. Change the current wall settings on the Wall Modify dialog box.
3. Select the OK button.
3-42
Sizing Walls
Walls can be re-sized from a floor plan or elevation view.
Click on a wall to select it.
Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double
arrow.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the mouse to resize the wall.
When the wall is the desired size, release the mouse button.
Moving Walls
Walls can be moved to a new location on the floor plan view.
1. Click on a wall in floor plan view to select it.
2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the wall until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow.
3. Click and hold the mouse button.
4. Move the mouse to move the wall.
5. When the wall is at the desired location, release the mouse button.
Deleting Walls
Walls can be deleted from the floor plan view.
1. Click on a wall to select it.
2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button to select the Delete command from the
Pop Up menu.
3-43
Entering Entrance Doors
Entrance doors can be entered in succession while laying out walls, or entered in a wall after the
layout is complete.
Entering Entrance Doors in Succession
1. After laying out a wall segment before the location of a door, select the Entrance Door
command from the Wall menu, or select the Entrance Door button from the Wall toolbar.
2. Enter the size, style, and graphics used for the door in the Entrance Door dialog box.
3. Select the OK button.
4. The door is entered and you are automatically placed back in a wall layout mode. Continue
entering wall segments.
A wall segment must be entered after placing an entrance door for the program to function
properly.
Entering Entrance Doors into Walls
1. After completing a room layout and exiting the wall mode, select the Entrance Door
command from the Wall menu, or select the Entrance Door button from the Wall toolbar.
2. Enter the size, location, and graphics for the door on the Entrance Door dialog box.
3. Select the OK button.
4. Select a wall on which to place the door.
5. Move the door to the desired location and click the mouse.
Modifying Entrance Doors
The type, size, and location of an entrance door can be modified after a room layout is complete.
1. Double click on a door; or single click on a door to select it and click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
2. Change the current door settings on the Entrance Door dialog box.
3. Select the OK button.
Sizing Doors
Entrance doors can be re-sized from a floor plan or elevation view.
1. Click on a door to select it.
2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double
arrow.
3. Click and hold the mouse button.
4. Move the mouse to resize the door.
5. When the door is the desired size, release the mouse button.
3-44
Moving Doors
Entrance doors can be moved from a floor plan or elevation view.
1. Click on a door to select it.
2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the door until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow.
3. Click and hold the mouse button.
4. Move the mouse to move the door.
5. When the door is at the desired location, release the mouse button.
Deleting Doors
Entrance doors can be deleted from a floor plan or elevation view.
1. Click on a door to select it.
2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button to select the Delete command from the
Pop Up menu.
3-45
Entering Windows
Windows can be entered in succession while laying out walls, or entered in a wall after the layout
is complete.
Entering Windows in Succession
1. After laying out a wall segment before the location of a window, select the Window command
from the Wall menu, or select the Window button from the Wall toolbar.
2. Enter the size and graphics used for the window in the Windows dialog box.
3. Select the OK button.
4. The window is entered and you are automatically placed back in a wall layout mode.
Continue entering wall segments.
A wall segment must be entered after placing a window for the program to function
properly.
Entering Windows into Walls
1. After completing a room layout and exiting the wall mode, select the Window command from
the Wall menu, or select the Window button from the Wall toolbar.
2. Enter the size and graphics used for the window in the Windows dialog box.
3. Select the OK button.
4. Select a wall on which to place the window.
5. Move the window to the desired location and click the mouse.
Modifying Windows
The type, size, and location of a window can be modified after a room layout is complete.
Double click on a window; or single click on a door to select it and click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
Change the current window settings in the Windows dialog box.
Select the OK button.
Sizing Windows
Windows can be re-sized from floor plan or elevation view.
Click on a window to select it.
Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double
arrow.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the mouse to resize the window.
When the window is the desired size, release the mouse button.
3-46
Moving Windows
Windows can be moved from floor plan or elevation view.
Click on a window to select it.
Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the window until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the mouse to move the window.
When the window is at the desired location, release the mouse button.
Deleting Windows
Windows can be deleted from floor plan or elevation view.
Click on a window to select it.
Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button to select the Delete command from the Pop
Up menu.
3-47
Wall Preferences
Wall preferences control the default setting for the type of wall being designed. Both wall height
and wall thickness can be changed at any time during the wall layout. If you are laying out a wall
and you want to lower the wall height for a pony wall, you should make that change here and
continue laying out the walls. If one wall in the room design is thicker than another, change the
wall thickness and continue with the wall layout.
Select the Preferences command from the Wall menu.
Change the current wall preference settings.
Select the OK button.
Warning: Once you have changed the wall preferences, the program holds those values for
all future wall and room layouts. When you have finished with any special changes to the
Preference dialog, be sure to change them back when you are finished.
Automatic Wall Snapping
Automatic wall snapping allows the program automatically close off a room by precisely
connecting the beginning of the first wall with the end of the last wall.
•
When drawing the final exterior wall of the room, click the mouse at a point close to the
beginning of the room’s first wall. The program automatically calculates the proper angle and
length required, snapping the final wall to the first wall to close the room.
Wall Snapping
Snapping allows you to precisely connect the beginning of the first wall with the ending of the last
wall when a room is to be closed off.
While pulling the length of the last wall that you wish to connect to the beginning of the first wall,
click the right mouse button.
Select the Snap command from the Pop Up menu. The program searches the current wall
direction until it finds an existing wall to connect to.
Snapping can also be used to connect the end of an interior wall with an existing exterior
wall.
3-48
Entering Appliances
Appliances are usually placed after the wall layout is complete and before cabinets have been
entered. Appliances can be placed in either a floor plan or elevation view.
Placing Appliances from a Catalog
Appliances entered in the appliance catalog can be retrieved and placed in a room design.
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select an appliance type (i.e.; Refrigerator, Cooktop, Sink, Dishwasher, etc.) command
from the Appliance menu; or select the appliance type button from the Appliance toolbar.
3. Select an appliance from the list box.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Select a wall to place the appliance.
6. Move the appliance to the desired location and click the mouse.
Bumping Appliances to the Right from a Catalog
Appliances entered in the appliance catalog can be retrieved and slid down the wall to the right
until they bump into another appliance or object.
1. Select the Bump Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select an appliance type (i.e.; Refrigerator, Cooktop, Sink, Dishwasher, etc.) command
from the Appliance menu; or select the appliance type button from the Appliance toolbar.
3. Select an appliance from the list box.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall to the left of another appliance or object the appliance will bump into.
Bumping Appliances to the Left from a Catalog
Appliances entered in the appliance catalog can be retrieved and slid down the wall to the left
until it bumps into another appliance or object.
1. Select the Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select an appliance type (i.e.; Refrigerator, Cooktop, Sink, Dishwasher, etc.) command
from the Appliance menu; or select the appliance type button from the Appliance toolbar.
3. Select an appliance from the list box.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall to the right of another appliance or object the appliance will bump into.
3-49
Entering Appliances with Finished Backs
Appliances placed on peninsula and island walls sometimes require a finished back to cover up
the back of the appliance.
1. Select the Finished Back command from the Appliance menu.
2. Select an appliance type (i.e.; refrigerator, cooktop, sink, dishwasher, etc.) command from
the Appliance menu.
3. Select an appliance from the list box.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on a peninsula or island wall to place the appliance.
6. Move the appliance to the desired location and click the mouse.
Entering Cabinet Catalog Appliances
If designing using a cabinet catalog, some appliances that are built into cabinets; i.e., refrigerator
cabinets, wall oven cabinets, etc., will be located in the cabinet catalog. Selecting the Catalog
command removes those appliance types from the Appliance menu.
1. Select the Appliance menu.
2. Select the Catalog command.
3. Select an appliance type (i.e.; refrigerator, cooktop, sink, dishwasher, etc.) command from
the Appliance menu.
4. Select an appliance from the list box.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Select a wall on which to place the appliance.
7. Move the appliance to the desired location and click the mouse.
Modifying Appliances
Appliances can be modified after being placed in a room.
1. Double click on an appliance; or single click on an appliance and click the right mouse button
to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
2. Change the current appliance location.
3. Select the OK button.
3-50
Moving Appliances
Click on an appliance to select it.
Move the cursor over one edge of the appliance until the cursor changes to a four-directional
arrow.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the mouse to move the appliance.
When the appliance is at the desired location, release the mouse button.
Overlap appliances placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the appliance to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or
wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends for cabinets correctly
for the layout situation. If you want to override the programs automatic bump feature while
moving an appliance, hold down the CTRL key while moving the appliance.
Deleting Appliances
1. Click on an appliance to select it.
2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button to select the Delete command from the
Pop Up menu.
Appliance Graphics
Additional CAD lines can be drawn on an appliance in a room design to represent a decorative
detail.
1. Click on an appliance to select it.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Appliance Graphics command from the Pop Up
menu.
3. Select either the Front, Back, Left, Right, or Top button from the Main Toolbar to select the
side of the appliance you wish to add additional CAD to.
4. Using the commands found on the CAD menu, add additional CAD to the view.
5. Select the Close button.
3-51
Entering Custom Cabinets
Custom cabinets are usually placed after the wall layout is complete and appliances have been
entered. Cabinets can be placed, bumped, or filled in either a floor plan or elevation view.
Placing Custom Cabinets
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, Corner, etc.) command from the Cabinet
menu; or select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar.
Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
Select the OK button.
Click on the wall and location of the cabinet.
Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or
wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout
situation.
Bumping Custom Cabinets to the Right
1. Select the Bump Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu; or
select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall to the left of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into.
Bumping Custom Cabinets to the Left
1. Select the Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu; or
select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall to the right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump the cabinets to the side of the existing
cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends
correctly for the layout situation.
3-52
Filling Custom Cabinets
Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, Corner, etc.) command from the Cabinet
menu; or select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar.
Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets.
Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than
one location.
Entering Quick Job Cabinets
A quick job allows the entering custom cabinets, and accessories into a job without designing a
room. The selected cabinets and accessories can then be used to generate a proposal or cutlist.
Entering Custom Cabinets
Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, Corner, etc.) command from the Cabinet
menu.
Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
Select the OK button.
Entering Base Cabinets
Base cabinets can be entered in a room as custom cabinets.
Placing Custom Base Cabinets
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Base button from the Cabinet
toolbar.
Enter the base cabinet width when prompted.
Select the OK button.
Click on the wall and location of the base cabinet.
Move the base cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or
wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout
situation.
3-53
Bumping Custom Base Cabinets
1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Base button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
Filling Custom Base Cabinets
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Base button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on.
Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than
one location until another cabinet type is selected.
Entering Upper Cabinets
Upper or wall cabinets can be entered in a room as custom cabinets.
Placing Custom Upper Cabinets
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Upper button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the upper cabinet width when prompted.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall and location of the upper cabinet.
6. Move the upper cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or
cabinet. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
3-54
Bumping Custom Upper Cabinets
1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Upper button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
Filling Custom Upper Cabinets
Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Upper button from the Cabinet
toolbar.
Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on.
Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than
one location until another cabinet type is selected.
Entering Pantry Cabinets
Pantry cabinets can be entered in a room as custom cabinets.
Placing Custom Pantry Cabinets
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Pantry command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Pantry button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
Enter the pantry cabinet width when prompted.
Select the OK button.
Click on the wall and location of the pantry cabinet.
Move the pantry cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or
wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout
situation.
3-55
Bumping Custom Pantry Cabinets
1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Pantry command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Pantry button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
Filling Custom Pantry Cabinets
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Pantry command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Pantry button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on.
Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than
one location until another cabinet type is selected.
3-56
Entering Special Cabinets
Special cabinets can be cabinets of any nature. They can be bookcases, entertainment centers,
uppers, bases, or stacking cabinets. Special cabinets also give the greatest control over adding
vertical or horizontal sections to a cabinet, as you might see in a complicated entertainment
center.
Placing Custom Special Cabinets
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Special command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Special button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the information necessary to create your special cabinet in the Special Cabinet dialog
box.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Enter the special cabinet width when prompted.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Click on the wall and location of the special cabinet.
8. Move the special cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or
wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout
situation.
Bumping Custom Special Cabinets
1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Special command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Special button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the information necessary to create your special cabinet in the Special Cabinet dialog
box.
4. Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
3-57
Filling Custom Special Cabinets
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Special command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Special button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the information necessary to create your special cabinet in the Special Cabinet dialog
box.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall and location to fill special cabinets on.
Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than
one location.
Entering Fillers
Base, Upper, Special, Corner Base, Corner Upper, and Corner Special fillers can be placed on a
wall or fast filled between cabinets and walls.
Placing Base or Upper Fillers
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select either the Base or Upper command from the Filler menu.
4. Enter the width of the filler when prompted.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location of the filler.
7. Move the filler to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap fillers placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the filler to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall.
This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout
situation.
3-58
Bumping Base or Upper Fillers
1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select either the Base or Upper command from the Filler menu.
4. Enter the width of the filler when prompted.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the filler will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump fillers to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
Filling Base or Upper Fillers
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select either the Base or Upper command from the Filler menu.
4. Click on the wall and location to fill the filler on.
Filled cabinet fillers remain active for the selected filler type and can be filled in more than
one location.
Placing Special Fillers
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Special Filler command from the Filler menu.
Enter the information necessary to create your special filler in the Special Cabinet dialog box.
Select the OK button.
Click on the wall and location of the filler.
Move the filler to the desired location and click the mouse.
3-59
Bumping Special Fillers
1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Special command from the Filler menu.
4. Enter the width of the filler when prompted.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the filler will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump fillers to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
Filling Special Fillers
Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Special Filler command from the Filler menu.
Enter the information necessary to create your special filler in the Special Cabinet dialog box.
Select the OK button.
Click on the wall and location to fill the filler on.
Placing Corner Fillers
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Base Corner Filler, Upper Corner Filler, or Special Corner Filler command
from the Filler menu.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your filler in the Corner Filler dialog box.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Select the corner of the room where the corner filler will be placed.
3-60
Diagonal Corner Cabinets
A diagonal corner cabinet is an angled face cabinet placed in the corner of the room.
Placing a Diagonal Corner Base Cabinet
1. Select the Place command from the cabinet menu.
2. Select the Corner command from the Cabinets menu.
3. Select the Diagonal Base option from the Corner menu.
4. Enter the width and depth for the left end of the diagonal corner cabinet.
5. Enter the width and depth for the right end of the diagonal corner cabinet.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Click in the corner of the room where the diagonal corner cabinet will be located.
Diagonal corner upper and special cabinets are placed in the same manner.
Entering End Cabinets
Upper, base, and special end cabinets with open shelving can be placed on a wall.
Placing Base End Cabinets
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the End command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Base command from the End menu.
4. Enter the base end cabinet width when prompted.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location of the base end cabinet.
7. Move the base end cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlapping the end cabinet placed next to another existing cabinet causes the program to
automatically bump the end cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet. This allows the program to
identify which side of the end cabinet will be opened for the layout situation.
3-61
Bumping Base End Cabinets
Select the Bump Left or Bump Right command from the Cabinets menu.
Select the End command from the Cabinets menu.
Select the Base command from the End menu.
Enter the width of the upper end cabinet when prompted.
Select the OK button.
Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet that the baser end cabinet will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump end cabinets to the side of existing cabinets
permits the program to identify which side of the end cabinet will be opened for the layout
situation.
Placing Upper End Cabinets
Upper End cabinets are placed in the same manner a Base End cabinets.
Bumping Upper End Cabinets
Upper End cabinets are bumped in the same manner a Base End cabinets.
Placing Special End Cabinets
Special End cabinets are placed in the same manner a Base End cabinets.
Bumping Special End Cabinets
Special End cabinets are bumped in the same manner a Base End cabinets.
3-62
Entering Lazy Susan Cabinets
A lazy susan cabinet is an L-shape corner cabinet with a single section or opening on each leg.
Placing Custom Lazy Susan Cabinets
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Corner command from the Cabinet menu and the Lazy Susan Base command from
the Corner menu, or select the Lazy Susan Base button from the Cabinet toolbar.
Enter the length and depth of each end of the lazy susan cabinet when prompted.
Select the OK button.
Click in the corner of the room where the lazy susan cabinet will be located.
Entering L-Shape Cabinets
L-shape corner cabinets are very similar to lazy susan cabinets except that they can have more
than one section or opening on each leg or side.
Placing Custom L-Shape Cabinets
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Corner command from the Cabinet menu and the L-Shape Base command from the
Corner menu.
Enter the length and depth of each end of the L-shape cabinet when prompted.
Select the OK button.
Click in the corner of the room where the L-shape cabinet will be located.
Entering Diagonal Corner Sink Cabinets
A corner sink cabinet is very similar to a diagonal corner cabinet except that it is designed with
two wing panels on each side of the cabinet according to the values set in the parameters. A
sink is automatically placed in the cabinet.
Placing Custom Diagonal Corner Sink Cabinets
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Corner command from the Cabinet menu and the Diagonal Corner Sink
command from the Corner menu.
3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click in the corner of the room where the diagonal corner sink cabinet will be located.
3-63
Entering Split-Level Cabinets
A split-level cabinet is a two-section cabinet in height with each section being of a different depth.
A good example of a split-level cabinet is a reception counter.
Placing Custom Split-Level Cabinets
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Split Level command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Enter the split-level cabinet width when prompted.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall and location of the split-level cabinet.
6. Move the split-level cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or
wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout
situation.
Bumping Custom Split-Level Cabinets
1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Split Level command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Split Level button
from the Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
Filling Custom Split-Level Cabinets
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Split Level command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on.
Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than
one location.
3-64
Entering Wainscot Paneling
Base, upper, and special wainscot paneling can be placed or fast filled on walls.
Placing Base or Upper Wainscot Panels
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Wainscot Paneling command from the Cabinet menu.
Select either the Base Wainscot Paneling or Upper Wainscot Paneling command from the
Wainscot Paneling menu.
Enter the width of the wainscot paneling when prompted.
Select the OK button.
Click on the wall and location of the wainscot panel.
Move the wainscot panel to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap wainscot paneling placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This
causes the program to automatically bump the wainscot panel to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or other wainscot panels.
Filling Base or Upper Wainscot Panels
Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Wainscot Paneling command from the Cabinet menu.
Select either the Base Wainscot Paneling or Upper Wainscot Paneling command from the
Wainscot Paneling menu.
Click on the wall and location to fill the wainscot paneling on.
Filled wainscot paneling remains active for the selected paneling type and can be filled in
more than one location.
Placing Special Wainscot Paneling
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Wainscot Paneling command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Special Wainscot Paneling command from the Wainscot Paneling menu.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your special wainscot paneling in the Special
Wainscot Paneling dialog box.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location of the wainscot paneling.
7. Move the wainscot paneling to the desired location and click the mouse.
3-65
Filling Special Wainscot Paneling
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Wainscot Paneling command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Special Wainscot Paneling command from the Wainscot Paneling menu.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your special wainscot paneling in the Special
Wainscot Paneling dialog box.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location to fill the wainscot paneling on.
Entering Closet Vertical Panels
Closet vertical panels can be placed on walls.
Placing Custom Closet Vertical Panels
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Vertical Panel command from the Closet Component menu, or select the
Vertical Panel button from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your vertical panel in the Vertical Panel dialog box.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location of the vertical panel.
7. Move the vertical panel to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap vertical panels placed next to other shelves, cabinets, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new vertical panel to the side of the existing shelf, cabinet, or
wall.
3-66
Entering Closet Shelves
Closet shelves can be placed or filled on walls.
Placing Custom Closet Shelves
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Shelf command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Shelf button
from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the distance of the shelf off the floor in the Shelf dialog.
5. Enter the shelf width.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Click on the wall and location of the shelf.
8. Move the shelf to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap shelves placed next to vertical panels, cabinets, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new shelf to the side of the existing vertical panel, cabinet, or
wall.
Bumping Custom Closet Shelves
1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Shelf command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Shelf button
from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the distance of the shelf off the floor in the Shelf dialog.
5. Enter the shelf width.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the shelf will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
3-67
Filling Custom Closet Shelves
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Shelf command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Shelf button
from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the distance of the shelf off the floor in the Shelf Height dialog.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location to fill the shelf on.
Filled shelves remain active for the selected shelf type and can be filled in more than one
location until another closet component is selected.
Entering Closet Diagonal Corner Shelves
Diagonal corner closet shelves can be placed in the corner of a room.
Placing Custom Closet Diagonal Corner Shelves
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Diagonal Corner Shelf command from the Closet Component menu, or select the
Diagonal Corner Shelf button from the Closet toolbar.
Enter the distance of the diagonal corner shelf off the floor in the Diagonal Corner Shelf dialog.
Enter the diagonal corner shelf width.
Select the OK button.
Click in the corner of the room where the diagonal corner shelf will be located.
Entering Closet L-shape Corner Shelves
L-shape corner closet shelves can be placed in the corner of a room.
Placing Custom Closet L-Shape Corner Shelves
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the L-Shape Corner Shelf command from the Closet Component menu, or select the LShape Corner Shelf button from the Closet toolbar.
Enter the distance of the L-shaped corner shelf off the floor in the L-Shape Corner Shelf dialog.
Enter the L-shape corner shelf width.
Select the OK button.
Click in the corner of the room where the L-shape corner shelf will be located.
3-68
Entering Closet Units
Closet cabinet units can be placed or filled on the wall.
Placing Custom Closet Units
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Closet Unit command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet
Unit button from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet unit cabinet in the Closet Unit dialog.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Enter the closet unit width.
7. Select the OK button.
8. Click on the wall and location of the closet unit.
9. Move the closet unit to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap closet units placed next to vertical panels, cabinets, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the closet unit to the side of the existing vertical panel, cabinet, or
wall.
Bumping Custom Closet Units
1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Closet Unit command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet
Unit button from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet unit cabinet in the Closet Unit dialog.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Enter the closet unit width.
7. Select the OK button.
8. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the closet unit will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump closet units to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
3-69
Filling Custom Closet Units
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Closet Unit command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet
Unit button from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet unit cabinet in the Closet Unit dialog.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location to fill the closet unit on.
Filled closet unit remains active for the selected closet unit type and can be filled in more
than one location until another closet component is selected.
Entering Closet Doors
Closet doors can be placed or filled on a wall.
Filling Custom Closet Doors
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Closet Door command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet
Door button from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet door in the Closet Door dialog.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location to fill the closet door on.
Filled closet door remains active for the selected closet door type and can be filled in more
than one location until another closet component is selected.
3-70
Placing Custom Closet Doors
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Closet Door command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet
Door button from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet door in the Closet Door dialog.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location of the closet door.
7. Move the closet door to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap closet doors placed next to vertical panels, cabinets, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the closet door to the side of the existing vertical panel, cabinet,
or wall.
Entering Closet Drawers
Closet drawers can be placed or filled on a wall.
Filling Custom Closet Drawers
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Closet Drawer command from the Closet Component menu, or select the
Closet Drawer button from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet drawer in the Closet Drawer dialog.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location to fill the closet drawer on.
Filled closet drawer remains active for the selected closet drawer type and can be filled in
more than one location until another closet component is selected.
3-71
Placing Custom Closet Drawers
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Closet Drawer command from the Closet Component menu, or select the
Closet Drawer button from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet drawer in the Closet Drawer dialog.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location of the closet drawer.
7. Move the closet drawer to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap closet drawers placed next to vertical panels, cabinets, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the closet drawer to the side of the existing vertical panel,
cabinet, or wall.
Entering Closet Rods
Closet rods can be placed or filled on walls.
Placing Custom Closet Rods
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Closet Rod command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet Rod
button from the Closet toolbar.
Enter the distance of the closet rod off the floor in the Closet Rod Height dialog.
Enter the closet rod width.
Select the OK button.
Click on the wall and location of the closet rod.
Move the closet rod to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap closet rod placed next to vertical panels, cabinets, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new closet rod to the side of the existing vertical panel,
cabinet, or wall.
3-72
Bumping Custom Closet Rods
1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Closet Rod command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet
Rod button from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the distance of the closet rod off the floor in the Closet Rod Height dialog.
5. Enter the closet rod width.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the closet unit will bump into.
Filling Custom Closet Rods
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select the Closet Rod command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet
Rod button from the Closet toolbar.
4. Enter the distance of the closet rod off the floor in the Closet Rod Height dialog.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the wall and location to fill the rod on.
Filled closet rods remain active for the selected rod type and can be filled in more than
one location until another closet component is selected.
Entering Face Frame Only Cabinets
Face frames without cabinet boxes can be placed or filled on walls.
Placing Face Frame Only (Frame Only)
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinets menu.
2. Select the Base command from the Face Frames menu.
3. Enter the width of the face frame when prompted.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Click on the wall and location of the face frame.
6. Move the face frame to the desired location and click the mouse.
Upper and Special Face frames are placed in the same manner.
3-73
Valances
Custom valance sizes can be entered in a room.
Placing Custom Valances
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Valance command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Valance button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Select a valance shape.
4. Enter the location of the valance from the ceiling.
5. Enter the valance height.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Enter the valance width when prompted.
8. Select the OK button.
9. Click on the wall and location of the valance.
10. Move the valance to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap valances placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This allows the
program to automatically bump the valance to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall
permitting the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation.
Bumping Custom Valances
Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Valance command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Valance button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
Select a valance shape.
Enter the location of the valance from the ceiling.
Enter the valance height.
Select the OK button.
Enter the valance width when prompted.
Select the OK button.
Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the valance unit will bump into.
. Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets,
appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the
layout situation.
3-74
Filling Custom Valances
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Valance command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Valance button from the
Cabinet toolbar.
3. Click on the wall and location to fill the valance on.
A filled valance remains active and can be filled in more than one location until another
cabinet type is selected.
Entering Island Cabinets
Island cabinets must be placed on island walls.
Placing Island Cabinets
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu.
Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu.
Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
Select the OK button.
Click on the island wall and location of the cabinet.
Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or
wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout
situation.
Filling Island Cabinets
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu.
4. Click on the island wall and location to fill cabinets on.
Filled island cabinets remain active and can be filled in more than one location.
3-75
Entering Peninsula Cabinets
Peninsula cabinets must be placed on peninsula walls.
Placing Peninsula Cabinets
1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu.
4. Enter the cabinet width when prompted.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Click on the peninsula wall and location of the cabinet.
7. Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse.
Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or
wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout
situation.
Filling Peninsula Cabinets
1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu.
3. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu.
4. Click on the peninsula wall and location to fill cabinets on.
Filled peninsula cabinets remain active and can be filled in more than one location.
3-76
Entering Rotated Cabinets
A basic cabinet can be rotated into the corner of a room. This feature is useful for rotating a sink
or cooktop cabinet into the corner of a room.
1. Select the Rotate command from the Cabinet menu.
2. Select the Base, Upper, or Special command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Base,
Upper, or Special button from the Cabinet toolbar.
3. Enter the cabinet width.
4. Enter the cabinet depth.
5. Enter the cabinet setback. Entering a value here drops back the rotated cabinet from
adjacent cabinets. A setback filler is placed along each side of the cabinet.
6. Enter the angle of rotation from the left wall.
7. Select the OK button.
8. Click in the corner of the room where the rotated cabinet will be located.
Entering Angle Wall Cabinets
A dialog box appears when two cabinets meet on an inside angle of less than 90 degrees. The
options are Empty Space, Miter, and Return.
•
Select the Empty Space button if you want the two adjoining cabinets to touch on the front
edges and keep the ends square. This creates an empty or dead space.
•
Select the Miter button if you want the two adjoining cabinets mitered with angled ends.
•
Select the Return button if you want the first cabinet placed to create a return panel and the
second cabinet to butt into it.
Deleting Cabinets
Single or multiple cabinets can be deleted at one time.
Select the Floor Plan or Elevation option from the View menu, or select the Floor Plan or
Elevation button from the View toolbar.
Click on a wall if you choose to view an elevation.
Hold down the Control key while clicking on each cabinet you wish to delete.
Click the Right button on the mouse after selecting the desired cabinets.
Select the Delete option from the Pop Up menu.
3-77
Cabinet Graphics
Additional CAD lines can be drawn on a cabinet in a room design to represent a decorative or
constructional detail.
1. Click on a cabinet to select it.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Cabinet Graphics command from the Pop Up
menu.
3. Select either the Front, Back, Left, or Right button from the Main Toolbar to select the side
of the cabinet on which you wish to add additional CAD.
4. Using the commands found on the CAD menu, add additional CAD to the view.
5. Select the Close button.
Entering Lines
A line has a starting point and an ending point. Lines can be drawn on selected views to create a
design or further enhance a drawing.
1. Select a line color from the CAD Preference dialog box.
2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
3. Select the Line command on the CAD menu.
4. Select the Solid, Dashed, Center, or Pointer command from the Line menu, or select the
Solid Line, Dashed Line, Center Line, or Pointer Line button from the CAD toolbar.
5. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
6. Click to anchor a starting point for the line.
7. Move the flexible line with the mouse to an ending location.
8. When you are satisfied with the length and direction of the line, click the mouse button.
Tip: Using the Snap options allows you to connect a new line to an existing line, line end points,
line mid points, or intersecting lines.
Modifying Lines
A single line can be changed into an arc, curve, or s-curve.
1. Click on a line to select it.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Modify Shape command from the Pop Up menu.
3. Select arc, curve, or s-curve from the dialog.
4. Select the OK button.
3-78
Entering Parallel Lines
The parallel lines allow the drawing of a series of multiple lines that parallel each other.
1. Select a line color from the CAD Preference dialog box.
2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
3. Select the Parallel Lines command from the CAD menu.
4. Select the Solid, Dashed, Center, or Pointer command from the Parallel Line menu, or
select the Solid Parallel Line, Dashed Parallel Line, Center Parallel Line, or Pointer
Parallel Line button from the CAD toolbar.
5. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
6. Click to anchor a starting point for the first parallel line.
7. Move the flexible line with the mouse to an ending location.
8. Click the button when you are satisfied with the length and direction of the first line.
9. Move the cursor perpendicular to the first line.
10. Click the button again when you are satisfied with the spacing distance for the second line
from the first line.
11. Continue this process for each additional parallel line.
12. When the last parallel line is complete, click the right button and select the Quit command
from the Pop Up menu.
Entering Polylines
A polyline is a series of two or more connecting lines. Polylines can be drawn on selected views
to further enhance a drawing.
Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box.
Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
Select the Polyline command from the CAD menu.
Select the Solid, Dashed, Center, or Pointer command from the Polyline menu, or select the
Solid Polyline, Dashed Polyline, Center Polyline, or Pointer Polyline button from the CAD
toolbar.
Move the cursor into the drawing area.
Click to anchor a starting point for the polyline.
Move the flexible line with the mouse to a second location.
When you are satisfied with the length and direction of the first line, click the mouse button.
Move the flexible line with the mouse to a third location.
When you are satisfied with the length and direction of the second line, click the mouse button.
Continue with this process to add additional connecting polylines.
When the last polyline is complete; press the ESC key, or click the right mouse button and select
the End Polyline command from the Pop Up menu.
3-79
Tip: The Snap option allows you to connect a new line to an existing line, line end points, line
mid points, or intersecting lines.
Entering Squares
A square is a box with four equal sides. Square boxes can be drawn on selected views to further
enhance a drawing.
1. Select a color from the CAD Preferences dialog box.
2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
3. Select the Square command from the CAD menu.
4. Select the Solid, Dashed, or Filled command from the Square menu, or select the Solid
Square, Dashed Square, or Filled Square button from the CAD toolbar.
5. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
6. Click to anchor a starting point for the box.
7. Move the flexible box with the mouse to an opposite end location.
8. When you are satisfied with the box size and location, click the mouse button.
Tip: The Snap options allow you to connect a new square to an existing line, line end points,
line mid points, or intersecting lines.
Entering Rectangles
A rectangle is a box with equal opposing sides. Rectangles can be drawn on selected views to
further enhance a drawing.
Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box.
Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
Select the Rectangle command from the CAD menu.
Select the Solid, Dashed, or Filled command from the Rectangle menu, or select the Solid
Rectangle, Dashed Rectangle, or Filled Rectangle button from the CAD toolbar.
Move the cursor into the drawing area.
Click to anchor a starting point for the rectangle.
Move the flexible box with the mouse to an opposite end location.
When you are satisfied with the rectangle size and location, click the mouse button.
Tip: The Snap options allow you to connect a new rectangle to an existing line, line end points,
line mid points, or intersecting lines.
3-80
Entering Polygons
A polygon is a series of three or more connecting lines that form a shape by connecting the
ending point with the starting point. Examples of polygons are triangles, hexagons, octagons,
trapezoids, etc. Almost any straight-line polygon shape can be drawn on selected views to
further enhance a drawing.
1. Select a line type and color from the CAD Preference dialog box.
2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
3. Select the Polygons command from the CAD menu.
4. Select the Solid or Filled command from the Polygons menu, or select the Solid Polygons
or Filled Polygons button from the CAD toolbar.
5. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
6. Click to anchor a starting point for the polygon.
7. Move the mouse in a clockwise direction to mark the second point of the polygon.
8. When you are satisfied with the first line length and direction, click the mouse button.
9. Move the flexible line with the mouse to a third location.
10. When you are satisfied with the second line length and direction, click the mouse button.
11. Continue with this process to add more lines to the polygon.
12. When all but the last line is complete, click the right mouse button and select the End
Polygon command from the Pop Up menu. The program automatically returns the last line
back to the starting point.
Drawing a Hatched-Filled Polygon
1. Select a color, a Hatch Pattern button, and hatching spacing from the CAD Preferences
dialog box.
2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
3. Select the Polygons command from the CAD menu.
4. Select the Filled command from the Polygons menu, or select the Filled Polygons button
from the CAD toolbar.
5. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
6. Click to anchor a starting point for the polygon.
7. Move the mouse in a clockwise direction to mark the second point of the polygon.
8. When you are satisfied with the first line length and direction, click the mouse button.
9. Move the flexible line with the mouse to a third location.
10. When you are satisfied with the second line length and direction, click the mouse button.
11. Continue with this process to add more lines to the polygon.
12. When all but the last line is complete; click the right mouse button and select the End
Polygon command from the Pop Up menu. The program automatically returns the last line
back to the starting point and fills the polygon with the selected color and hatch pattern.
3-81
Entering Circles
Circles can be drawn on selected views to further enhance a drawing.
1. Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box.
2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
3. Select the Circle command from the CAD menu.
4. Select the Solid or Dashed command from the Polygons menu, or select the Solid Circle or
Dashed Circle button from the CAD toolbar.
5. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
6. Click to anchor the center of the circle.
7. Move the flexible circle with the mouse to form the circle.
8. When you are satisfied with the circle size, click the mouse button.
Entering Curves
Arcs, curves, and s-curves can be drawn on selected views to further enhance a drawing.
Drawing Arcs
1. Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box.
2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
3. Select the Curves command from the CAD menu.
4. Select the Arc command from the Curve menu, or select the Arc button from the CAD
toolbar.
5. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
6. Click to anchor a starting point for the arc.
7. Move the flexible arc with the mouse to an ending location.
8. When satisfied with the size and direction of the arc, click the mouse button.
Drawing Curves
1. Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box.
2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
3. Select the Curves command from the CAD menu.
4. Select the Curve command from the Curves menu, or select the Curve button from the CAD
toolbar.
5. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
6. Click to anchor a starting point for the curve.
7. Move the flexible curve with the mouse to an ending location.
8. When satisfied with the size and direction of the curve, click the mouse button.
3-82
Drawing S Curves
1. Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box.
2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box.
3. Select the Curves command from the CAD menu.
4. Select the S Curve command from the Curve menu, or select the S Curve button from the
CAD toolbar.
5. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
6. Click to anchor a starting point for the s-curve.
7. Move the flexible s-curve with the mouse to an ending location.
8. When satisfied with the size and direction of the s-curve, click the mouse button.
Tip: The Snap options allow you to connect a curved line to an existing line, line end points, line
mid points, or intersecting lines.
Modifying Curves
The direction of arcs, curves, and s-curves can be reversed, or the shape modified.
Reversing Curves
1. Click on an arc, curve, or s-curve to select it.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Reverse Curve command from the Pop Up
menu.
Shaping Curves
1. Click on an arc, curve, or s-curve to select it.
2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the handles of the curve until the cursor changes to a
four-directional arrow.
3. Click and hold the mouse button.
4. Move the mouse to reshape the curve.
5. When the curve is at the desired shape, release the mouse button.
3-83
Entering Text
Text can be entered on most views to further enhance a drawing.
1. Select the Text command from the CAD menu, or select the Text button from the CAD
toolbar.
2. Select the Enter command from the Text menu, if you are using the menus.
3. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
4. Click to anchor a starting point for a text box.
5. Move the flexible text box with the mouse to an opposite end location.
6. When you are satisfied with the text box size, click the mouse button again.
7. Enter your text in the CAD Text dialog.
8. Select any text options and the text color.
9. Select the OK button.
10. Resize the text box to the correct size.
Modifying Text
Text wording, configuration, size, and color can be modified by the user.
1. Double click on a text block, or single click on a text block and click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
2. Modify the text, its configuration, size, or color.
3. Select the OK button.
Moving Text
Text can be moved to any location on the design.
1. Click on a text box to select it.
2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the text box until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow.
3. Click and hold the mouse button.
4. Move the mouse to move the text box.
5. When the text box is at the desired location, release the mouse button.
3-84
Sizing Text
A text box can be re-sized in a design.
1. Click on a text box to select it.
2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double
arrow.
3. Click and hold the mouse button.
4. Move the mouse to resize the text box.
5. When the text box is the desired size, release the mouse button.
Deleting Text
A text box can be deleted from a design.
1. Click on a text box to select it.
2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from
the Pop Up menu.
Saving Text
A text box can be saved to a file for future retrieval. This is useful for text used frequently.
1. Click on a text box to select it.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Save command from the Pop Up menu, or select
the Save command from the Text menu.
3. Enter a description for the saved text.
4. Select the OK button.
Retrieving Text
Text saved to a file can be retrieved and placed in a drawing.
1. Select the Text command from the CAD menu.
2. Select the Retrieve command from the Text menu, or the Retrieve Text button from the
CAD toolbar.
3. Select the desired text from the list box.
4. Select the OK button.
5. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
6. Click to anchor a position for the retrieved text box.
3-85
Erasing CAD
Any CAD or program-generated lines can be erased from a design.
Erasing CAD Lines
Use this method for erasing user-created CAD lines only.
1. Select the Erase command from the CAD menu, or the Erase button from the CAD toolbar.
2. Click to anchor a starting point for an erase box.
3. Move the flexible erase box with the mouse to encompass any portion of the CAD lines you
wish to erase.
4. When you are satisfied with the size and location of the erase box, click the mouse button
again. All CAD lines within the box are erased.
Erasing Any Lines
Use this method to erase any program-generated or user-created CAD lines.
1. Select the Erase Any Line check box from the CAD Preference dialog box.
2. Select the Erase command from the CAD menu.
3. Click to anchor a starting point for an erase box.
4. Move the flexible erase box with the mouse to encompass any portion of any lines you wish
to erase.
5. When you are satisfied with the size and location of the erase box, click the mouse button
again. All cabinet, counter, appliance, 3D object, window, door, wall, and CAD lines within
the box will be erased.
Selecting CAD lines to Delete
1. Click on a CAD line to select it.
2. Click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu, or
press the Delete key.
Warning: Once you have erased lines using the Erase Any Line option; there are no
bringing back lines of cabinets, counters, appliances, 3D objects, windows, doors, or walls
without re-entering the items.
3-86
CAD Preferences
CAD preferences allow the user to choose the default setting for CAD work.
1. Select the Preference command from the CAD menu, or the Preference button from the
CAD toolbar.
2. Select the desired preferences.
3. Select the OK button.
Cursor Control
Cursor control allows the user to control the type and movement of the mouse cursor during
CAD. Cursor control is useful if you are having problems drawing lines to specific lengths and
angles.
1. Select the Cursor Control command from the CAD menu.
2. Select the desired setting.
3. Select the OK button.
Origin
Readouts are displayed on the screen for the cursor location from your point of origin when
entering CAD lines and objects. Each view has its own default point of origin. A small circle on
each view represents the point of origin. A new point of origin can be set to better help you with
adding CAD to a view. A new origin might be set for an end of a wall, or the corner of a cabinet.
Setting an Origin
1. Select the Origin command from the CAD menu.
2. Select the Set Origin command from the Origin menu.
3. Click on the view to locate the new origin point.
Tip: The Snap options allow you to connect a new point of origin to an existing line, line end
points, line mid points, or intersecting lines.
Unsetting an Origin
Unsetting an Origin returns the point of origin back to its default location.
1. Select the Origin command from the CAD menu.
2. Select the Unset Origin command from the Origin menu.
3-87
Snapping
Snapping allows you to precisely connect a new CAD object (i.e.; line, box, rectangle,
dimensions, etc.) to an existing CAD object. Snapping is also a very effective way of marking a
new origin point, or for connecting walls.
Manual Snap
The manual snap method has the same functions as the Nearest Snap mode, but doesn’t remain
active after its use.
1.
After selecting a CAD object, move the cursor as close as possible to an existing line, line
end point, or line intersection.
2.
Press the S key on the keyboard to snap the object to an existing line.
3.
Without moving the mouse, click the mouse to start the CAD object.
4.
Draw the next CAD segment, or end the CAD object with snap by moving the cursor again
as close as possible to an existing line, line end point, or line intersection and press the S
key.
5.
Without moving the mouse, click the mouse to anchor the CAD object.
Nearest Snap Mode
The Nearest Snap mode allows you to precisely connect a new CAD object (i.e.; line, box,
rectangle, dimensions, etc.) to an existing CAD object at its nearest point or intersection.
1. After selecting a CAD object, click the right mouse button and select the Nearest Snap
command from the Pop Up menu to place the program in the nearest snap mode.
2. Move the cursor as close as possible to an existing line, line end point, or line intersection.
3. Click the button to start the new object. The program automatically starts and snaps the
beginning of the new CAD object onto the nearest existing line, line end point, or line
intersection
4. Draw the next CAD segment, or end the CAD object with nearest snap by moving the cursor
again as close as possible to an existing line, line end point, or line intersection and clicking
the button.
As long as the nearest snap mode is turned on, the program continues to begin and end
CAD objects by snapping to existing lines, line end points, or line intersections.
To turn off the nearest snap mode, click the right mouse button and select the Snap Off
command from the Pop Up menu.
3-88
Endpoint Snap Mode
The Endpoint Snap mode allows you to precisely connect a new CAD object (i.e.; line, box,
rectangle, dimensions, etc.) to an existing CAD object at its endpoint.
1. After selecting a CAD object, click the right mouse button and select the Endpoint Snap
command from the Pop Up menu to place the program in the endpoint snap mode.
2. Move the cursor as close as possible to the end of an existing line.
3. Click the button to start the new object. The program automatically starts and snaps the
beginning of the new CAD object onto the end of the existing line.
4. Draw the next CAD segment, or end the CAD object with the endpoint snap by moving the
cursor again as close as possible to the end of an existing line and clicking the button.
As long as the endpoint snap mode is turned on, the program continues to begin and end
CAD objects by snapping to the end of existing lines.
To turn off the endpoint snap mode, click the right mouse button and select the Snap Off
command from the Pop Up menu.
Midpoint Snap Mode
The Midpoint Snap mode allows you to precisely connect a new CAD object (i.e.; line, box,
rectangle, dimensions, etc.) to an existing CAD object at its midpoint.
1. After selecting a CAD object, click the right mouse button and select the Midpoint Snap
command from the Pop Up menu to place the program in the midpoint snap mode.
2. Move the cursor as close as possible to the middle of an existing line.
3. Click the button to start the new object. The program automatically starts and snaps the
beginning of the new CAD object onto the middle of the existing line.
4. Draw the next CAD segment, or end the CAD object with the midpoint snap by moving the
cursor again as close as possible to the middle of an existing line and clicking the button.
As long as the midpoint snap mode is turned on, the program continues to begin and end
CAD objects by snapping to the middle of existing lines.
To turn off the midpoint snap mode, click the right mouse button and select the Snap Off
command from the Pop Up menu.
3-89
Intersection Snap Mode
The Intersection Snap mode allows you to precisely connect a new CAD object (i.e.; line, box,
rectangle, dimensions, etc.) to existing CAD objects at their intersecting points.
1. After selecting a CAD object, click the right mouse button and select the Intersection Snap
command from the Pop Up menu to place the program in the intersection snap mode.
2. Move the cursor as close as possible to the intersection of two or more existing lines.
3. Click the button to start the new object. The program automatically starts and snaps the
beginning of the new CAD object onto the intersection of the existing lines.
4. Draw the next CAD segment, or end the CAD object with the intersection snap by moving the
cursor again as close as possible to the intersection of two or more existing lines and clicking
the button.
As long as the intersection snap mode is turned on, the program continues to begin and
end CAD objects by snapping to the intersecting points of existing lines.
To turn off the intersection snap mode, click the right mouse button and select the Snap Off
command from the Pop Up menu.
Modifying Cabinets
The size, configuration, and location of a cabinet can be modified.
1. Double click on a cabinet, or single click on a cabinet and click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu; or single click on a cabinet and select
the Cabinet command from the Modify menu.
2. Select the desired tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box and modify the current settings.
3. Select the OK button.
Sizing Cabinets
Cabinets can be re-sized from the floor plan, elevation, and cabinet view.
1. Click on a cabinet to select it.
2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double
arrow.
3. Click and hold the mouse button.
4. Move the mouse to resize the cabinet.
5. When the cabinet is the desired size, release the mouse button.
Pressing the Shift key while moving the mouse fractions the size of a cabinet.
3-90
Moving Cabinets
Cabinets can be moved to new locations on walls.
1. Click on a cabinet to select it.
2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the cabinet until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow.
3. Click and hold the mouse button.
4. Move the mouse to move the cabinet.
5. When the cabinet is at the desired location, release the mouse button.
Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the
program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or
wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout
situation. If you want to overrride the programs automatic bump feature while moving a cabinet,
hold down the CTRL key while moving the cabinet.
Adding Cabinets
One or more cabinets can be added to a group of connecting cabinets. Each time a cabinet is
added to a group of connecting cabinets, all cabinets are re-sized and equally divided in width to
occupy the same space.
1. Click on one cabinet in a group of connecting cabinets.
2. Select the Vertical Add button from the Main toolbar.
Each time the Vertical Add button is selected; one additional cabinet is added to the
group of cabinets.
Deleting Cabinets
Cabinets can be deleted from a room design.
1. Click on a cabinet to select it.
2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from
the Pop Up menu.
When deleting custom cabinets from a group of connecting cabinets, the program prompts
you to re-size adjacent cabinets. Selecting Yes causes any adjacent cabinets to re-size to fill the
available space left by the deleted cabinet.
3-91
Modifying Quick Job Cabinets
Cabinets selected in Quick Job can be modified.
Modifying from the List
The quantity, width, height, depth, finished end, door hinging, and door style can be modified
from the Quick Job list.
Click on a field that you wish to edit and change the value; or click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
Select the desired tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box and modify the current settings.
Select the OK button.
Modifying from a Cabinet View
The size and configuration of a cabinet and cabinet section can be modified from a cabinet view.
1. With a cabinet selected, choose the Cabinet command from the View menu, or click the right
mouse button to select the Cabinet View command from the Pop Up menu.
2. Double click on the cabinet, or single click on the cabinet and click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu; or single click on the cabinet and select
the Cabinet command from the Modify menu.
3. Select the desired tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box and modify the current settings.
4. Select the OK button.
Deleting Cabinets
Cabinets can be deleted from the Quick Job list.
Click on a cabinet to select it.
Click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu.
3-92
Modifying Cabinet Sections
The size and configuration of a cabinet section can be modified.
1. Click on a cabinet to select it.
2. Wait a second, and then click on the selected cabinet’s section.
3. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
4. Select the desired tab from the Section Modify dialog box and modify the current settings.
5. Select the OK button.
Adding Vertical Cabinet Sections
One or more sections can be added vertically to cabinets. Each time a cabinet section is added
to a cabinet, all sections are re-sized and equally divided.
Click on one section of a cabinet.
Select the Vertical Add button from the Main toolbar. A new section is added to the left of the
selected section.
Adding Horizontal Cabinet Sections
One or more sections can be added horizontally to cabinets. Each time a cabinet section is
added to a cabinet, all sections are re-sized and equally divided.
Click on one section of a cabinet.
Select the Horizontal Add button from the Main toolbar. A new section is added below the
selected section.
Each time the Vertical Add or Horizontal Add button is selected, one additional section
is added to the cabinet.
Deleting Cabinet Sections
Sections can be deleted from a cabinet. Each time a cabinet section is deleted, all remaining
sections are re-sized and equally divided.
Click on a cabinet section to select it.
Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the
Pop Up menu.
3-93
Modifying Quick Job Sections
Cabinet sections selected in Quick Job can be modified.
1. With a cabinet selected, choose the Cabinet command from the View menu; or click the right
mouse button to select the Cabinet View command from the Pop Up menu.
2. Click on the cabinet to select it.
3. Wait a second, then click on the selected cabinet’s section
4. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
5. Select the desired tab from the Section Modify dialog box and modify the current settings.
6. Select the OK button.
Modifying Section Ends and Backs
Section ends and backs are added to a cabinet when you want to create an access opening on
the cabinet ends and back.
Creating Section Ends
1. Double click on a cabinet, or single click on a cabinet and click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu; or single click on a cabinet and select
the Cabinet command from the Modify menu.
2. Select the Left End or Right End tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box.
3. Select Section from the Section Type option.
4. Select the Close button.
Creating Section Backs
1. Double click on a cabinet, or single click on a cabinet and click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu; or single click on a cabinet and select
the Cabinet command from the Modify menu.
2. Select the Backs tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box.
3. Select Sections from the Back Type option.
4. Select the Close button.
3-94
Modifying Section Ends and Backs
1. Select the Cabinet command from the View menu, or the Cabinet button from the View
toolbar.
2. Select the cabinet to be modified.
3. Select the Front, Back, Left, or Right button from the Main toolbar to choose the
appropriate cabinet face to view and modify the sections.
4. Click on the cabinet’s section to select it.
5. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu.
6. Select the desired tab from the Section Modify dialog box and modify the current settings.
7. Select the Close button.
Modifying Paneled Ends and Backs
Paneled ends and backs are added to cabinets when you want to create raised panel or flat
panel ends and backs on cabinets.
Creating Paneled Ends
1. Double click on a cabinet, or single click on a cabinet and click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu; or single click on a cabinet and select
the Cabinet command from the Modify menu.
2. Select the Left End or Right End tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box.
3. Select Paneled from the Section Type option.
4. Select the Close button.
Creating Paneled Backs
1. Double click on a cabinet, or single click on a cabinet and click the right mouse button to
select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu; or single click on a cabinet and select
the Cabinet command from the Modify menu.
2. Select the Backs tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box.
3. Select Paneled from the Back Type option.
4. Select the Close button.
3-95
Modifying Paneled Ends and Backs
Select the Cabinet command from the View menu, or the Cabinet button from the View toolbar.
Select the cabinet to be modified.
Select the Front, Back, Left, or Right button from the Main toolbar to choose the appropriate
cabinet face to view and modify the panels.
Click on the cabinet’s paneled end or back to select it.
Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu.
Select the desired tab from the Panel Modify dialog box and modify the current settings.
Select the Close button.
Adding Additional Vertical Panels
1. In the cabinet view, click on one panel of the cabinet.
2. Select the Vertical Add button from the Main toolbar. A new panel is added to the left of the
selected panel.
Adding Additional Horizontal Panels
1. In the cabinet view, click on one panel of the cabinet.
2. Select the Horizontal Add button from the Main toolbar. A new panel is added below the
selected panel.
Each time the Vertical Add or Horizontal Add button is selected, one additional panel is
added to the cabinet.
3-96
Modifying Wainscot Paneling
The size, configuration, and location of wainscot paneling can be modified.
Double click on a wainscot panel, or single click on a wainscot panel and click the right mouse
button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
Select the desired tab from the Panel Modify dialog box and modify the current settings.
Select the OK button.
Sizing Wainscot Paneling
Wainscot paneling can be re-sized from the floor plan, elevation, or cabinet view.
Click on a wainscot panel to select it.
Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double
arrow.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the mouse to resize the wainscot panel.
When the wainscot panel is the desired size, release the mouse button.
Moving Wainscot Paneling
Wainscot paneling can be moved to a new location on a wall.
Click on a wainscot panel to select it.
Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the wainscot panel until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the mouse to move the wainscot panel.
When the wainscot panel is at the desired location, release the mouse button.
Deleting Wainscot Paneling
Wainscot Paneling can be deleted from a room design.
Click on a wainscot panel to select it.
Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the
Pop Up menu.
3-97
Modifying Wainscot Sub Panels
The size and configuration of a sub panel of the wainscot paneling can be modified.
Modifying Wainscot Sub Panels
Click on a wainscot panel to select it.
Wait a second, and then click on one of the selected wainscot sub panels.
Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu.
Select the desired tab from the Sub Panel Modify dialog box and modify the current settings.
Select the OK button.
Adding Vertical Wainscot Sub Panels
One or more sub panels can be added vertically to wainscot paneling. Each time a sub panel is
added to a wainscot panel, all sub panels are re-sized and equally divided.
Click on one sub panel of the wainscot paneling.
Select the Vertical Add button from the Main toolbar. A new sub panel is added to the left of the
selected sub panel.
Adding Horizontal Wainscot Sub Panels
One or more sub panels can be added horizontally to wainscot paneling. Each time a sub panel
is added to a wainscot panel, all sub panels are re-sized and equally divided.
1. Click on one sub panel of the wainscot paneling.
2. Select the Horizontal Add button from the Main toolbar. A new sub panel is added below
the selected sub panel.
Each time the Vertical Add or Horizontal Add button is selected, one additional sub
panel is added to the wainscot paneling.
Deleting Wainscot Sub Panels
Sub panels can be deleted from wainscot paneling.
1. Click on a wainscot sub panel to select it.
2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from
the Pop Up menu.
3-98
Entering Partitions and Dividers
Partitions and dividers can be added to any cabinet opening to sub-divide that section. Shelves
and pullouts can also be added to a cabinet section.
Adding Partitions
1. From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu.
2. Select either the H. Partition button to enter horizontal partitions, or the V. Partition button to
enter vertical partitions.
3. Click on a cabinet section to enter a partition.
4. Continue clicking on any cabinet section requiring partitions.
Tip: Adding a combination of both horizontal and vertical partitions to a cabinet section
allows you to divide a cabinet opening into cubbyholes or mail slots.
Adding Dividers
From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu.
Select either the H. Divider button to enter horizontal dividers, or the V. Partition button to enter
vertical dividers.
Click on a cabinet section to enter a divider.
Continue clicking on any cabinet sections requiring dividers.
Adding Shelves
From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu.
Select the Shelf button from the main toolbar.
Click on a cabinet section on which you wish to enter a shelf.
Continue clicking on any cabinet sections requiring shelves.
Adding Pull-outs
From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu.
Select the Pullout button from the main toolbar.
Click on a cabinet section to enter a pullout.
Continue clicking on any cabinet sections requiring pullouts.
Make sure all cabinet and section changes are made before adding partitions or dividers.
Also, delete any shelves or pullout shelves in section modify before adding any partitions or
dividers. Shelves and pullouts can also be added using the Partitions/Dividers command. This
is important because once partitions and dividers have been added to a cabinet section, you
cannot go back and make cabinet and section modification changes.
3-99
Modifying Partitions & Dividers
Partitions, dividers, shelves, and pullouts can be modified within a cabinet section.
Moving Partitions and Dividers
From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu.
Click on a partition, divider, shelf, or pullout to select it.
Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the item until the cursor changes to a four-directional
arrow.
Click and hold the mouse button.
Move the mouse to move the item.
When the readouts show the correct location, release the mouse button.
Deleting Partitions and Dividers
Partitions, dividers, shelves, and pullouts can be deleted within a cabinet section.
From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu.
Click on a partition, divider, shelf, or pullout to select it.
Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the
Pop Up menu.
3-100
Modifying Cabinet Cutlists
Parts for an individual cabinet can be added, deleted, or modified before the printing of a cutlist.
Select the Cabinet Cutlist command from the Modify menu and select a cabinet; or select a
cabinet and click the right button to select the Cabinet Cutlist command from the Pop Up
menu.
The following screen displays a grid with the quantity, width, length, part name and materials for
each part.
Click on one of the cells and make any necessary changes.
Continue this process for each change.
Select the OK button.
Part sizes cannot be modified unless the Show Finished Size check box on the Cabinet
Cutlist dialog is selected.
Modifying Extended Cabinet Part Information
Select the Cabinet Cutlist command from the Modify menu and select a cabinet; or select a
cabinet and click the right button to select the Cabinet Cutlist command from the Pop Up
menu.
The following screen displays a grid with the quantity, width, length, part name and materials for
each part.
Click on the number cells to the left of the part you need to modify.
Select the Edit Button.
Make any necessary part changes in the Edit Part dialog.
Select the OK button.
Continue this process for each cabinet part you wish to modify.
Select the OK button.
3-101
Modifying Multiple Cabinet Part Sizes by Tagging
1. Select the Cabinet Cutlist command from the Modify menu and select a cabinet; or select a
cabinet and click the right button to select the Cabinet Cutlist command from the Pop Up
menu.
2. The following screen displays a grid with the quantity, width, length, part name and materials
for each part.
3. Click on the numbered cell to the left of the first part you need to tag for modification.
4. While holding down the CTRL key, click on the number cells to the left of the second part you
need to tag for modification.
5. Continue tagging parts you wish to modify using this process.
6. Select the Edit Tagged Button.
7. Make any necessary size changes in the Modify Tagged Part dialog.
8. Select the OK button.
A range of part sizes can be tagged by holding the SHIFT key and clicking on a beginning
numbered cell and an ending numbered cell.
Adding Cabinet Parts
1. Select the Cabinet Cutlist command from the Modify menu and select a cabinet; or select a
cabinet and click the right button to select the Cabinet Cutlist command from the Pop Up
menu.
2. The following screen displays a grid with the quantity, width, length, part name and materials
for each part.
3. Select the New Button.
4. Enter all necessary information in the New Part dialog.
5. Select the OK button.
6. Continue this process for each new cabinet part.
7. Select the OK button.
3-102
Deleting Cabinet Parts
1. Select the Cabinet Cutlist command from the Modify menu and select a cabinet; or select a
cabinet and click the right button to select the Cabinet Cutlist command from the Pop Up
menu.
2. The following screen displays a grid with the quantity, width, length, part name and materials
for each part.
3. Click on the quantity cells for the part you wish to delete.
4. Enter a “0” for the quantity. Any part with a “0” quantity will not print on the cutlist.
5. Continue this process for each cabinet part you wish to delete.
6. Select the OK button.
It is important that all modifications to a cabinet be done before making any cutlist
changes. If you modify the size or configuration of a cabinet after the cabinet cutlist has been
modified, all changes made to the cutting list will be lost.
3-103
Modifying Job Cutlists
Parts for an individual cabinet can be added, deleted, or modified before the printing of a cutlist.
Select the Job Cutlist command from the Modify menu.
Select which room you want to edit parts for from the Room Name combo box.
Select which cabinets you want to edit parts for from the Cabinet Number combo box.
Select the type of part you want to edit from either the Interior, Exterior, or Door/Drawers
combo box.
Select the Edit button.
The following screen displays a grid with the quantity, room number, cabinet number, width,
length, part name and materials for each part.
Click on one of the cells and make any necessary changes.
Continue this process for each change.
Select the OK button to save the changes.
Part sizes cannot be modified unless the Show Finished Size check box on the Cabinet
Cutlist dialog is selected.
Modifying Extended Part Information for Job Cutlists
Select the Job Cutlist command from the Modify menu.
Select which room you want to edit parts for from the Room Name combo box.
Select which cabinets you want to edit parts for from the Cabinet Number combo box.
Select the type of part you want to edit from either the Interior, Exterior, or Door/Drawers
combo box.
Select the Edit button.
The following screen displays a grid with the quantity, room number, cabinet number, width,
length, part name and materials for each part.
Click on the number cells to the left of the part you need to modify.
Select the Edit Button.
Make any necessary part changes in the Edit Part dialog.
Select the OK button.
Continue this process for each cabinet part you wish to modify.
Select the OK button to save the changes.
3-104
Modifying Multiple Cabinet Part Sizes by Tagging
Select the Job Cutlist command from the Modify menu.
Select which room you want to edit parts for from the Room Name combo box.
Select which cabinets you want to edit parts for from the Cabinet Number combo box.
Select the type of part you want to edit from either the Interior, Exterior, or Door/Drawers
combo box.
Select the Edit button.
The following screen displays a grid with the quantity, room number, cabinet number, width,
length, part name and materials for each part.
Click on the numbered cell to the left of the first part you need to tag for modification.
While holding down the CTRL key, click on the number cells to the left of the second part you
need to tag for modification.
Continue tagging parts you wish to modify using this process.
Select the Edit Tagged Button.
Make any necessary size changes in the Modify Tagged Part dialog.
Select the OK button.
A range of part sizes can be tagged by holding the SHIFT key and clicking on a beginning
numbered cell and an ending numbered cell.
Adding Cabinet Parts
Select the Job Cutlist command from the Modify menu.
Select which room you want to add parts to from the Room Name combo box.
Select which cabinets you want to add parts to from the Cabinet Number combo box.
Select the related type of part you want to add from either the Interior, Exterior, or
Door/Drawers combo box.
Select the Edit button.
The following screen displays a grid with the quantity, room number, cabinet number, width,
length, part name and materials for each part.
Select the New Button.
Enter all necessary information in the New Part dialog.
Select the OK button.
Continue this process for each new cabinet part.
Select the OK button to save the changes.
3-105
Deleting Cabinet Parts
Select the Job Cutlist command from the Modify menu.
Select which room you want to delete parts from in the Room Name combo box.
Select which cabinets you want to delete parts from in the Cabinet Number combo box.
Select the type of part you want to delete from either the Interior, Exterior, or Door/Drawers
combo box.
Select the Edit button.
The following screen displays a grid with the quantity, room number, cabinet number, width,
length, part name and materials for each part.
Click on the quantity cells for the part you wish to delete.
Enter a “0” for the quantity. Any part with a “0” quantity will not print on the cutlist.
Continue this process for each cabinet part you wish to delete.
Select the OK button to save the changes.
It is important that all modifications to the job cutlist be made only after all room designs for
the job are complete. Modifying a job cutlist will not pick up changes made to a room design after
it has been saved. If changes to a room must be made after modifying a job cutlist, you will need
to make the necessary changes to the room design and re-edit the job cutlist.
3-106
Accessories
Accessories can be entered on a cabinet or room basis. Modification charges can also be
applied to a cabinet.
Entering Cabinet Accessories
Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu; or select a cabinet and click the right
button to select the Accessories command from the Pop Up menu.
Select a cabinet number from the Room/Cabinet combo box.
Select either the Add Line button to add a line accessory to the cabinet, or the Add Generic
button to add a generic accessory.
Select an accessory category, if needed.
Select an accessory sub-category, if needed.
Select an accessory.
Select the OK button.
Entering Room Accessories
1. Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu.
2. Select Room Accessories from the Room/Cabinet combo box.
3. Select either the Add Line button to add a line accessory to the room, or the Add Generic
button to add a generic accessory.
4. Select an accessory category, if needed.
5. Select an accessory sub-category, if needed.
6. Select an accessory.
7. Select the OK button.
Entering Custom Accessories
1. Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu.
2. Select Room Accessories from the Room/Cabinet combo box to enter a custom accessory
for the room, or Cabinet Number to enter a custom accessory for a cabinet.
3. Click on each blank field in the next available blank accessory row and enter the necessary
information about the accessory.
4. Select the OK button.
3-107
Entering Hardware
1. Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu; or select a cabinet and click the
right button to select the Accessories command from the Pop Up menu.
2. Select a cabinet number from the Room/Cabinet combo box.
3. Select the Add Hardware button to add a hardware item to the cabinet.
4. Select a hardware category, if needed.
5. Select a hardware item.
6. Select the OK button.
Editing Accessories and Hardware
1. Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu.
2. Select All Accessories from the Room/Cabinet combo box to view all accessories and
hardware items; Room Accessories to view only accessories and hardware items applied to
the room; Cabinet Number to view only accessories and hardware items applied to a
cabinet.
3. Click on a field that you wish to edit and change the value.
4. Select the OK button.
Deleting Accessories and Hardware
1. Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu.
2. Select All Accessories from the Room/Cabinet combo box to view all accessories and
hardware items; Room Accessories to view only accessories and hardware items applied to
the room; Cabinet Number to view only accessories and hardware items applied to a
cabinet.
3. Click on the accessory or hardware item you wish to delete.
4. Select the Delete button.
3-108
Printing Cutlists
A cutting list of cabinet parts can be printed in three different formats.
Printing Master Cutting Lists
A master cutting list displays detailed part information and prints each part individually.
1. Select the Open Room command from the File menu.
2. Select the drive where the job and room file is located from the Open Room dialog box.
3. Select the directory where the job and file is located.
4. Select a job from the Job list.
5. Select a room from the Room list. Any room from the job can be selected.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Select the Cutlist command from the Options menu.
8. Select any cutlist printing preferences.
9. Select the Master button.
10. Select the desired rooms you want to print.
11. Select the Print button.
Printing Batched Cutting Lists
A batched cutting list groups all parts with similar wood types and dimensions.
1. With a job and room loaded, select the Cutlist command from the Options menu.
2. Select any cutlist printing preferences.
3. Select the Batched button.
4. Select the desired rooms you want to print.
5. Select the Print button.
Printing Individual Cutting Lists
An individual cutting list displays a cabinet picture with its corresponding parts for each cabinet.
1. With a job and room loaded, select the Cutlist command from the Options menu.
2. Select any cutlist printing preferences.
3. Select the Individual button.
4. Select the desired rooms, or cabinet you want to print.
5. Select the Print button.
3-109
Editing Cutlists
Cutlists can be displayed on the screen and edited in the Microsoft WordPad program.
1. With a job and room loaded, select the Cutlist command from the Options menu.
2. Select any cutlist printing preferences.
3. Select the Master or Batched button.
4. Select the desired rooms that you want to print.
5. Select the Edit button.
6. The cutlist now appears in Microsoft WordPad.
7. Select the Page Setup command from the Document menu.
8. Make all necessary page formats.
9. Select the OK button from the Page Setup dialog.
10. Block all the text on the cutlist with the mouse cursor.
11. Select the Font command from the Format menu.
12. Select either the Courier or Courier New from the Font list.
13. Select a size 10 font from the Size list.
14. Select the OK button from the Font dialog.
15. Make any necessary edits to the cutlist using Microsoft WordPad.
16. Print from Microsoft WordPad.
Printing Cutlists to File
Cutlists can be printed to an ASCII file.
1. With a job and room loaded, select the Cutlist command from the Options menu.
2. Select any cutlist printing preferences.
3. Select the Master or Batched button.
4. Select the desired rooms that you want to print.
5. Select the File button.
3-110
Proposals
Proposals allow for the pricing and printing of cabinets and accessories for a job in a contractual
format. The program uses material cost, hardware cost, labor cost, overhead, and profit for the
pricing of a job.
Printing Proposals
1. Select the Open Room command from the File menu.
2. Select the drive where the job and room file is located from the Open Room dialog box.
3. Select the directory where the job and file is located.
4. Select a job from the Job list.
5. Select a room from the Room list. Any room from the job can be selected.
6. Select the OK button.
7. Select the Proposal command from the Options menu.
8. Select a price list.
9. Select any markups or discounts that you want to apply to the proposal.
10. Edit any line items if necessary by selecting the Line Item button.
11. Select your proposal printing preferences.
12. Select the Print button.
A proposal should only be printed after the room has been saved.
3-111
Editing Proposals
Proposals can be displayed on the screen and edited in the Microsoft WordPad program.
1. With a job and room loaded, select the Proposal command from the Options menu.
2. Select a price list.
3. Select any markups or discounts that you want to apply to the proposal.
4. Edit any line items if necessary by selecting the Line Item button.
5. Select your proposal printing preferences.
6. Select the Edit button.
7. The proposal now appears in Microsoft WordPad.
8. Select the Page Setup command from the Document menu.
9. Make all necessary page formats.
10. Select the OK button from the Page Setup dialog.
11. Block all the text on the proposal with the mouse cursor.
12. Select the Font command from the Format menu.
13. Select either the Courier or Courier New from the Font list.
14. Select a size 10 font from the Size list.
15. Select the OK button from the Font dialog.
16. Make any necessary edits to the proposal using Microsoft WordPad.
17. Print from Microsoft WordPad.
Printing Proposals to File
1. With a job and room loaded, select the Proposal command from the Options menu.
2. Select a price list.
3. Select any markups or discounts that you want to apply to the proposal.
4. Edit any line items if necessary by selecting the Line Item button.
5. Select your proposal printing preferences.
6. Select the File button.
3-112
Metric/Inch Layout
The dimensions for a room design can be temporarily changed from your default preference
setting to either millimeters or inches. This is helpful if you do all your design work in metric but
want to print out a design for a customer in inches.
Metric Layout
•
Select the Metric command from the Options menu to display a check mark.
Inch Layout
•
Select the Metric command from the Options menu to remove the check mark.
Electronic Tape Measure
The electronic tape measure allows you to measure the distance between objects on the screen.
1. Select the Tape Measure command from the Option menu, or select the Tape Measure
button from the Main toolbar.
2. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
3. Click to anchor a starting point for the tape measure.
4. Move the flexible line with the mouse to an ending point.
5. When you are satisfied with the location of the ending point, click the mouse button. A Tape
Measure dialog displays the length.
Tip: The Snap options allow you to connect a starting and ending point to an existing line, line
end points, line mid points, or intersecting lines.
Tiling Windows
Tiling windows resizes and arranges the open windows side by side on the screen without
overlapping. Use this option to see a full view of all windows.
•
Select the Tile command from the Window menu, or press Shift+F4.
Cascading Windows
Cascading windows resizes and layers open windows in a cascading pattern so that only the title
bar of each window is displayed. Use this option to see windows that may be hidden or to
organize the windows on the screen.
•
Select the Cascade command from the Window menu, or press Shift+F5.
3-113
Arranging Icons
The program can arrange your desktop so that all windows minimized to an icon can easily be
seen.
•
Select the Arrange Icon command from the Window menu
Opening New Windows
A new window can be opened to display the same view or a different view of the same design. If
you change the contents of a design in one window, all the other windows containing the same
design reflect those changes. When you open a new window, it becomes the active window and
is displayed on top of all other open windows.
•
Select the New Window command from the Window menu, or press Shift+F6.
•
While holding the Shift key, select a view from the View menu.
Minimizing All Windows
All windows can be minimized to icons in the program.
•
Select the Minimize All command from the Window menu.
Switching to a Different Open View
You can display more than one view on the screen at one time. To work on a particular view,
click anywhere in its window or select its name from the Windows menu.
•
If you can see part of the view you want to switch to, click anywhere in its window.
•
Select the Windows menu and choose the view you want to work with.
Fit Views to Windows
When a view window is resized, the view within the window can change automatically to fit the
new window size.
•
Select the Fit Views to Windows command from the Window menu.
3-114
Online Help
Cabnetware has an extensive on-line help system. On-line help can be reached using any of the
following methods:
•
Select a specific help command from the Help menu.
•
Press the F1 key at any time to display your program’s On-line Help.
•
Select the Help button from a dialog box.
•
Select a subject from Cabnetware’s Table of Contents.
•
Table of Contents.
3-115
Chapter 4
Tutorial
Welcome to the Case Planner - Frame Tutorial
This tutorial is designed to teach the step-by-step process of designing a simple kitchen using
Cabnetware’s CP-Frame program. This tutorial may also be found in the CP-Frame program’s
On-Line Help. The On-Line Help includes short video clips that demonstrate many of the steps of
this tutorial. You may follow the tutorial step by step, or select an item of particular interest.
The tutorial assumes you are using the Sample parameters provided with the program. If you are
using your own parameters or have changed the Sample files, your results may vary from our
examples.
Starting a New Room
All jobs begin with these steps.
1.
Select the New Room command from the File menu.
2.
The Room Defaults dialog box defaults to the Parameters tab.
3.
Select:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“PLASTIC TOPS” for Counter Top
“3/4” SHOP BIRCH” for Base and Upper Interior
“3/4” OAK VENEER” for Base and Upper Exterior
“SAMPLE 5” CASING” for Layout
“SAMPLE 36” HIGH BASE CABINETS” for Cabinet
“SAMPLE STANDARD CONSTRUCTION” for Base and Upper Construction
“SAMPLE RAISED PANEL DOOR” for Base and Upper Door
“SAMPLE SLAB DRAWER” for Drawer
“SAMPLE WOOD DRAWER BOX” for Drawer Box
“SAMPLE RAISED PANEL END” for Base and Upper End Panel.
4.
Select the Information tab.
5.
Enter “Tutorial Kitchen” for the Room Name. (For the purposes of our tutorial, we will
bypass the rest of the information on the screen.)
6.
Select the OK button.
4-1
Creating Exterior Walls
Exterior walls begin the layout of your room.
1.
Select the Exterior command from the Walls menu.
2.
Click in the upper left-hand region of the screen to start your first wall.
3.
Move the pointer to the right until the readouts at the bottom of the screen display 0.0 for
the angle and 265-1/4” for the length. (Holding down the shift key while moving the pointer
fractions the readouts).
4.
Click to end the first wall.
5.
Click again near the end of the first wall to connect your second wall to the first wall.
6.
Move the pointer down until the readouts display 90.0 for the angle and 197” for the length.
7.
Click to end the second wall.
8.
Press the right mouse button and select the Quit command from the Pop-up menu to exit
the wall layout mode.
Adding Windows
If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
1.
Select the Windows command from the Walls menu.
2.
Enter 42” for the window width, 36” for height, 42” for Distance from Floor.
3.
Enter 3” for the Trim Width, 2 for the number of flutes on the trim.
4.
Click on the Display Windowsill, and the Display Rosettes check boxes.
5.
Click on the Graphics box and choose the 48” BLINDS graphic.
6.
Choose Windows as the category, and then choose one of the available scenic graphics
found there. Select OK.
7.
Select the OK button.
8.
Click on the 265-1/4” wall.
9.
Move the window until the readouts display 217-1/4” from the left and 6” from the right.
10.
Click to anchor the window.
11.
Click on the 197” wall to place a second window.
12.
Move the window until the readouts display 6” from the left and 149” from the right.
13.
Click to anchor the second window.
14.
Press the right button and select Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the window
layout mode.
4-2
Adding Doors
If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
1.
Select the Doors command from the Walls menu.
2.
Enter 34” for the door width and 80” for the Height, 3” for the trim width, and 2 for the
number of flutes.
3.
Click the Display Rosettes check box.
4.
Select Hinge Left for Door Style.
5.
Click on the Graphics box and choose the Glass Panel Rose 1 graphic.
6.
Select the OK button.
7.
Click on the 265-1/4” wall.
8.
Move the door until the readouts display 79-1/4” from left and 152” from right. (Remember,
you hold down the shift key to fraction the readouts.)
9.
Click to anchor the door.
10.
Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the door
layout mode.
4-3
Creating Peninsula Walls
If a floor plan view is not already on-screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View
menu.
1.
Select the Peninsula/Island command from the Walls menu.
2.
Click near the right end of the 197” wall. The starting point of the peninsula wall snaps to
the existing wall.
3.
Move the pointer until the readouts display 90.0 for the angle and 96” for the length.
4.
Click to end the first peninsula wall.
5.
Click again near the end of the first peninsula wall to connect your second peninsula wall to
the first peninsula wall.
6.
Move the pointer up and to the left until the readouts display 45.0 for the angle and 66” for
the length.
7.
Click to end the second peninsula wall.
8.
Click again near the end of the second peninsula wall to connect your third peninsula wall
to the second peninsula wall.
9.
Move the pointer up until the readouts display 45.0 for the angle and 44” for the length.
10.
Click to end the third peninsula wall.
11.
Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the
peninsula wall layout mode.
Moving Peninsula Walls
If a floor plan view is not already on-screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View
menu.
1.
Click on the peninsula wall that is attached to the exterior wall to select it.
2.
Place the pointer over the wall until a four-directional arrow appears.
3.
Click and drag (without releasing) the peninsula until the readouts display 184” from the left
and 13” from the right.
4.
Release the button to place the peninsula wall.
4-4
Saving a Room
It is very important to routinely save your work as you progress on a job. A good rule of thumb is
to save your current room design about every ten minutes. This insures that if there is an
interruption to the power supply, you lose only a minimal amount of work.
1.
Select Save Room As command from the File menu.
2.
Enter “Tutorial” for the job name.
3.
Select the OK button.
4.
Select No at the Trim All Penn/Island Walls prompt.
Entering a Rotated Base Cabinet
If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
1.
Select Rotate from the Cabinet menu to allow the program to angle a cabinet across a
selected corner.
2.
Select Base from the Cabinet menu.
3.
Enter 42” for the Cabinet Width.
4.
Leave Depth, Setback, and Angle at their default values.
5.
Select the OK button.
6.
Click in the corner where the two windows are located and the program rotate the base
cabinet across the corner.
7.
Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the
cabinet layout mode.
4-5
Entering a Sink
If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
1.
Select Place from the Appliance menu to enable the program in the place mode.
2.
Select the Sink command from the Appliance menu.
3.
Select the Custom button from the Sink dialog.
4.
Enter 32” for Appliance Width, 22” for Appliance Depth, and 38” for Opening Width.
5.
Select the OK button.
6.
Click in front of the wall the program had put behind the rotated sink.
7.
Move the outline of the sink slightly back and forth till the Cab End to Wall End readouts at
the bottom of the screen read 11-15/16” for left and right, then click. (Remember to hold
down the Shift key to increment the readout.)
8.
Select No to the Re-design Cabinet to Accommodate Appliance question.
9.
The program will place your sink.
Entering a Dishwasher
If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
1.
Select Place from the Appliance menu to enable the program in the place mode.
2.
Select the Dishwasher command from the Appliance menu.
3.
Select the Custom button from the Dishwasher dialog.
4.
Enter 24” for Appliance Width, 24” for Appliance Depth, 34.5” for the Appliance Height, and
24” for Opening Width.
5.
Select the OK button.
6.
Click on the 197” wall.
7.
Move the dishwasher outline until the Cabinet end to wall end readout at the bottom of the
screen displays “58” from the left.
8.
Click to anchor the dishwasher.
4-6
Entering a Refrigerator
If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
1.
Select the Refrigerator command from the Appliance menu.
2.
Select the CUSTOM button from the Refrigerator dialog box.
3.
Enter:
•
•
•
•
•
32” for Appliance Width
28” for Appliance Depth
68” for Appliance Height
36” for Opening Width
72” for Opening Height.
4.
Select Side by Side for the Refrigerator Door Style. (This determines the graphic picture
the program uses for the refrigerator face)
5.
Select the OK button.
6.
Click on the 265-1/4” wall.
7.
Move the refrigerator outline until the refrigerator slightly overlaps the right side of the door.
8.
Click. The refrigerator will bump itself to the right of the door automatically, leaving a
reveal next to the door.
Entering an Oven
If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
1.
Select the Wall Oven Cabinet command from the Appliance menu.
2.
Select the CUSTOM button from the Oven dialog box.
3.
Enter 24” for Cutout Width, 25” for Cabinet Depth, 42” for Cutout Height, and 18” for
Distance from Floor.
4.
Select Microwave Oven for Wall Oven Style. (This determines the graphic picture the
program uses for the oven face)
5.
Select the OK button.
6.
Click on the 265-1/4” wall to the right of the refrigerator.
7.
Select Yes to the To Ceiling Height Prompt.
8.
Move the oven outline until the oven slightly overlaps the refrigerator then Click. The oven
will bump itself to the right of the refrigerator automatically, leaving a reveal next to the
refrigerator.
4-7
Entering a Cooktop and Hood
If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
Entering a Cooktop
1.
Select the Cooktop command from the Appliance menu.
2.
Select the Custom button from the Cooktop dialog.
3.
Fill in “36” for Appliance Width, “22” for Appliance Depth, and “32” for Opening Width.
4.
Select the OK button.
5.
Click on the 197” wall between the sink and the peninsula wall.
6.
Drag the outline of the cooktop until Cabinet end to Wall End Left at the bottom of the
screen reads 101” from left.
7.
Click to anchor the cooktop.
Entering a Hood
1.
Select the Hood command from the Appliance menu.
2.
Select the Custom button from the Hood dialog.
3.
Fill in “36” for Appliance Width, “12” for Appliance Depth, “6” for Appliance Height, and “36”
for Opening Width.
4.
Select the OK button.
5.
Click on the 197” wall over the cooktop.
6.
Select the Yes button when prompted to center the hood over range or cooktop.
4-8
Entering Peninsula Cabinets
Peninsula cabinets must be entered before entering regular cabinets. Placing peninsula cabinets
is virtually the same as any other cabinets with the exception that they are on a Peninsula wall.
Cabinets can be entered on peninsula walls with or without finished backs.
1.
Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinet menu to allow the program to pick the best
cabinets to fill a selected wall space.
2.
Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu to allow finished backs on
entered cabinets.
3.
Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu.
4.
Click to the inside of the 96” peninsula wall to fast fill base cabinets with finished backs.
5.
Click to the inside of the 66” peninsula wall to fast fill base cabinets with finished backs.
6.
Select the Empty Space button from the Corner Type dialog. This will fill with rectangular
cabinets that meet with mitered face frames.
7.
Click to the inside of the 44” peninsula wall to fast fill base cabinets with finished backs.
8.
Select the Empty Space button from the Corner Type dialog.
9.
Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the
cabinet layout mode.
Entering Special Cabinets
If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
1.
Select the Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu to enable the program in the
bump left mode. (This also demonstrates the Bump Left/Right feature.)
2.
Make sure you have de-selected the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu.
3.
Select the Special command from the Cabinet menu.
4.
The defaults in the Special Cabinet dialog should be correct. Double check that the On the
Floor, Detached Toe Kick, and Extend Cabinet to Ceiling options are selected.
5.
Select the OK button.
6.
Enter 24” for cabinet width and select OK.
7.
Click anywhere on the left end of the 265-1/4” wall to the left of the doorway.
8.
The cabinet will bump itself to the edge of the wall automatically, leaving a reveal next to
the end of the wall.
9.
Select the Cancel button.
4-9
Entering Base Cabinets
If a floor plan view is not already on-screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View
menu.
1.
Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinet menu to enable program in the fill mode.
2.
Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu.
3.
Click on the 265-1/4” wall between the special (tall) cabinet and the door to fill base
cabinets in that wall space.
4.
Click on the 265-1/4” wall between the oven cabinet and the sink.
5.
Click on the 197” wall between the dishwasher and the peninsula.
6.
Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the
cabinet layout mode.
4-10
Entering Base Fillers
If a floor plan view is not already on-screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View
menu.
1.
Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinet menu to enable the program in the fill
mode.
2.
Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu.
3.
Select the Base Filler command from the Filler menu.
4.
Click on the wall space just to the left of the dishwasher.
5.
Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the filler
layout mode.
4-11
Filling Upper Cabinets
If a floor plan view is not already on-screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View
menu.
1.
Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinet menu to enable the program in the fast fill
mode.
2.
Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu.
3.
Click on the 265-1/4” wall between the special (tall) cabinet and the door to fill upper
cabinets in that wall space.
4.
Click on the 265-1/4” wall between the door and the refrigerator.
5.
Click on the 265-1/4” wall between the oven cabinet and the window.
6.
Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the
cabinet layout mode.
Placing Upper Cabinets
If a floor plan view is not already on-screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
Placing Upper Cabinets
1.
Select Elevation from the View menu.
2.
Select the 197” wall with the cooktop.
3.
Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu to enable the program in the place
mode.
4.
Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu.
5.
Enter 96” for in the Cabinet Width dialog, and select OK.
6.
Click on the wall over the cooktop.
7.
Move the upper cabinet image along the wall until the Cabinet end to wall end readout at
the bottom of the screen displays 66” from the left.
8.
Click to anchor the upper cabinet.
9.
Enter 12” for in the Cabinet Width dialog, and select OK.
10.
Click on the wall to the left of the cooktop between the window and the cabinet just placed.
11.
Move the upper cabinet image along the wall until you are slightly overlapping the cabinet
over the cooktop.
12.
Click. The cabinet will bump itself back off the adjoining cabinet automatically.
13.
Enter 12” for in the Cabinet Width dialog, and select OK.
14.
Click on the wall to the right of the cooktop cabinet.
15.
Move the upper cabinet image along the wall until you are slightly overlapping the cabinet
over the cooktop.
16.
Click. The cabinet will bump itself to the right of the hood cabinet automatically.
17.
Select the Cancel button from the Cabinet Width dialog.
4-12
Clipping Upper Cabinets
If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and
select the wall with the cook top.
1.
Open the Cabinet Modify dialog box for the 12” upper cabinet to the left of the hood
cabinet by pointing at the cabinet and double-clicking the left mouse button.
2.
Select the Left Ends tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog.
3.
Select the button next to Clipped for End Profile in the Cabinet Modify dialog.
4.
Enter 0 for the Clipped Ends Depth.
5.
Select the Apply button from the Cabinet Modify dialog.
6.
Select the same highlighted cabinet again to access the Section Modify dialog box.
7.
Select the Details tab from the Section Modify dialog box.
8.
Select Open for Section Type from the drop down pick list.
9.
Select the Close button from the Section Modify dialog box.
4-13
Radius Upper Cabinets
If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and
select the wall with the cook top.
Radius an Upper Cabinets and Modify to Open Shelves
1.
Select the 12” upper cabinet to the right of the hood cabinet by double clicking the left
button.
2.
Select the Right Ends tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog.
3.
Select the button next to Radius for End Profile in the Cabinet Modify dialog.
4.
Enter 12 for the Radius Ends Radius.
5.
Select the Apply button from the Cabinet Modify dialog.
6.
Select the same highlighted cabinet again to access the Section Modify dialog.
7.
Select the Details tab from the Section Modify dialog.
8.
Select Open for Section Type from the drop down pick list.
9.
Select the Close button from the Section Modify dialog.
Modify a Section to a Drawer Bank
If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and
select the wall with the cook top.
1.
Select the Base Cooktop Cabinet.
2.
Select the section on the left side of the cabinet with a second click.
3.
Press the right button to access the menu and select Modify.
4.
Select the Details tab from the Section Modify dialog.
5.
Select Drawer Bank for the Section type from the drop down pick list.
6.
Select the Close button from the Section Modify dialog.
4-14
Modifying Special Cabinet Sections
If you are coming from the previous tutorial screen, then click on the Previous Wall button
to shift to the wall with the door. If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation
command from the View menu and select the wall with the door.
Modifying Cabinet Sections
1.
Click on the special cabinet near the left of the screen to select the cabinet.
2.
Click on the cabinet a second time to select the section.
3.
Press the right button to access the menu and select the Modify command from the Popup menu.
4.
Select the Details tab.
5.
Select Door for the Section Type.
6.
Select Hinge Left for Door Hinging.
Adding Horizontal Sections
1.
Select the Horizontal Section Add icon
added to the cabinet.
4-15
from the top toolbar. Another section will be
Adding Pullouts
1.
Click on the lower section.
2.
Press the right mouse button and select Modify from the Pop up menu.
3.
Select the Details tab.
4.
Click on the down arrow spin bar next to Adjustable Shelves until the number of shelves
is “0”.
5.
Click on the up arrow spin bar next to Roll-Out Shelves 5 times to change the quantity to
5.
Modifying Section Heights
1.
Click on the Sizes tab.
2.
Change the Height from 42” to 58”, and then select the Apply button.
3.
Select the Close button.
Modifying Base Cabinets to Desks
If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and
select the wall with the door.
1.
Select the Cabinet command from the Modify menu.
2.
Click on the base cabinet between the tall cabinet and the door near the left of the screen.
3.
Change the Depth from “24” to “22” and select the Apply button.
4.
Select the OK button from the drawer / pullout side length Warning.
5.
Change the Height from “36” to “30” and select the Apply button.
6.
Click on the cabinet again to toggle to the Section Modify dialog.
7.
Click on the Details tab.
8.
Select Desk from Section Type.
9.
Select the Section command from the Modify menu.
10.
Click on the desk section that was just created.
11.
Click on the Drawers tab.
12.
Change the Drawer Height to 3”.
13.
Choose the Close button.
4-16
Adding Horizontal Sections and Preparing for Mail Slots
If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and
select the wall with the door.
1.
Click on the upper cabinet to the right of the Special (tall) cabinet near the left of your
screen; then click again. The first click selects the cabinet and the second click selects the
section.
2.
Click on the Horizontal Section Add toolbar icon
cabinet section.
3.
Press the right mouse button and select the Modify command from the Pop-up menu.
4.
Select the Details tab from the Section Modify dialog.
5.
Click on the down arrow spin bar next to Adjustable Shelves until the number of shelves is
“1”.
6.
Select the Apply button from the Section Modify dialog.
7.
Click on the lower section of the same cabinet.
8.
Select Open from the Section Type pick list.
9.
Click on the down arrow spin bar next to Adjustable Shelves until the number of shelves is
“0”.
10.
Select the Size tab.
11.
Change the Height from 17.25” to 8”.
12.
Select the Apply button.
13.
Select the Close button.
4-17
to add a horizontal section to the
Entering Valances
If an elevation view is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and
select the wall with the door.
Adding Valances to a Room Design
1.
Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program to fill the
following area with a valance.
2.
Select the Valance command from the Cabinets menu.
3.
Set the Valance Shape: to “Scrolled”, set the Distance From Ceiling to 42”, and the
Height to 6”.
4.
Select the OK button.
5.
Move the pointer over to just under the upper cabinet with the mail slots and click to fill.
6.
Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop-up menu to exit the
Fast-fill mode.
Adding Valances to a Cabinet
1.
While still in the elevation view, click on the Section command in the Modify menu.
2.
Click on the upper section of the wall cabinet located to the right of the special cabinet.
This will activate the Section Modify screen as well.
3.
Click the Details tab and change the Section Type to Open.
4.
Click the Face Frames tab and change the Top Rail Shape to “Scroll”.
5.
Click on the upper section of the wall cabinet to shift to the Cabinet Modify screen.
6.
Click on the Face Frame Sizes tab and change the Top Rail to 6”.
7.
Select the Close button to exit the Cabinet Modify screen.
4-18
Adding Decorations to a Cabinet
If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and
select the wall with the door.
Adding Decorations to the Open Wall Cabinet
1.
Click on the 48-1/4” wall cabinet with the mail slots.
2.
Click the right mouse button, and select Modify on the Pop-up menu.
3.
Click the Face Frame Sizes tab, and then change the left stile width and right stile width to
3”.
4.
Select the Apply button.
5.
Select the Decorations button.
6.
Set the Top Offset to 2”.
7.
Set the Bottom Offset to 2”.
8.
Click the Down Arrow Spin Bar next to the # of Flutes for the left stile until the number of
flutes is “3”. Repeat this step for the right stile.
9.
Click the Down Arrow Spin Bar next to the Rosettes for the left stile to choose a rosette for
the Top. Repeat this step for the right stile.
10.
Click the Down Arrow Spin Bar next to the Plinth Block for the left stile to choose blocks
for both the top and bottom. Repeat this step for the right stile.
11.
Select the OK button.
12.
Select Close in the Cabinet Modify Dialog Box.
4-19
Adding Vertical Dividers as Mail Slots
If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and
select the wall with the door.
1.
Select the Partitions/Dividers from the Modify menu.
2.
Click on the V. Divider button from the top tool bar.
3.
Click on the open section of the upper above the desk once for each of the 5 partitions.
4.
Press the right button and select the Exit Partition Mode command from the Pop Up
menu to exit the partitions/dividers mode.
Selecting Molding, Flooring, and Wallpaper
If a floor plan view is not already on-screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View
menu.
Selecting Molding
1.
Select Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
2.
Select the Molding command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
3.
Select the Upper Room tab.
4.
Select CROWN from the list of moldings.
5.
Select the OK button from the Molding dialog box.
Selecting Flooring
1.
Select Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
2.
Select the Flooring command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
3.
Select Wood 1 from the list of flooring.
4.
Select the OK button from the Flooring dialog box.
Selecting Wallpaper
1.
Select Pick User Graphics command from the View menu.
2.
Select the Wallpaper command from the Pick User Graphics menu.
3.
Select Modern from the list of wallpaper.
4.
Select the OK button from the Wallpaper dialog box.
4-20
Viewing and Modifying Counter Tops
A counter top view can be displayed for adding, deleting, modifying, and printing of counter tops
within the room design. If a floor plan is not already on-screen, select the Floor Plan command
from the View menu.
Viewing Counter Tops
•
Select the Counter Top command from the View menu.
•
Select the Counter Top button from the View toolbar.
Viewing Counter Tops by Layers
When there are counter tops at different heights in a room design, you may view them as
individual layers or you may view all layers at the same time.
Selects the Next Level layer.
Selects the Previous Level layer.
Selects All Levels.
Modifying Counter Tops
If there are counter tops at different levels, you must first go to the appropriate counter top layer
before that counter top can be modified.
1.
Click either the Next Level or Previous Level button on the Main toolbar to show the
peninsula counter top.
2.
Choose the Zoom In
3.
Click and drag to select the area surrounding the peninsula counter top.
4.
Click on the outside corner of the peninsula to select it.
5.
Press the right button to access the Pop-up menu and select Modify.
6.
Change the corner Type from Square to Radius.
7.
Enter 12” for the radius.
8.
Select the OK button.
9.
Repeat the same process for the next two outside corners.
10.
Select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
button from the Main tool bar.
4-21
Seeing Your Designs From Different Viewpoints
There are a number of ways to view your designs.
Floor Plan View
A floor plan is a two-dimensional view looking directly down on a room layout.
•
Select the Floor Plan command from the View menu.
•
Select the Floor Plan button from the View toolbar.
Elevation View
An elevation is a two-dimensional view looking directly at a wall displaying its height and width. It
also provides a more detailed view of the cabinets and other items placed in a design.
Perspective View
A perspective allows you to create a three-dimensional view of a room from any location on the
floor plan view.
4-22
Selecting a Perspective View
1.
Select the Perspective command from the View menu, or the Perspective button from the
View toolbar. The active window automatically switches to a floor plan view with a
displayed camera.
2.
From the floor plan view, move the mouse pointer over the camera handle until the cursor
changes to four-arrows.
3.
Click and hold the mouse button.
4.
Move the camera to the desired location and release the mouse button.
5.
Move the mouse pointer over the camera direction handles until the cursor changes to
four-arrows.
6.
Click and hold the mouse button.
7.
Move the camera direction handle to represent the direction you want the camera to view
the room and release the mouse button.
8.
With the camera location and viewing direction set, click the OK button next to the camera.
9.
A wire frame of the three-dimensional view is now displayed on the screen. This is your
preliminary view. You can now choose the OK button to process the current view into a full
color perspective, or use the following toolbar buttons to reposition the view:
Tip: The best perspective is obtained when viewing a room by looking straight at one of the
walls
4-23
Cabinet View
At times it is necessary to view a single cabinet by itself. Some cabinets require the Cabinet View
in order to be modified. This is a two-dimensional view like the Elevation View.
1.
Select the Cabinet command from the View menu, or the Cabinet button from the View
toolbar.
2.
Select the cabinet to be viewed.
3.
Select the Front, Back, Left, or Right button from the Main toolbar to choose the
appropriate cabinet face to view and modify.
Counter Tops View
As was demonstrated previously, countertops may be viewed and modified from this screen.
4-24
Chapter 5
Appendix
Glossary
Active Window
The window in which you work is the active window. The active window receives the next
command or action.
Applied Finished Ends
An applied finished end is a panel that is placed on a cabinet end after the cabinet is built. In
most cases it will be applied to the finished end of a run of cabinets when the cabinets are
installed at the job site. This allows the end to be scribed to the wall to compensate for any wall
irregularities.
Back Up
To make a duplicate of a file or a group of files, assuring that the original version of the file is
protected should something happen to it.
Bottom Lip Reference
The Bottom Lip Reference is the distance from the bottom of the drawer face to the bottom of the
drawer box.
Butt
A type of joint where the ends or sides of two pieces meet at a square cut.
Break Point
Points where a line or edge has been broken into two or more segments.
Cancel
A command button used to close a dialog box without making changes to the information. The
Esc key also closes a dialog box.
Cascade Windows
A command that diagonally stacks windows so that the title bars show.
Catalog
A electronic form of a manufacturers' paper catalog. Any collection of designed cabinets or
appliances can be saved in the program, to a catalog for future retrieval.
Check Box
A square box in a dialog box that can be toggled on or off. Check boxes usually set several
options.
Click
To quickly press and release the left mouse button.
Combo Box
A term used by Windows compatible software to refer to a dialog box that provides a listing of
available choices. If the entire list is not shown it can be accessed by clicking the down arrow on
the right end of the box. New choices may be entered in a Combo Box. It is a combination of a
Text Box and a List Box.
5-1
Command
A word or phrase usually found in a menu that opens a dialog box, enters a mode, or carries out
an action.
Command Button
A term used by Windows compatible software to refer to a dialog box control that causes an
action to occur. The action depends on the definition of the button. Help, OK, Cancel, Edit, and
New are all examples of command buttons.
Control Menu
A menu that is common to all windows. The Control Menu is used to resize, move, minimize,
maximize, or close a window. The box located in the upper left corner of a window that opens
the Control Menu.
Control Menu Box
The box located in the upper left corner of a window that opens the Control menu.
Control Panel
A Windows program tool containing commands for installing printers, printer ports, fonts, and
other program options. The Control Panel icon is usually located on the Main window of the
Program Manager.
Cope and Stick
A joint made by creating a molded profile on one piece of wood and an opposite profile on a
second piece of wood.
Cross-cut
Cutting wood or a panel product along its width or across the grain.
Cursor
A bar or bracket showing the entry point for placing text.
Dado
A type of joint where a groove is cut into one board or panel to accept the end of another board
or panel. This type of joint is primarily used to install shelves, partitions, backs, etc.
Default
The preset options built into the program. Use the Preference command in the Setup menu to
change many of the programs default settings.
Deselect
To move the pointer away from a selected image and click the left mouse button so that the
surrounding handles disappear.
Dialog Box
A window that appears when the program needs information from you before it can carry out an
action.
Direction Keys
The arrow keys(up, down, right, or left).
Dithering
Dithering is a process of placing different color dots next to each other in a pattern to simulate a
color.
5-2
Disabled
An option or command that appears in gray type and is not available.
Door Mullion
A door mullion is a mullion or stile that is placed between a pair of doors without a partition
separating the cabinet into sections or openings.
Double Click
To rapidly press and release the left mouse button twice without moving the mouse.
Dovetail
A type of joint where one piece has dovetail-shaped pins or tenons that fit into corresponding
holes in the other piece.
Dowel
A small wooden pin used to strengthen a joint.
DPI
DPI stands for Dots Per Inch. The number of dots(pixels) per inch on the display or printing
device.
Drag
To point to a image with the mouse and press and hold the left mouse button, and move the
mouse so that the image moves across the screen.
Filler
A finished material part used to hold cabinets away from walls or to fill openings.
Flush
A reference to two adjacent surfaces that are even or in the same plane.
Frame and Panel Doors and Drawers
A five or more piece door or drawer where a outside frame is typically constructed with a panel
inset in the middle. A square raised panel door is a good example.
Font
A specific set of characters in a specific typeface design.
General Protection Faults
General Protection Faults, Application Errors and system lockups generally indicate memory
problems. These problems can include memory shortages, memory conflicts, and sometimes
corrupted files. Unless an error or lockup becomes predictable, it is often difficult to pinpoint the
exact cause of the problem.
Grid
A series of horizontal and vertical dots that criss-cross the drawing area. You can snap CAD
lines to the grid for exact placement.
Handles
Square boxes that appear on the corners and sides of an image, when clicked on with the mouse
for editing. Handles are used to move or resize an image.
Hatch Patterns
A fill pattern composed of spaced lines occurring at regular intervals.
5-3
Hint Lines
A on-line message that appears at the bottom of the window that provides information about a
feature.
Hourglass Cursor
The pointer changes to an hourglass symbol to indicate that the program is performing an
operation, such as saving a file. When the cursor returns to a pointer, you can continue working.
Icon
A small graphic symbol that represents a command.
Increments
An amount of increase added to cabinets. Stock cabinets are often supplied in 3-inch
increments.
Integral Cabinet
A custom cabinet made up of more then one section or opening in width.
Joint
A junction of two pieces of wood or veneer.
Laminated Finished Ends
A laminated finished end is a cabinet side to which a piece of wood veneer or plastic laminate is
glued.
Landscape
The position of a design on paper. Landscape(Horizontal) orientation displays a page wider than
it is tall.
Lap
A type of joint that is composed of two pieces overlapping each other.
List Box
A dialog box option containing a list of names.
Maximize Box
The Maximize Box is located in the upper right corner of each window. It is used for enlarging
the window to fill the screen. The face around the window can also be used to resize the
window.
Menu
A list of commands organized under a title on the Menu Bar. For example, the Help menu is a
lists of commands for on-line help.
Menu Bar
The bar at the top of a window containing menu titles.
Millwork
All building materials made of finished wood and manufactured in a millwork plants and planing
mills. This includes such items as doors, windows, stairs, moldings, paneling, mantels, interior
trim, etc.
Minimize Box
The Minimize Box is located in the upper right corner of each window. It is used for reduce the
size of the window. The face around the window can also be used to resize the window.
5-4
Miter
A joint created by cutting equal angles on the ends of two pieces of material to form a corner.
Modular Cabinet
A cabinet made up of only one section or opening in width. Modular cabinets are often referred
to as stock cabinets.
Molding
A decorative strip of wood that is often goes around that top of upper wall cabinets, toe kicks,
base boards, etc.
Mortise
A hole that is cut into a piece of wood by a chisel, router, or mortiser. The mortise receives the
tenon of another piece of wood.
Mortise and Tenon
A joint made by cutting a hole or mortise in one piece of wood, and a tenon on a second piece of
wood to fit the mortise.
Mullion
Any vertical face frame part located between outside stiles.
Opening Width
The opening width is the opening distance between stiles and mullions.
Option Button
A term used by Windows compatible software to refer to a dialog box control that works in groups
to allow the user to select one option from a set of options. Only one option may be selected
within each group.
Output Device
Any device that accepts a printed document. For example, a printer, plotter, or Fax/Modem.
Page Orientation
The position of a design on paper. Portrait(vertical) orientation displays a page taller than it is
wide. Landscape(Horizontal) orientation displays a page wider than it is tall.
Paneled Finished Ends
A paneled finished end is like a raised panel door that takes the place of the finished end, and is
built as an integral part of the cabinet box.
Paper Size
The physical size of paper in the printing device.
Parallel
Two straight lines at the same angle that do not intersect.
Parameter Adjustment
All parameters with the word adjustment will subtract from the part size any value that is entered.
A minus sign before a value will always add to the length of a part.
Partition
Any vertical member found on the interior of cabinets between cabinet sides. Partitions are
usually located behind face frame mullions to separate cabinet sections.
5-5
Path
The drive and directory that the computer is told to search for specific files.
Perpendicular
Two straight lines that intersect at 90 degrees.
Perspective
A technique of realistically representing a three-dimensional object on a flat surface.
Pointer
The graphic object located on the screen that is moved with the mouse.
Pop-Up Menu
A menu of specific commands for a selected object that is available by pressing the right mouse
button.
Portrait
The position of a design on paper. Portrait(vertical) orientation displays a page taller than it is
wide.
Polygon
A closed shape or symbol made of straight lines such as a square, triangle, or star.
Press
To press and hold down the mouse button momentarily.
Print Area
The area on your physical paper size that can be printed on by your printing device.
Print Spooler
A Windows accessory that creates a print file before printing begins. This allows you to continue
with a project while the printer is printing.
Rabbet
A type of joint where a groove is cut into the edge of one board or panel to accept the end of
another board or panel.
Rails
Any horizontal face frame parts; or any horizontal part used to make a frame on a frame and
panel door or drawer.
Refresh
To redraw the current window. This lets you clear the screen of unwanted fragments that can
result from manipulating a design.
Return Cabinet
A return cabinet is a standard base, upper, or pantry cabinet that contains a blanked off area on
the face of the cabinet on either side. This cabinet is placed in a corner of a room and used to
accept a cabinet butting into it from the adjacent wall. It is also often referred to as blind cabinet,
blank corner cabinet, square corner cabinet.
Resolution
A measurement of data for monitors(expressed as pixels per square inch) and printers(dots per
square inch).
5-6
RGB
RGB stands for red, green, and blue. Changing the red, green, and blue values allows you to
display different colors from the color spectrum.
Right-Click Feature
A right-click is a single press and release of the right mouse button that causes an Instant
Options Menu to appear.
Rip
Cutting wood or a panel product along its length or the direction of the grain.
Screen Fonts
Fonts specially created to appear correctly on the screen.
Scribe
A part of the cabinet that rests next the wall or ceiling that is shaped to conform to its irregular
shape.
Scroll
To move a visible portion of the drawing area within a window.
Scroll Arrows
The arrows at the right side and bottom of a window that allows you to move the display vertically
and horizontally across the window.
Scroll Bars
The bars at the right side and bottom of a window that allows you to move the display vertically
and horizontally across the window.
Select
To choose an image, command, button, or icon with the left mouse button. A selected cabinet
displays handles.
Shortcut Keys
A key, or key used in conjunction with the Alt, Ctrl, or Shift keys that executes a command
without selecting it from a menu.
Shrink to Fit
Reduces a view to fit the current window size.
Slab Doors and Drawers
A one-piece door that is typical banded with either solid or veneer material.
Soffit
A boxed-down area of the ceiling that is usually found directly above upper wall cabinets.
Spline
A thin strip of wood used to reinforce a joint.
Split-Level Cabinet
A base cabinet that has more than one counter height. A reception desk is a good example of a
split-level cabinet
Stiles
A vertical face frame part located on the ends of cabinets, or a vertical part used to make a frame
on a frame and panel door or drawer.
5-7
Stock Cabinet
A catalog or inventory of available pre-made or standard cabinets.
Sub-Contract Doors and Drawers
Sub-Contract doors and drawers are those that are constructed and supplied by an outside
source, or vendor.
Submenu
A submenu opens when you choose a command from a menu with an arrow opposite it.
Submenus provide additional commands that are related to the desired task you want to
accomplish.
Text Block
A blinking vertical bar or bracket that indicates where to begin entering or editing text.
Tile Window
A command that places windows side by side, or top to bottom so that all windows show on the
screen at one time.
Title Bar
The bar across the top of a window that contains the window, program, or file name.
Toe Kick
A material placed and inset into the front bottom of a cabinet to accommodate your feet when
standing close to the cabinet. It is sometimes referred to as a toe board.
Toggle
Alternately turning a function on or off.
Toolbars
Toolbars contain pictorial buttons that give you quick mouse access to many commands in the
program.
Trim
A finishing material, such as molding applied around cabinets, doors, windows, ceilings, etc.
True Type Font
An outline font that displays correctly and prints on almost all printers.
Type of Material
"Type of Material", as used in this program, refers to the description (i.e., 1/4 solid, 1/2 solid, 3/4
solid, 1/2 veneer, 3/4 veneer, glass, etc.) rather than the species, or kind, of material (i.e., Oak,
Birch, Mahogany, Melamine, etc.)
Window
A rectangular area on the screen that displays the program. A window can contain several
different drawings windows within its work area.
5-8
Program .INI File
The program uses an initialization file on startup that reflects the users PREFERENCES. This file
typically is in the directory where the main program files are located (by default this would be
\CABWARE), and would normally be called CPFRAME.INI. This file is read upon entry into the
program and updated every time you exit the program.
[Startup]
Maximized=Yes
RuntimeVersion=CASE
PLANNER
Runtime Style=EURO
LastRoom=C:\CABWARE\
CPFRAME\ JOBS\JANU.A01
XYLoc=6;6;450;450
Starts the program in a Maximized window.
Specifies Authorized Version of Cabnetware.
Specifies Authorized Style of Cabnetware.
Indicates the last room saved. (ANU job, Room 1).
Suppress Hint=No
Indicates the location of the non-maximized window.
Referenced from the upper left (in pixels).
Shows the Quick Start screen upon entry to the program.
[Password]
Checkboxes=0000000
Password=
Indicates whether a feature is password protected. (1 is on).
User defined password.
[Path Names]
Parameters=C:\CABWARE\
CPFRAME\PARMS
Objects=C:\CABWARE\
CPFRAME\3DOBJECT
Appliances=C:\CABWARE\
CPFRAME\APPL
Cabinets=C:\CABWARE\
CPFRAME
Jobs=C:\CABWARE\CPFRAME\
JOBS
Graphics=C:\CABWARE\
CPFRAME\GRAPHICS
Help=C:\CABWARE\CPFRAME\
HELP
Optimizer
Program=C:\CABWARE\
CWOPTMZR.EXE
C:\CABWARE\CWOPTMZR.INI
CNC Link Program=
C:\CABWARE\CNC.EXE
CNCAPP.INI
Labels=C:\PROGRA~1\AVERY~1
Label Program=C:\PROGRA~1
\AVERY~1\LPWIN32.EXE
Textures=C:\CABWARE\
TEXTURES
Share=C:\CABWARE\SHARE
DXF Style=0
DXF Export=
DXF Filename=
Render Program=
DOS path to parameters.
DOS path to 3D-Objects.
DOS path to Appliances.
DOS path to Catalog location.
DOS path to location of Jobs.
DOS path to location of User Graphics.
DOS path to Help files.
Panel Optimization program. And the .INI file that is read
when the Optimization program starts.
CNC Link program and the .INI file that is read when the
CNC program starts.
Label program location
File that starts the Label program.
DOS path to the Texture files.
DOS path to shared files (profiles etc.)
Style of DXF Export file (0=Visual Reality, 1= AutoCAD)
DOS path where DXF file is exported. (Default is \\\JOBS).
Preferred DXF file name. (Jobname01.DXF is the default).
Program used for rendering the DXF output. (Optional)
5-9
Editor Program=Write.exe
Form Editor Program=Edit.com
Slide Show=
Program used to edit Quotes/Proposals-Cutlists..
Program used to edit the Order Form.
Location of slide show files.
[User Info]
Checkboxes=111111111
Line1=
Line2=
Line3=
Line4=
Line5=
Line6=
Line7=
Line8=
Line9=
Indicates which User Info checkbox is checked. (1 is on).
User response to ‘Company Name’ line.
User response to ‘Address1’ line.
User response to ‘Address2’ line.
User response to ‘Address3 line’.
User response to ‘Phone (Voice)’ line.
User response to ‘Phone (Cellular)’ line.
User response to ‘Phone (Home Phone)’ line.
User response to ‘Phone (Fax)’ line.
User response to ‘Contact’ line.
[Display Options]
Checkboxes=1001001110111101
11
Report=None
Thumbnails=1111000011100101
1Counter Options=11110
Layout Options=1
[General]
Radiobuttons=101010101010
Fraction=3
System Holes=0
Backup Drive=A
Enable Pricing Import Export=1
Enable Set Door Counts=1
Room Backups=1
Num Backup Changes=1
Num Backup Levels=5
Indicates which display check boxes are checked. (1 is on).
Indicates which report display is checked.
Indicates which Thumbnails are on/off.
Indicates which Counter top display options are checked.
Enables the cabinet placement options, Bump Left/Right.
(Late 4.24 Ver 12-8-98)
Indicates which radio button is picked in ‘General’. (1 is on).
Indicates the rounding off fractional setting chosen.
(3=1/16).
32mm system hole option. (Reserved for Euro Ver in
metric).
Indicates the floppy disk drive selected for backups.
Allows import/export of pricing file for spreadsheet use.
Allows Door Counts to be automatically done in pricing
setup.
Turns the Auto backup feature on / off.
Writes out a backup file after this many modifications.
Writes out this many backup files.
[Scales and Dimensions]
Floor/Elevation=0.020830
Cross Section=0.041670
Detail=0.250000
Dim Height=0.093800
Dim Spacing=1.500000
Pointer Style=3
Metric=0
Pertains to Layout Mode. (Screen and Printing).
Indicates the scale of the views when printed.
(1/4”: 1’ =.25 ÷ 12 = 0.02083).
Indicates the scale of a cross section when printed.
Indicates the scale of a detail when printed.
Indicates the size of dimensions when printed.
Separation factor between rows of dimension lines.
Indicates choice of dimension pointer style. (3=Arrow).
Indicates choice of metric or imperial measurements.
5-10
[Multi Draw]
Floor/Elevation=0.020830
Cross Section=0.041670
Detail=0.250000
Dim Height=0.093800
Dim Spacing=1.500000
Pointer Style=3
Metric=0
Page Width=8.500000
Page Height=11.000000
Top Margin=0.500000
Bottom Margin=0.500000
Left Margin=0.500000
Right Margin=0.500000
Landscape=1
Print Border=1
Title Box=.5
Cutlist]
Checkboxes=00000000000
Rows/Cols=Rows
Fractions/Decimals=Fractions
LCD=B,D,E,F
Optimizer=100
Corner Base Backs
Butting=R,0.75
Corner Upper Backs Butting=L,0.75
Swap Special Backs=1
Flip PNA Units=Y
[Estimator]
Wording Flags=111
Pertains to Multi Draw Mode.
Indicates the scale of the views when printed (to scale).
Indicates the scale of a cross section when printed.
Indicates the scale of a detail when printed.
Indicates the size of dimensions when printed.
Separation factor between rows of dimension lines.
Indicates choice of dimension pointer style. (3=Arrow)
Indicates choice of metric or imperial measurements.
Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper width.
Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper height.
Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper top margin.
Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper bottom margin.
Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper left margin.
Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper right margin.
Indicates output print orientation (1=Landscape).
Indicates choice to print a border that frames Multi Draw
page.
Multiplier for default size. (Default =12”)
Pertains to Cutlist versions only.
Indicates what groups to print on cutlist. (1 is on).
Indicates style of door / drawer cutlist printout.
Indicates choice of dimension display.
Creates ASCII file of various cutlist information (B=‘Parts
File’)
Creates .PNA file instead of .PNL (for Cutrite).
Adjustment for corner cabinet backs. (Right back
deducts.75”).
Adjustment for corner cabinet backs. (Left back adds .75”).
Re-orients special cab. Backs 90 degrees. (For CNC).
Swaps units when cutlist is in inches and desired optimizer
input is metric (or vice versa)
Detail Level=High
Proposal Wording=Es.txt
Price By Lines/DoorStyles=Room
Change Order Wording=Esch.txt
Pertains to Estimating reports.
Indicates whether specific wording will print on reports. (1 is
on).
Indicates which information fields print on reports. (1 is on).
Indicates choice of metric or imperial pricing units.
Indicates chosen pricing factors. (1 is on).
Indicates if you want Room Information printed on the Quote
and Proposal.
Indicates Job Costing detail level.
Indicates text file to insert on the Proposal.
Indicates the Order form cabinet listing method (Designer).
Indicates text file to insert on the Change Order.
[Fonts]
Dimension Font=Arial
Report Font=Courier New
Multidraw Dimension Font=Arial
Cad Font=Courier New
Default Cad Font Height=.125
Cutlist Print Font=MS LineDraw
Pertains to Font selections.
Indicates chosen Dimension font.
Indicates chosen Report font.
Indicates chosen Dimension font used in Multi Draw.
Indicates chosen CAD font.
Indicates the default CAD font size.
Indicates the Cutlist Print Font
Printing Flags=1111111111
Metric=0
Price Factors=111
Room Information=1
5-11
Cutlist Print Font Height=7
Cutlist Dimension Height=7
Cutlist Pint Lines Page=80
Normal Print Font=Courier New
Normal Print Font Height=12
Normal Print Lines Page=60
Condensed Print Font=Courier
New
Condensed Print Font Height=8
Condensed Print Lines Page=80
No OEM Charset Available=0
Cutlist Left Margin=0
Cutlist Top Margin=0
Condensed Top Margin=0
Condensed Left Margin=0
Normal Top Margin=0
Normal Left Margin=0
Indicates the Cutlist Print Font Height (point size)
Indicates the dimension height showing on Individual cutlist.
Indicates the number of lines printed on Master / Batched
Cutlist.
Indicates the Font used on the Proposal.
Indicates the font height used on the Proposal. (point size)
Indicate the number of lines per page on the Proposal.
Indicates the font used on the bid / job report
Indicates the font height used on the bid / job report (point
size)
Indicates the number of lines per page used on the bid / job
report.
Concerns Order Form. 0=Uses resident character set of
printer, 1=allows foreign character sets; 2=Draws symbols.
Inches to shift left margin on cutlist.
Inches to shift top margin on cutlist.
Inches to shift top margin on bid/job report.
Inches to shift left margin on bid/job report.
Inches to shift top margin on the proposal.
Inches to shift left margin on the proposal.
[Wall Layout]
Wall Style=0
Wall Thickness=4.500000
Wall Height=96.000000
Wall Radius=100.000000
Wall Arc Angle=90.000000
Wall Window Width=48.000000
Wall Window Bottom=42.000000
Wall Window Size=36.000000
Wall Door Width=36.000000
Wall Door Size=80.000000
Wall Start Snap
Distance=10.00000
Pertains to Wall Layout Mode.
Indicates floor plan wall pattern (Hatch etc.) (0 = Standard).
Specifies default wall thickness.
Specifies default wall height.
Specifies default wall radius when doing radius walls.
Specifies default wall arc when doing radius walls.
Specifies default window width.
Specifies default window placement above the floor.
Specifies default window height.
Specifies default passage door width.
Specifies default passage door height.
Specifies distance at which walls will snap if connecting.
[Tool Boxes]
View
Tools=1,1,0,0,0,alLeft,32,228
Wall
Tools=1,1,32,0,0,alLeft,32,172
Appliance Tools=
0,2,901,175,0,alNone,40,447
Cabinet Tools=
0,2,0,0,0,alBottom,536,32
CAD Tools=
1,2,0,0,0,alBottom,732,32
Closet Tools=0,3,0,0,0,alNone,1,-1
Speed
Bar=1,0,0,0,0,alTop,482,32
Pertains to visibility and placement of toolboxes.
(‘0’ indicates a toolbox is not showing; “1” is visible).
(,‘2’ indicates the number of columns of display).
(,,’100’ indicates ‘X’ placement in pixels from left).
(,,,‘75’ indicates ‘Y’ placement in pixels from top).
alLeft,alRight etc. = aligned left, right etc
[Miscellaneous]
(Speed bar = main tool bar)
Indicates whether the view expands/contracts to fit a
window.
5-12
Fit Views=1
Angle Increment=15.000000
Length Increment=1.000000
Fine Tune Pixels=3
Select Object Border=7
Zoom In Factor=1.200000
Zoom Out Factor=0.800000
Max Snap Distance=24.000000
Counter Snap Pixels=10
Default Fill Mode=Fill Fast
Snap Hold Pixels=10
Height Increment Start=
Cab Dialog=353,228
[CAD Preferences]
Cursor Type=2
Fill Type=1
Angle Increment=15.000000
Length Increment=1.000000
Snap Grid Increment=1.000000
On Snap Grid=0
On Angle Increments=0
On Length Increments=0
Erase Any Line=0
Enable 3D=0
Vertical Mirror=0
Horizontal Mirror=0
Use Custom Color=0
Hatch Spacing=1.000000
Cad Color=0
Fill Pattern=
[Grid Preferences]
FloorplanElevation
Grid=0,1,12.000000
Counter Top Grid=0,1,12.000000
Multidraw Grid=0,1,12.000000
ItemAppliance Grid=0,1,1.000000
Cross Section Grid=0,1,1.000000
Molding Grid=0,1,0.250000
Symbol Grid=0,1,1.000000
Detail Grid=0,1,0.250000
Flooring Grid=0,1,1.000000
Handle Grid=0,1,0.250000
3D Object Grid=0,1,1.000000
Door/End Panel
Grid=0,1,1.000000
Window Door Grid=0,1,12.000000
[Print Options]
Constrains the wall layout to specific angles.
Incremental size used when laying out non-fine tuned walls.
Adjusts the mouse travel when using the center button.
Outline size around a selected item.
Multiplier for the Zoom up when a click is used.
Multiplier for the Zoom out when a click is used.
Distance used when referencing the cursor with respect to a
wall on the floor plan view.
Distance used when highlighting a counter top point or line.
Preferred cabinet placement mode.
Allows snap to ‘hold’ a distance before losing focus.
Upper cabinet increment starting value.
Placement of Catalog Cab. Selection dialog after
positioning.
Pertains to User CAD Preferences.
Indicates selected CAD cursor style. (2 = X shape).
Indicates selected CAD fill style. (1 = solid fill).
Indicates the angle CAD lines will adhere to.
Indicate the length increment CAD lines adhere to.
Indicates the grid CAD lines adhere to.
Indicates if Snap Grid is selected or not.
Indicates if CAD lines will be on selected angles or not.
Indicates if length increments are used when CAD lines are
drawn.
Enables the erase of any line or only CAD lines.
Enables CAD features for 3-D views.
Enables Vertical Mirror when drawing.
Enables Horizontal Mirror when drawing.
Allows the use of a custom color when drawing.
Sets the spacing on a selected hatch fill.
Indicates the custom color selected in CAD.
Indicates the Bitmap fill pattern selected in CAD.
Pertains to Grid sizing and styling in various views.
(“0” turns off the display of the grid).
(“1” indicates the style of grid. 1= dashed).
(“12.00” indicates the grid spacing)
(Grids are available in most areas of the program where the
user needs to reference CAD lines and other features).
Mechanical Symbols CAD grid. (Designer and CabnetWorks
only).
Details CAD grid. (CabnetWorks only).
Flooring CAD grid.
Handle CAD grid.
3-D Object CAD grid.
Door/End Panel CAD grid.
Window/Passage Door CAD grid.
Pertains to printer selections.
5-13
Color Fill=N
Print Window=Y
Print Bitmap=Y
To Scale=N
Print DPI=150
Use MemoryDC=2
[Options]
Ambient Light=0.50
Cosine Delta=0.06
Gamma=2.50
Special Fill Mode=Y
Indicates if views print in color.
Indicates if you are printing the ‘window’. (Usually a zoomed
up view).
Indicates if you a doing a ‘Quick Print’.
Indicates if you are printing to scale.
Last selected print quality.
Print Resolution multiplier. 2=default. More is less.
Overall amount of ambient lighting. (0.50=default).
Rate of change in the ambient light over angular change.
(0.06=default).
A numerical representation of contrast. Lets you enhance
midtones and shadow detail without washing out highlights.
(2.50=default).
Allows fast filling of modular cabinets with increasing sizes
based on the current modular increment setting in the
Layout parameters. Helpful when creating Catalogs.
[Tip]
TimeStamp=Thu Jul 03 1997
FilePos=1635
Pertains to User tips on the start up screen
Date of user tip text file.
Last position in the user tip text file.
[Dash Lines]
Screen Length=7
Screen Gap=2
Print Length=7
Print Gap=3
Plot Length=7
Plot Gap=3
Pertains to display and printing of dashed lines.
Length of dashed line segments (in pixels) on screen.
Gap between dashed line segments on screen.
Printed length of dashed line.
Gap between printed line segments.
Length of plotted dashed line segment.
Gap between plotted dashed line segments.
5-14
Proposal Form
The "Proposal Form" is a file that is user created and used by the program for the printing of a
proposal. A sample "Proposal Form" file is supplied with the program. The name of this file is called
BID.FRM. This file can be found the PARMS directory of your hard drive.
The sample BID.FRM file can be used as a template for creating your own proposal form format. It
can be modified easily with an ordinary text-editing program. By making changes to this file you can
create a proposal in the format used by your company.
There are four elements that make up the proposal form file:
1) DATA FIELDS - Data fields are references to items found in the current data of the program,
parameters, or job designs.
2) FORMATTING COMMANDS - Formatting commands position information and data on the
proposal form. Formatting commands also set justifications and send control codes to the printer for
printer functions, and the changing of printing style.
3) PLAIN TEXT - Plain text is sent directly to the printer.
4) COMMANDS - Commands are simple program control statements that modify what is done by the
proposal form.
DATA FIELDS
Data fields allow the user to take certain information within the program and print it to a specified
location of the proposal form. Data fields make up much the information found in the proposal form.
Usually this type of information changes from one job to the next. Refer to the data fields list for a
listing of data fields available in the program.
Notice on the list that many data files contain multiple field records. To identify a specific field in a
multi-field record, the name of the field must be followed by a period, and then the field number. An
example would be the ITEM(Cabinet) fields. Here we have four different fields that can appear on
your proposal form for four different types of cabinet information. If we want to display the cabinet
description on the proposal, the field name would be entered as "ITEM.1". Other examples would be:
ITEM.3 (This data field will display the cabinet price)
ITEM.4 (This data field will display any extended prices)
Each data field in the proposal form takes its information from a file called PROPOSAL.$$$. This file
is created each time an proposal form is selected and run.
All data fields in the PROPOSAL.$$$ file are in a format called, "comma delimited". This means that
a comma separates each field of information. Some fields also contain quotation marks. These fields
have the possibility of containing embedded commas placed by the user.
WEST PORT, VA 13736
This address contains a comma within the name. If quotation marks were not placed around the
name, the proposal form program would simply break the address into two different records.
The same holds true with quotation marks embedded within a field name. If there are quotation
marks within a field name, the record will end if a comma follows the quotation marks.
5-15
NOTE: If a record does not exist and the field is blank, nothing will be printed in the identified data
field.
FORMATTING COMMANDS
All formatting commands and data fields are enclosed with backslashes "\". Items found within the
backslashes are identified as text if they are not a known data field. Each formatting command
should be followed by a corresponding record created and read, or by text entered to the Proposal
form.
The formatting commands are:
TAB - The tab command will send the DATA FIELD or TEXT output to the column specified. The
following is an example for a tab command.
\40\
This tab command causes the information listed behind it to tab over forty column and begin printing.
Notice the following command on the sample proposal form.
\47,"CUSTOMER:"\
This command tells the text "CUSTOMER:" to begin printing forty-seven columns over on the right
side of the proposal form printout.
If you are tabbing over a data field, a comma must be entered after the tab location. This is shown in
the following example.
\13,COMP.2\
This command will tab the company address over to the thirteenth column to begin printing.
JUSTIFY - All the preceding examples of tabs will cause the data field or text to be left justified. In
other words, the first character will be entered at the tab and print to the right on the printer.
If a hyphen is entered after the tab, as shown in the following example, the data field or text will be
entered as right justified. This would be necessary to have dollar amounts line up to the right side of
the tab.
\70-,CAB.6\
This command causes the cabinet price to be entered to the left of the seventieth column.
INSERTED TEXT: Any text entered within the backslashes of a formatting command, and with a data
field, must be enclosed with quotation marks. Look at the following example.
\45,TOTAL.1, "Cabinets"\
This command tells the program to enter the total number of cabinets at column forty-five and print
the word "Cabinets", one space after the printed total.
5-16
CONTROL CODES - Control codes are pieces of information sent to the printer to control different
printer functions. It is assumed that these codes will not move the print head, but are recognized as
"CONTROL CODES". These printer control codes can be found in your manual supplied with your
printer. We are using the "decimal" codes listed for each control code. If more than one "decimal"
code is listed for one printer control function, than a comma must be placed between each "decimal"
code.
It is necessary that an asterisk be place after the first backslash of your formatting command. This
tells the proposal form program that this is a printer control code and not text.
This example would cause one model of printer to print in italic mode.
\*27,52\
Everything printed after this printer control code would be printed in italics print. After printing all
information necessary in italics, we would need to place the printer back into the regular print mode.
This would be done with another control code. With our example printer, the following command
would be necessary.
\*27,120,0\
COMMANDS
The following commands must be the first thing on a line, although spaces may be added for clarity.
All commands must be preceded by a period. They following are a list of commands:
.IF_REC.
This tests whether the last read record is of a certain type. Any portion of the
template between this command, and the following ELSE or ENDIF will be skipped over if the test
fails.
.IF REC.CAB
This would be true if the last record was of type CAB.
.IF REC.ACC
This would be true if the last record was of type ACC.
.IF_RECN.
This tests whether the last read record was not of a certain type. The reverse of the
above command.
.IF_BOTTOM.
number.
This tests whether the current line number is greater than or equal to a particular
.IF_BOTTOM.8 This would be true for line 8 from the bottom of a page and all following lines until a
FORM FEED.
.ELSE.
This is for the alternative to the proceeding IF
.ENDIF.
This terminates the preceding IF or ELSE.
.LOOP.
The portion of the template between this point and the following ENDLOOP will be
repeatedly performed until a BREAK command is executed.
.ENDLOOP.
This terminates a LOOP.
.BREAK.
This breaks out of a LOOP.
.READ.
This reads another record from the data file. The type of record can be tested with IF
REC or IF RECN. If no more records are available the record type is set to EMPTY.
5-17
.NEXT_CAB.
Reads records from the data file until a CAB record is read.
.NEXT_ACC.
Reads records from the data file until a ACC record is read.
.FORM_FEED. A page feed is sent to the printer and the current line number is set to 1.
NOTE: It is important to remember to not leave a space between the period and the command name.
Any line that begins with a period and is followed by a space will be ignored by the program as a
command line.
DATA FIELDS
ITEM.1
ITEM.2
ITEM.3
ITEM.4
Cabinet or accessory description
Quantity of item
Unit price of item
Extended price for item
DASHES
Prints twelve sets of dashes.
DATE
Current computer date
PAGE
Page number
COMP.1
COMP.2
COMP.3
COMP.4
COMP.5
COMP.6
COMP.7
COMP.8
COMP.9
Company name from preferences
Company address line 1
Company address line 2
Company address line 3
Company phone (Voice)
Company phone (Fax)
Company phone (Cellular)
Company home (Home)
Company contact
CUST.1
CUST.2
CUST.3
CUST.4
CUST.5
CUST.6
Customer's name from job information
Customer's address line 1
Customer's address line 2
Customer's phone (Voice)
Customer's phone (Fax)
Customer’s contact
CONT.1
CONT.2
CONT.3
CONT.4
CONT.5
CONT.6
Contractor's name from job information
Contractor's address line 1
Contractor's address line 2
Contractor's phone (Voice)
Contractor's phone (Fax)
Contractor's contact
ARCH.1
ARCH.2
ARCH.3
ARCH.4
ARCH.5
ARCH.6
Architect or Designer’s name from job information
Architect or Designer’s address line 1
Architect or Designer’s address line 2
Architect or Designer’s phone (Voice)
Architect or Designer’s phone (Fax)
Architect or Designer’s contact
5-18
SHIP.1
SHIP.2
SHIP3
SHIP2.1
SHIP2.2
Address line 1
Address line 2
Address line 3
Directions line 1
Directions line 2
DOOR
DOOR2
EXTERIOR
INTERIOR
Base door style
Upper door style
Exterior material
Interior material
INFO.1
INFO.2
INFO.3
INFO.4
INFO.5
INFO.6
INFO.7
INFO.8
Top color
Exterior color
Interior color
Edge band
Door color
Door edge
Drawer color
Drawer edge
START.1
Text same as ROOM.1
HEAD.1
Top of proposal form
TAIL.1
Bottom of proposal form
ROOM.1
ROOM.2
ROOM.3
Room name
Quantity of rooms (number of identical rooms)
Total price for room
ACCT.1
Account type
SALES.1
Sales person
JOBNUM.1
Job number
ORDER.1
Order number
PONUM.1
Purchase order number
DELIV.1
Delivery date
TERMS.1
Terms
UNTIL.1
Proposal good until
SUBTOTAL.1
Total before discounts, markups and taxes
MARKUP.1
Price markup or discount #1
MARKUP.2
Price markup or discount #2
(Markup continue)
5-19
TAX1.1
TAX2.1
TAX3.1
TAX1.2
TAX2.2
TAX3.2
Tax 1 description
Tax 2 description
Tax 3 description
Tax 1 price
Tax 2 price
Tax 3 price
TOTAL.1
Total after discount, markups and taxes
5-20
Common Questions
Why am I losing faces on my perspectives?
In almost all cases this is caused by cabinets, counter tops, or any other item in your room design
overlapping or crossing each other.
Overlapping and crossing items in a room design can produce unexpected results. When an item
or object crosses another item, the computer needs to determine which face is in front of the
other and often makes mistakes.
This is true of all 3-D programs.
Why do I get General Protection Fault errors?
General Protection Faults, Application Errors and system lockups generally indicate memory
problems. These problems can include memory shortages, memory conflicts, and sometimes
corrupted files. Unless an error or lockup becomes predictable, it is often difficult to pinpoint the
exact cause of the problem. The following lists a number of steps that should be followed when
dealing with random and predictable system problems. If the problem can be re-created, then
follow the steps one at a time in order to determine which step cures the problem.
After any GPF, application error or lockup
• Save files that are currently open, if possible.
•
Exit from all applications including Windows.
•
Ensure that the system meets the program’s minimum requirements.
•
Reboot the system
•
Run Scandisk.
•
Check for virus using a Virus Checking Program.
•
Disable or uninstall alternative window shells (i.e., Norton Desktop, DashBoard, Central
Points PCTools for Windows.)
•
Turn off all TSR's (i.e., screen savers, disk cache, displayers, mouse watchers, etc.)
•
Change video to the standard Windows VGA driver (256 colors 640x480 resolution). Other
graphic cards using comparable VGA resolutions may be accessing different memory
addresses and may be causing a memory problem (Video or GPF related).
•
Reinstall the program.
•
If none of these steps resolve the problem, please contact Technical Support for further
assistance.
5-21
Why is my mouse not working under Windows?
If your mouse is not working under Windows or in our program, it could be because of one of the
following reasons:
•
If you are using a serial mouse, make sure that you are using either COM1 or COM2. You
cannot COM3 or COM4 with a mouse in Windows. Check to see which COM port your
mouse is plugged into. Also make sure Windows is set up using the Ports option in the
Control Panel.
•
Check the hardware interrupt (IRQ) that the mouse port is using and determine whether there
is another device set to use the same IRQ. If there is an IRQ conflict with the COM or BUS
port the mouse is connected to, the mouse will not work.
The mouse pointer won’t move.
If the mouse pointer won’t move it could be for one of the following reasons:
•
If the mouse pointer appears on the screen but doesn’t move, choose the Windows Setup
icon in the Main group to display a list of Windows settings. Make sure that the mouse you
are using is listed. If you have the wrong mouse selected, choose the correct mouse from
the list.
•
If you have the correct mouse selected and the mouse pointer still doesn’t move, see
whether there is a IRQ conflict between your mouse port and another device.
The mouse pointer is jumping around the screen.
If the mouse pointer is jumping around the screen and not moving smoothly, you might have one
of the following problems:
•
Your mouse needs the be cleaned so that the ball or wheel moves freely.
•
You have a hardware interrupt conflict. You need to set up the mouse so that it isn’t using
the same IRQ settings being used by another device.
5-22
Why is my printer not printing?
When a printer is not printing, the problem is often mechanical. For example, the printer could be
off-line, turned off, or disconnected. The following are some other things to check:
•
Is the printer turned on?
•
Is the printer on-line?
•
Do you have paper in the printer?
•
Does your printer need a new ribbon or ink cartridge?
•
If you are using a switch box, do you have the switch in the proper position?
•
Do you have the correct cables for your printer and are they connected properly? For
example, if you are using a Hewlett Packard plotter, you need a special Hewlett Packard
plotter cable. If you think there is a cable problem try another cable.
•
Do you have the right printer selected in your application for the printer you are using?
•
Have you selected the right printer port in your application that matches the port your printer
is using? Check also your Control Panel in Windows to see if the printer and port are
configured properly.
Why is the printer only printing part of a page?
If the printer is only printing part of a page, check the following:
•
The most common cause of this is insufficient memory in the printer. We would recommend
that you put more memory in your printer. If you are printing graphics, try lowering the print
resolution.
•
Make sure you are choosing the proper paper size for the paper you have loaded in your
printer.
•
Make sure you have selected the correct memory settings in the printer dialog. If you have
selected more memory then the printer has, you will only get a partial page.
Why is the printer printing garbage?
If the printer is printing unreadable text or strange characters for graphics, check the following:
•
Make sure the correct printer driver is installed and selected for your printer.
•
Make sure the cables are connected properly. It sometimes helps to pull the cable off and reseat the cable. You may also have a faulty printer cable.
•
The printer’s buffer may contain garbled information. Try turning of the printer, waiting a few
minutes and turn it back on again.
•
If you are using a Serial printer, make sure you have the right baud rate selected for your
printer port. Choose the Ports icon on the Control Panel and lower the setting.
5-23
Why do I get Out of Memory messages?
If you receive a Out of Memory message while trying to start the program, check the following:
•
Try to free some memory before starting Windows. This can be done by modifying the
AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files and removing any memory-resident software that
isn’t needed.
•
Close some applications that are not being used.
•
Make sure there is enough memory on the hard drive if you are using a swap file in Windows.
If possible setup a permanent swap file.
•
Modify the PIF files for your open applications.
•
If wallpaper is being used in Windows change the wallpaper setting to None.
•
Are you running the minimum memory requirements for the program? If not, you may need
to add more memory to the computer.
Why does my monitor flicker when I run Windows?
If you are using a high-resolution video mode (such as 1024 x 768), the screen may appear to
flicker because of the rate at which the monitor scans, refreshes, or updates the screen. Using a
video driver at a lower-resolution will remove the flickering from the screen.
Why do my colors look strange?
Monitors and printers use a process called dithering to compensate for its inability to display
some colors. This process lets you display some colors on a screen or printer that are not
actually available.
If a color is supported by your graphics adapter or monitor it is displayed as a solid color. If the
color is not available, the color is changed to the closest color or dithered color that is available.
Dithering becomes pronounced when you are running Windows in 256 colors or less.
If you are working with color in the program, it is recommended that you use more then 256
colors, if supported by your graphics card or monitor. Setting your display to a greater number of
colors lets you avoid dithered colors.
5-24
Troubleshooting Techniques
While working in Cabnetware, you may encounter problems printing, saving files, opening files,
etc. Though each individual problem may have a different cause, there are some general steps
you can follow in attempting to troubleshoot your problem. In many cases it will save you a call to
Technical Support!
Can you duplicate the problem?
Try performing the same function again. This is the first step in troubleshooting. Occasionally, a
temporary memory problem will interrupt a function, and simply trying again will allow you to
complete that task.
Problems that can't be reproduced are difficult to explain. Continue working, but note details of
the circumstances if the problem does occur again. That will enable Technical Support to assist
you more effectively if you decide to call.
If you can duplicate the problem, it may be file, program or system specific. Proceed to the next
step.
Is the problem system specific?
This step is sometimes appropriate at the beginning of a troubleshooting session and is
sometimes left to the end. Before spending a lot of time analyzing the causes of a problem, it is
often a good idea to determine if the problems occur only on one system. This is easy to do, if
you have access to another computer and can try your function or file here. Or, if the problems
are printing related, try using a different printer. If the problems persist on more than one system,
zero in on file specific issues. If not, concentrate on the system settings, installation and finally
hardware issues.
If you do not have access to another system running Cabnetware, proceed to the next step.
Is the problem file specific?
If you can reproduce the problem, the culprit may be the file itself, the Cabnetware program or
something about this particular system. This step attempts to determine if the problem is unique
to this file or if it may be caused by a program or system issue.
If you are having problems saving, printing or exporting, etc., try opening another file of the same
type and perform the same function. If subsequent file works properly, you are most likely
dealing with a file that contains a corrupted item or may too complex for the particular room you
are trying to design. If so, see the notes below on Dealing With Complexity Issues or Dealing
With Corrupted Objects or Files.
The goal, again, is to determine whether problems are contained in the file or
are caused by something else.
5-25
Is the problem software specific?
If a problem is reproducible but not limited to just one file, then problems are being caused by the
program, other software on the system, drivers, Windows, or by hardware. If it is possible to try
the same files and functions on another system, you can determine whether the root of the
problem is based on one system as opposed to being software generated. If this test is not
possible, try to collect as much information as possible about whether the problem occurs only in
the application. You can do this by trying to perform similar functions, i.e. printing, designing, into
other Windows applications. If problems appear in other applications, then the cause is at a
more basic level than the program. Sometimes video or printer drivers can cause problems.
Sometimes there are even problems with a particular Windows setup.
Memory Problems
The common troubleshooting steps associated with handling memory errors are:
1. Save the file immediately.
2. Exit the application and Windows.
3. Reboot the system.
4. Make sure you have 1 Gigabyte of free disk space to accommodate future .TMP file creation.
Temporary Files
Windows and many Windows applications, including Cabnetware, create temporary files.
Sometimes these temporary files can become damaged or they are not deleted when they should
be. This often occurs if you reboot or turn off your computer without properly exiting Windows.
You should routinely delete Windows and Cabnetware temporary files to ensure that the files do
not become a problem.
1.
Select the Programs command from the Start button.
2.
Select the Windows Explorer command from the Programs menu.
3.
Double-click the Windows folder to open it.
4.
Double-click the Temp folder within the Windows folder to open it.
5.
Delete all files in the Temp folder.
Disabling TSRs and other Memory-Resident Programs
If you suspect problems with TSRs or memory-resident program, such as screen savers and
virus checkers, you may want to consider optimizing your Windows setup by removing them.
Also remove all TSRs from you AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files.
If following the above steps does not allow you to resolve the problem you are encountering, you
may wish to contact Technical Support.
5-26
Improving System Performance
Here are a number of considerations for improving the performance of Cabnetware:
•
Upgrading to a faster microprocessor will enhance the performance of Cabnetware. A
Pentium 4 processor is faster than a Pentium III processor.
•
The microprocessor’s clock speed is important; i.e., a Pentium –1.5 G will run Cabnetware
more quickly than a Pentium -750.
•
Increase your system’s memory.
•
Ensure that you have at least 1 Gigabyte of free disk space on the drive where Window
*.TMP files will be created.
•
Replace your hard drive with a new hard drive that has a faster access speed. A 7200 RPM
drive is faster than a 5400 RPM drive.
•
Ensure that you have 4 gigabytes of free disk space on the drive where you store your
program files.
•
Defragment ("clean up") your hard disk by running a disk defragmentation program.
•
Set up Windows for 32-bit file and hard drive access.
•
Increase your video card’s memory. You may want to consider an OpenGL accelerated
video card. We unfortunately cannot make recommendations on any hardware.
5-27
Support Services
Technical Support
Planit Solutions recognizes that support needs vary from user to user, and we offer you a wide
range of choices when you need answers to your technical questions and problems in using your
software. If you have a question about your program’s features and functions, first look in the
manual or consult your On-Line help. If you are still having difficulty finding the answer you are
looking for, you can speak to a Technical Support Representative by dialing the following
number:
Voice (866) 675-6551
8:00am to 4:30pm Pacific Time
Monday - Friday (not including Holidays)
Before You Call
Before calling Technical Support, please have the following information documented and
available in front of you. It will assist the Technical Support Representative in helping you with
your problem more quickly and efficiently:
•
A brief description of the problem including the exact text of any error messages received,
and the steps used to recreate it.
•
Type of computer, monitor and video card (display adapter) you are using.
•
Type of pointing device in use (i.e., mouse, tablet).
•
Type of printer that you are using to print files.
•
The version of Cabinetware on your computer.
•
The DOS version on your computer.
•
The Microsoft Windows version on your computer.
•
A list of any changes you made to your computer, Windows setup, or Cabnetware setup prior
to this problem.
•
A list of any programs loaded into RAM (i.e., TSR's).
•
The contents of the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files.
You must be a registered user to access Planit Solutions’ Support Services.
Fax Support
Technical Support also maintains a fax system for you to send questions or comments. If you
have a fax machine, you have access to this service 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Fax (530) 666-4474
Email Support
Technical Support has an email address for you to send questions or comments. If you have
email, you have access to this service 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
[email protected]
5-28
Website Support
Technical Support has a webpage containing common support questions. If you are on the
Internet, you have access to this service 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
www.planitsolutions.com
Local Dealer Support
Planit Solutions has a network of Authorized Dealers. Each dealer is a trained professional with
your Planit Solutions product. Your local dealer will be glad to help you with any additional
training required.
Customer Service Support
Customer Service Representatives can answer questions about products, pricing, and updates.
They can also issue replacement disks and manuals.
If you are leasing your program from Planit Solutions, Customer Service will take care of all
leasing payments and the updating of your lease key.
Voice (800) 280-6932
8:00am to 4:30pm Central Time
Monday - Friday (not including Holidays)
Wish List
You can write, call, or fax Plant at anytime with a list of features or improvements that you would
like to see added to the program. Your comments and recommendations have made Planit the
#1 software in the industry today.
Attention: Customer Support
1240B Commerce Ave.
Woodland, CA 95776
Voice (866) 675-6551
8:00am to 5:00pm Pacific Time
Monday - Friday (not including Holidays)
Fax (530) 666-4474
24 Hours a Day
Please note that we receive a large number of suggestions and comments regarding Planit
products and are unable to respond directly to each one. However, be assured that your
recommendations, ideas, and remarks are recorded and help shape future versions of the
program.
5-29
Worksheet for a Typical Drawer Bank
Frame Cabinets
Top thickness ......................:_____
Top rail.................................:_____
Drawer No. 1 opening..........:_____
Drawer rail No. 1..................:_____
Drawer No. 2 opening..........:_____
Drawer rail No. 2..................:_____
Drawer No. 3 opening..........:_____
Drawer rail No. 3..................:_____
Drawer No. 4 opening..........:_____
Drawer rail No. 4..................:_____
Drawer No. 5 opening..........:_____
Drawer rail No. 5..................:_____
Drawer No. 6 opening..........:_____
Drawer rail No. 6..................:_____
Drawer No. 7 opening..........:_____
Drawer rail No. 7..................:_____
Last Drawer opening ...........:_____
Last Drawer rail ...................:_____
Toe kick ...............................:_____
Total of the above ................:_____
Overall Height of Cabinet ....:_____
Note: For a typical drawer bank to work, the "Total of the above" and "Overall Height of Cabinet"
must be equal.
5-30
Panel Material Worksheet
PANEL
MATERIAL
TYPE NUMBER
ASH
EXTERIOR
FILE
MELAMINE
EXTERIOR
FILE
OAK
EXTERIOR
FILE
WALNUT
EXTERIOR
FILE
Sample 1
4/4 solid Ash
4/4 2s Melamine
4/4 solid Oak
4/4 solid Walnut
Sample 2
3/4 solid Ash
3/4 2s Melamine
3/4 solid Oak
3/4 solid Walnut
Sample 3
1/4" Glass
1/4" Glass
1/4" Glass
1/4" Glass
Sample 4
3/4 Ash veneer
3/4 2s Melamine
3/4 Oak veneer
3/4 Walnut veneer
Sample 5
1/4" Plexi-Glass
1/4" Plexi-Glass
1/4" Plexi-Glass
1/4" Plexi-Glass
PANEL
MATERIAL
TYPE NUMBER
EXTERIOR
FILE
EXTERIOR
FILE
EXTERIOR
FILE
EXTERIOR
FILE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5-31
Material Worksheets
Material Description ________________________________________________________________________________
Material Thickness _________________________________________________________________________________
Cost_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Length______________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Width_______________________________________________________________________________________
Grain (0) No Grain (1) ______________________________________________________________________________
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Material Description ________________________________________________________________________________
Material Thickness _________________________________________________________________________________
Cost_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Length______________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Width_______________________________________________________________________________________
Grain (0) No Grain (1) ______________________________________________________________________________
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Material Description ________________________________________________________________________________
Material Thickness _________________________________________________________________________________
Cost_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Length______________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Width_______________________________________________________________________________________
Grain (0) No Grain (1) ______________________________________________________________________________
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Material Description ________________________________________________________________________________
Material Thickness _________________________________________________________________________________
Cost_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Length______________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Width_______________________________________________________________________________________
Grain (0) No Grain (1) ______________________________________________________________________________
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Material Description ________________________________________________________________________________
Material Thickness _________________________________________________________________________________
Cost_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Length______________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Width_______________________________________________________________________________________
Grain (0) No Grain (1) ______________________________________________________________________________
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Material Description ________________________________________________________________________________
Material Thickness _________________________________________________________________________________
Cost_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Length______________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Width_______________________________________________________________________________________
Grain (0) No Grain (1) ______________________________________________________________________________
YOU MUST COMPLETELY FILL OUT THE INFORMATION IN THE FORMS ABOVE FOR EACH MATERIAL TYPE YOU
USE IN BUILDING CABINETS.
5-32
Preference and Parameter Worksheets
Preferences
GENERAL PREFERENCES
Dimensions: (0) Fractions (1) Decimals ________________________________________________________________
Round to Nearest __________________________________________________________________________________
Parameters: (0) Inches (1) Millimeters _________________________________________________________________
Appliances: (0) Inches (1) Millimeters__________________________________________________________________
Room Design: (0) Inches (1) Millimeters________________________________________________________________
Cutlist: (0) Inches (1) Millimeters _____________________________________________________________________
Material Prices: Sq. Feet or Sq. Meters _________________________________________________________________
Undo Changes ____________________________________________________________________________________
Undo Levels ______________________________________________________________________________________
PATH PREFERENCES
Parameters Path ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Catalog Path _____________________________________________________________________________
Jobs Path ________________________________________________________________________________________
User Graphics Path_________________________________________________________________________________
USER INFORMATION PREFERENCES
Contact __________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name ___________________________________________________________________________________
Address__________________________________________________________________________________________
Phone(Voice) _____________________________________________________________________________________
Phone(FAX) ______________________________________________________________________________________
Phone(Cellular) ____________________________________________________________________________________
Phone(Home) _____________________________________________________________________________________
SCALES AND DIMENSIONS PREFERENCES
Cabinet __________________________________________________________________________________________
Dimension Font____________________________________________________________________________________
Dimension Height __________________________________________________________________________________
Dimension Spacing _________________________________________________________________________________
Metric: No Yes ___________________________________________________________________________________
5-33
DISPLAY PREFERENCES
Display All Cabinet Dimensions: No Yes _______________________________________________________________
Display Section Width Dimensions: No Yes _____________________________________________________________
Display Section Height Dimensions: No Yes ____________________________________________________________
Display Appliance Center Line Dimensions: No Yes ______________________________________________________
Display Filler Dimensions: No Yes ____________________________________________________________________
Display Stile Dimensions: No Yes_____________________________________________________________________
Display Door & Window Casing Dimensions: No Yes _____________________________________________________
Display Floorplan Cabinet Width: No Yes_______________________________________________________________
Display Work Triangle Dimensions No Yes _____________________________________________________________
Display Counter Tops: No Yes _______________________________________________________________________
Display CAD Text: No Yes __________________________________________________________________________
Display CAD Line Weight ____________________________________________________________________________
Display Cabinet Information: No Yes __________________________________________________________________
Display Shelves: No Yes____________________________________________________________________________
Display Color Fill on Elevations: No Yes________________________________________________________________
Display Wood Grain: No Yes ________________________________________________________________________
Display Door Designs: No Yes _______________________________________________________________________
Display Door Overlaps: No Yes ______________________________________________________________________
Display Door Hinge (Floor Plan): No Yes _______________________________________________________________
No Report: No Yes ________________________________________________________________________________
Installation Reports: No Yes _________________________________________________________________________
Cabinet Reports: No Yes ___________________________________________________________________________
NOTES:
5-34
Counter Top Parameters
Top Description: ___________________________________________________________________________________
Top Thickness: ____________________________________________________________________________________
Back Splash Height: ________________________________________________________________________________
Front Edge Thickness: ______________________________________________________________________________
Top Slat Thickness _________________________________________________________________________________
Counter Overhang at Front of Cabinet:__________________________________________________________________
Counter Overhang at Finished End: ____________________________________________________________________
Radius on Finished End:_____________________________________________________________________________
Bar Overhang on Back Face of Peninsula/Island: _________________________________________________________
Radius on Peninsula/Island Overhang:__________________________________________________________________
NOTES:
5-35
Frame Layout Parameters
(0) Integral (1) Custom Modular (2) C catalog Modular ____________________________________________________
Modular Increments ________________________________________________________________________________
Modular End Adjustment: (0) Filler (1) Cabinet___________________________________________________________
Wall Height _______________________________________________________________________________________
Distance Door Opening to Cabinet _____________________________________________________________________
Distance Wall End to Cabinet _________________________________________________________________________
Distance Window Opening to Cabinet __________________________________________________________________
Distance Base Return Pulled from Wall _________________________________________________________________
Minimum Distance Base Return Pulled from Wall _________________________________________________________
Distance Upper Return Pulled from Wall ________________________________________________________________
Minimum Distance Upper Return Pulled from Wall_________________________________________________________
Soffit Overhang ____________________________________________________________________________________
Soffit Height over Upper _____________________________________________________________________________
Distance Upper Pulled from Ceiling/Soffit________________________________________________________________
Soffit Height over Pantries and Special Cabinets __________________________________________________________
Distance Pantries and Special Cabinets Pulled from Ceiling/Soffit ____________________________________________
NOTES:
5-36
Frame Cabinet Parameters
Partition: (0) No (1) Center (2) Flush Left (3) Flush Right__________________________________________________
UPPERS
Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section Type: (0) Open (1) Door(s) ___________________________________________________________________
Doors: (0) Pair (1) Pair/mullion (2) Hinge Left (3) Hinge Right ______________________________________________
Optimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________
Maximum Section/Module Width ______________________________________________________________________
Minimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________
Number of Fixed Shelves ____________________________________________________________________________
Number of Adjustable Shelves ________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Side Length ________________________________________________________________________________
Minimum Distance from Floor to Upper _________________________________________________________________
Minimum Distance from Floor to Hood Top ______________________________________________________________
Minimum Distance Floor to Upper over Sink _____________________________________________________________
Height Increment (Standard)__________________________________________________________________________
Access Door Opening Height _________________________________________________________________________
Access Door Opening Width__________________________________________________________________________
BASES
Section Type: (0) Open (1) Door (2) Drawer/Door (3) Drawer bank (4) Desk __________________________________
Door: (0) Pair (1) Pair/Mullion (2) Hinge Left (3) Hinge Right _______________________________________________
Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Height ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Toe Kick Height____________________________________________________________________________________
Toe Kick Depth ____________________________________________________________________________________
Toe Kick: (0) None (1) Attached (2) Detached (3) No Notch [Finished] (4) No Notch [All] _________________________
Toe Kick Butt to Wall End (0) No (1) Yes _______________________________________________________________
Front Toe Kick Finished End Adjustment ________________________________________________________________
Front Toe Kick Wall End Adjustment ___________________________________________________________________
Finished End Toe Kick Depth Adjustment _______________________________________________________________
Optimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________
Maximum Section/Module Width ______________________________________________________________________
Minimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________
Number of Pull-outs ________________________________________________________________________________
5-37
Number of Fixed Shelves ____________________________________________________________________________
Number of Adjustable Shelves ________________________________________________________________________
Height of Drawer over Door __________________________________________________________________________
Pull-Out Side Length________________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Side Length ________________________________________________________________________________
Number of Drawers in Bank __________________________________________________________________________
Height of Drawer No. 1 ______________________________________________________________________________
Height of Drawer No. 2 ______________________________________________________________________________
Height of Drawer No. 3 ______________________________________________________________________________
Height of Drawer No. 4 ______________________________________________________________________________
Height of Drawer No. 5 ______________________________________________________________________________
Height of Drawer No. 6 ______________________________________________________________________________
Height of Drawer No. 7 ______________________________________________________________________________
Height of Drawer No. 8 ______________________________________________________________________________
Drawer No. 1: (1) Single (2) Double (3) False (4) Double False_____________________________________________
Drawer No. 2: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________
Drawer No. 3: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________
Drawer No. 4: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________
Drawer No. 5: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________
Drawer No. 6: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________
Drawer No. 7: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________
Drawer No. 8: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________
Access Door Opening Height _________________________________________________________________________
Access Door Opening Width__________________________________________________________________________
PANTRY CABINETS
Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Height of Bottom Section ____________________________________________________________________________
Number of Fixed Shelves in Upper Section ______________________________________________________________
Number of Adjustable Shelves in Upper Section __________________________________________________________
Number of Pull Outs in Bottom Section _________________________________________________________________
Number of Fixed Shelves in Bottom Section _____________________________________________________________
Number of Adjustable Shelves in Bottom Section _________________________________________________________
SPLIT-LEVEL CABINETS
Overall Height _____________________________________________________________________________________
5-38
Upper Section Depth________________________________________________________________________________
Type: (0) Open (1) Door (2) Drawer/Door (3) Drawer Bank ________________________________________________
CLOSET COMPONENTS
Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Side Length ________________________________________________________________________________
Distance Rod from Wall _____________________________________________________________________________
DESK SECTIONS
Desk Drawer: (0) None (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________
Rail Under Desk Drawer: (0) No (1) Yes________________________________________________________________
Rail Width Under Desk Drawer ________________________________________________________________________
Bottom Below Desk Drawer: (0) No (1) Yes _____________________________________________________________
Extend Back Across Desk Section: (0) No (1) Yes ________________________________________________________
Break Desk Section: (0) No (1) Yes ___________________________________________________________________
FINISHED ENDS
Finished End Type: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Laminated _________________________________________________
Base Cabinet Ends to Appliances: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Laminated _____________________________________
FACE FRAME SIZES
Face Frame Thickness ______________________________________________________________________________
Rail Width ________________________________________________________________________________________
Mullion Width _____________________________________________________________________________________
Mullion Width Between Pair of Doors ___________________________________________________________________
Finished Stile Width ________________________________________________________________________________
Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Wall) ______________________________________________________________________
Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Cabinetl)___________________________________________________________________
Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Appliancel) _________________________________________________________________
Cutting Board Rail Width_____________________________________________________________________________
Recessed Section Stile Width_________________________________________________________________________
Recessed Section Top Rail Width _____________________________________________________________________
Recessed Section Set Stiles Width ____________________________________________________________________
Base Top Rail Width ________________________________________________________________________________
Upper Top Rail Width _______________________________________________________________________________
Base Bottom Rail Width _____________________________________________________________________________
Upper Bottom Rail Width ____________________________________________________________________________
5-39
Upper Return Stile Width ____________________________________________________________________________
Upper Corner Stile Width ____________________________________________________________________________
Base Return Stile Width _____________________________________________________________________________
Base Corner Stile Width _____________________________________________________________________________
Round Base Corner Cabinet: (0) No (1) Yes ____________________________________________________________
Round Upper Corner Cabinet: (0) No (1) Yes____________________________________________________________
Base Return Panel Width ____________________________________________________________________________
Base Return Construction (0-2) _______________________________________________________________________
Upper Return Panel Width ___________________________________________________________________________
Upper Return Construction (0-2)_______________________________________________________________________
Top Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken ___________________________________________________________________
Middle Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken_________________________________________________________________
Bottom Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken ________________________________________________________________
Total Concept Face Frame: (0) No (1) Yes______________________________________________________________
Face Frame Mortise and Tenon Depth __________________________________________________________________
NOTES:
5-40
Frame Construction Parameters
BACKS
Backs on Bases: (0) No (1) Yes ______________________________________________________________________
Backs on Uppers: (0) No (1) Yes _____________________________________________________________________
Backs on Pantry and Special Cabinets: (0) No (1) Yes ____________________________________________________
Back Thickness____________________________________________________________________________________
Rabbet Backs into Finished Ends: (0) No (1) Yes ________________________________________________________
Back Panel Clearance (Finished End - Finished End Cabinet) _______________________________________________
Full Back Height: (0) No (1) Yes ______________________________________________________________________
STRETCHERS
Stretcher Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
Top Stretcher Thickness _____________________________________________________________________________
Number of Top Stretchers____________________________________________________________________________
Top Stretchers: (0) Butts Wall End (1) Over Wall End _____________________________________________________
NAILERS
Upper, Pantry and Special Cabinet: (0) Broken (1) Continuous Nailer_________________________________________
Distance from Face of Nailer to Back of Cabinet __________________________________________________________
Number of Base Nailers _____________________________________________________________________________
Number of Upper Nailers ____________________________________________________________________________
Nailer Thickness ___________________________________________________________________________________
Base Nailer Width __________________________________________________________________________________
Upper Nailer Width _________________________________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Nailer Width ________________________________________________________________
SHELVES
Adjustable Shelf Depth Clearance _____________________________________________________________________
Adjustable Shelf Width Clearance _____________________________________________________________________
Base Fixed Shelf Depth Adjustment ____________________________________________________________________
CLOSETS
Closet Rod Length Adjustment ________________________________________________________________________
5-41
PENINSULAS
Peninsula Cabinet Back Thickness ____________________________________________________________________
Double Backs on Peninsula and Island Cabinets: (0) No (1) Yes_____________________________________________
Peninsula Finish Side Adjustment _____________________________________________________________________
Peninsula Finish Back Adjustment _____________________________________________________________________
CONSTRUCTION
Upper Bottom (0) Butts to Wall Side (1) Under Wall Side (2) Butts to Trimmed Wall Side (3) Under Wall Side No Scribe _
Upper Bottom (0) Butts to (1) Under Finish Side _________________________________________________________
Base Bottom (0) Butts to (1) Under Wall Side ___________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Bottom (0) Butts to (1) Under Wall Side __________________________________________
Base, Pantry and Special Cabinet Bottom (0) Butts to (1) Under Finished Side _________________________________
Tops in Uppers, Pantry and Special Cabinets: (0) No (1) Yes _______________________________________________
Top: (0) Butts to (1) Over Wall Side (2) To Frame Edge ___________________________________________________
Top: (0) Butts to (1) Over Finished Side ________________________________________________________________
Base Partitions Extend to Floor: (0) No (1) Yes __________________________________________________________
Finished Side Inset from Frame Edge __________________________________________________________________
Paneled Finished Ends: (0) Single Side (1) Double Side ___________________________________________________
Bottom/Shelf/Toe Kick/Nailer Clearance_________________________________________________________________
Upper Interior Thickness Adjustment ___________________________________________________________________
Upper Bottom Material: (0) Exterior (1) Interior (2) Laminate _______________________________________________
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENTS
Base Wall Side Height Adjustment _____________________________________________________________________
Upper Wall Side Height Adjustment ____________________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Wall Side Height Adjustment ___________________________________________________
Base Back Height Adjustment ________________________________________________________________________
Upper Back Height Adjustment________________________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Back Height Adjustment _______________________________________________________
DEPTH ADJUSTMENTS
Wall Side Depth Adjustment __________________________________________________________________________
Finish Side Depth Adjustment_________________________________________________________________________
Base Top Depth Adjustment __________________________________________________________________________
Upper, Pantry and Special Cabinet Top Depth Adjustment __________________________________________________
Base, Pantry and Special Cabinet Bottom Depth Adjustment ________________________________________________
Upper Bottom Depth Adjustment ______________________________________________________________________
5-42
LAMINATED ADJUSTMENTS
Oversize Width Value for Laminated Finished Ends _______________________________________________________
Oversize Length Value for Laminated Finished Ends_______________________________________________________
Oversize Width Value for Laminated Upper Bottoms _______________________________________________________
Oversize Length Value for Laminated Upper Bottoms ______________________________________________________
Oversize Width Value for Laminated Finished Backs _______________________________________________________
Oversize Length Value for Laminated Finished Backs ______________________________________________________
HINGE LOCATIONS
Approximate Hinge Location from Top of Opening_________________________________________________________
Approximate Hinge Location from Bottom of Opening ______________________________________________________
CORNER CABINETS
Base Corner Back Support Clearance __________________________________________________________________
Upper Corner Back Support Clearance _________________________________________________________________
Base Left Back Adjustment___________________________________________________________________________
Base Right Back Adjustment _________________________________________________________________________
Upper Left Back Adjustment __________________________________________________________________________
Upper Right Back Adjustment_________________________________________________________________________
Frame Construction: (1-3) ___________________________________________________________________________
Sink Cabinet Outer Stile Width ________________________________________________________________________
Upper Corner Bottom Clearance ______________________________________________________________________
Lazy Susan Corner Stile Width ________________________________________________________________________
Lazy Susan Door Construction: (1-4)___________________________________________________________________
Lazy Susan Door Clearance __________________________________________________________________________
JOINTS DIMENSIONS
Dado Depth_______________________________________________________________________________________
Partition Dado Depth________________________________________________________________________________
Divider Dado Depth_________________________________________________________________________________
Nailer Dado Depth (Finished End) _____________________________________________________________________
Nailer Dado Depth (Wall End)_________________________________________________________________________
Rabbet Depth for Backs (Finished End) ________________________________________________________________
Rabbet Depth for Backs (Wall End) ____________________________________________________________________
Back Inset into Cabinet ______________________________________________________________________________
5-43
SCRIBES
Upper Top Scribe Adjustment_________________________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Top Scribe Adjustment ________________________________________________________
Base Scribe (Cab inet to Wall) ________________________________________________________________________
Base Scribe (Cab inet to Cabinet) _____________________________________________________________________
Base Scribe (Cab inet to Appliance) ____________________________________________________________________
Peninsula Base Return Scribe ________________________________________________________________________
Upper Scribe (Cabinet to Wall) ________________________________________________________________________
Upper Scribe (Cabinet to Cabinet) _____________________________________________________________________
Upper Scribe (Cabinet to Appliance) ___________________________________________________________________
Upper Return Scribe ________________________________________________________________________________
Upper Bottom Rail Lip Adjustment _____________________________________________________________________
Base, Pantry, Special Bottom Rail Lip Adjustment _________________________________________________________
5-44
Door Parameters
DOORS
Description _______________________________________________________________________________________
Door Type: (1) Slab (2)Frame & Panel (3) MDF/RTF (4) Mitered (5) Horizontal Battens (6) Vertical Battens _________
Sub-Contract Doors: Yes No ________________________________________________________________________
Door Panel Material Type (Door Panel Type Screen Number 1-15)____________________________________________
Send Routing to CNC (MDF Only) _____________________________________________________________________
Door Labor _______________________________________________________________________________________
Door Thickness ____________________________________________________________________________________
Door Inset Into Cabinet ______________________________________________________________________________
Clearance Between Pair Of Doors _____________________________________________________________________
Oversize Door Value________________________________________________________________________________
Third Hinge Door Height _____________________________________________________________________________
Number of Panels Front to Back_______________________________________________________________________
Diagonal Cabinet Door Clearance _____________________________________________________________________
DOOR LAMINATE
Front Laminate Type (Number 1-15)_ __________________________________________________________________
Back Laminate Type (Number 1-15)____________________________________________________________________
Oversize Laminate Value ____________________________________________________________________________
ALTERNATE DOOR STYLE
Minimum Door Width _______________________________________________________________________________
Minimum Door Height _______________________________________________________________________________
Style ____________________________________________________________________________________________
UPPERS, PANTRIES AND SPECIAL CABINET DOOR OVERLAPS/REVEALS
Overlap/Reval Tops ________________________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Finished Ends ________________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Unfinished Ends ______________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Vertical Partitions _____________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Horizontal Partitions ___________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Bottoms _____________________________________________________________________________
BASE DOOR OVERLAPS/REVEALS
Overlap/Reveal Tops _______________________________________________________________________________
5-45
Overlap/Reveal Finished Ends ________________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Unfinished Ends ______________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Vertical Partitions _____________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Horizontal Partitions ___________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Bottoms _____________________________________________________________________________
FRAME & PANEL DOOR STYLE
Top Rail Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
Bottom Rail Width __________________________________________________________________________________
Door Stile Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Rail Inset into Stiles ________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Inset into Top Rail_____________________________________________________________________________
Panel Inset into Bottom Rail __________________________________________________________________________
Panel Inset into Stiles ______________________________________________________________________________
Top Rail Shape ____________________________________________________________________________________
Straight Bottom Rails: Yes/No ________________________________________________________________________
Mirrior Top Rail Shape to Bottom Rail: Yes/No ___________________________________________________________
Flip Top Rail Shape to Bottom Rail: Yes/No _____________________________________________________________
Inside Frame Edge _________________________________________________________________________________
Outside Frame Edge________________________________________________________________________________
Raised Panel______________________________________________________________________________________
Middle Rail / Mullion Width ___________________________________________________________________________
Rail / Mullion Cope Depth ____________________________________________________________________________
Panel Inset into Middle Rail __________________________________________________________________________
Panel Texture _____________________________________________________________________________________
No Grain / Vertical Grain / Horizontal Grain ______________________________________________________________
MULTIPLE PANEL DOOR STYLE
Number of Panels Side to Side________________________________________________________________________
Number of Panels Top to Bottom ______________________________________________________________________
Left Panel Ratio to Right Panel________________________________________________________________________
Top Panel Ratio to Bottom Panel ______________________________________________________________________
Reverse Right Panel Ratio: (0) No (1) Yes ______________________________________________________________
Continuous Middle Rails: (0) No (1) Yes _______________________________________________________________
Middle Rail/Mullion Width ____________________________________________________________________________
Middle Rail/Mullion Cope Depth _______________________________________________________________________
Panel Inset into Middle Rails/Mullions __________________________________________________________________
5-46
Drawer Front Parameters
Decription ________________________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Type: (1) Slab (2) Frame & Panel (3) MDF/RTF (4) Mitered (5) Horizontal Battens (6) Vertical Battens_______
Sub Contract Drawers: Yes No_______________________________________________________________________
Panel Material Type: (Drawer Front Type Number 1-10) ____________________________________________________
Drawer Labor _____________________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Thickness __________________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Inset into Cabinet ____________________________________________________________________________
Oversize Drawer Value ______________________________________________________________________________
Number of Panels Front to Back_______________________________________________________________________
DRAWER LAMINATE
Front Laminate Type (Number 1-15) ___________________________________________________________________
Back Laminate Type (Number 1-15)____________________________________________________________________
Oversize Laminate Value ____________________________________________________________________________
ALTERNATE DRAWER STYLE
Minimum Drawer Width______________________________________________________________________________
Minimum Drawer Height _____________________________________________________________________________
Style ____________________________________________________________________________________________
DRAWER FRONT OVERLAPS/REVEALS
Overlap/Reveal Top/Top Rails ________________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Finished Ends ________________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Unfinished Ends ______________________________________________________________________
Overlap Stretcher by Bottom of Drawers ________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Vertical Partitions _____________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Horizontal Partitions ___________________________________________________________________
Overlap/Reveal Bottoms _____________________________________________________________________________
FRAME & PANEL DRAWER FRONT
Drawer Top Rail Width ______________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Bottom Rail Width____________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Stile Width _________________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Rail Inset into Stiles __________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Panel Inset into Top Rail ______________________________________________________________________
Drawer Panel Inset into Bottom Rail ___________________________________________________________________
5-47
Drawer Panel Inset into Stiles_________________________________________________________________________
Inside Frame Edge _________________________________________________________________________________
Outside Frame Edge________________________________________________________________________________
Raised Panel______________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Texture _____________________________________________________________________________________
No Grain / Vertical Grain / Horizontal Grain ______________________________________________________________
NOTES:
5-48
Drawer Box Parameters
Drawer Boxes
Drawer Box Description _____________________________________________________________________________
Sub Contract Drawer Box (0) No (1) Yes _______________________________________________________________
Drawer Slide Clearance (Each Side) ___________________________________________________________________
Drawer Side Height Clearance ________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Side Thickness ______________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Box Sub Front: No / Yes ______________________________________________________________________
Drawer Sub Front Height Clearence____________________________________________________________________
Drawer End Height Clearance ________________________________________________________________________
Drawer End Inset into Sides __________________________________________________________________________
Drawer Bottom Inset into Each Side ____________________________________________________________________
Drawer Bottom Width Clearance ______________________________________________________________________
Drawer Bottom Length Relative to Sides Length __________________________________________________________
Stock Drawer Sides: No / Material / Hardware __________________________________________________________
Use Stock Drawer Side Height No 1____________________________________________________________________
Length ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Slide type ________________________________________________________________________________________
Length ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Slide type ________________________________________________________________________________________
Length ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Slide type ________________________________________________________________________________________
Length ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Slide type ________________________________________________________________________________________
Length ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Slide type ________________________________________________________________________________________
Length ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Slide type ________________________________________________________________________________________
PULL-OUTS
Sub Contract Pull Outs: No / Yes______________________________________________________________________
Pull Out Slide Clearance (Each Side) ___________________________________________________________________
Pull Out Additional Clearance (Hinge Side) ______________________________________________________________
Pull Out Front Width Clearance _______________________________________________________________________
Pull Out Front Height _______________________________________________________________________________
Pull Out Side Height ________________________________________________________________________________
5-49
Pull Out Side Thickness _____________________________________________________________________________
Pull Out Sub Front: No / Yes _________________________________________________________________________
Pull Out Sub Front Height ____________________________________________________________________________
Pull Out End Height ________________________________________________________________________________
Pull Out End Inset into Sides _________________________________________________________________________
Pull Out Bottom Inset into Sides _______________________________________________________________________
Pull Out Bottom Width Clearance ______________________________________________________________________
Pull Out Bottom Length Relative to Sides________________________________________________________________
Distance From Cabinet Bottom to Bottom of First Pullout ___________________________________________________
NOTES:
5-50
End Panel Parameters
Panel Name: ______________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Type _______________________________________________________________________________________
Sub Contract End Panels ____________________________________________________________________________
Panel Material: (Panel Type Number 1-15) ______________________________________________________________
Applied Panel End Price _____________________________________________________________________________
Panel Back Price___________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Thickness ___________________________________________________________________________________
Oversize Panel Value _______________________________________________________________________________
Front Laminate Type________________________________________________________________________________
Back Laminate Type ________________________________________________________________________________
Oversize Laminate Value ____________________________________________________________________________
End Panel Frame Sizes
Base Top Rail Width ________________________________________________________________________________
Base Bottom Rail Width _____________________________________________________________________________
Base Front Stile Width ______________________________________________________________________________
Base Back Stile Width ______________________________________________________________________________
Base Middle Rail/Mullion Width _______________________________________________________________________
Base Rails Inset into Stiles ___________________________________________________________________________
Base Panel Inset into Stiles __________________________________________________________________________
Base Panel Inset into Top Rail ________________________________________________________________________
Base Panel Inset into Bottom Rail _____________________________________________________________________
Base Panel Inset into Middle Rail/Mullion________________________________________________________________
Upper Top Rail Width _______________________________________________________________________________
Upper Bottom Rail Width ____________________________________________________________________________
Upper Front Stile Width______________________________________________________________________________
Upper Back Stile Width ______________________________________________________________________________
Upper Middle Rail/Mullion Width_______________________________________________________________________
Upper Rails Inset into Stiles __________________________________________________________________________
Upper Panel Inset into Stiles__________________________________________________________________________
Upper Panel Inset into Top Rail _______________________________________________________________________
Upper Panel Inset into Bottom Rail_____________________________________________________________________
Upper Panel Inset into Middle Rail/Mullion _______________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Top Rail Width ______________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Bottom Rail Width____________________________________________________________
5-51
Pantry and Special Cabinet Front Stile Width_____________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Back Stile Width _____________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Middle Rail/Mullion Width ______________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Rails Inset into Stiles _________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Panel Inset into Stiles_________________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Panel Inset into Top Rail ______________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Panel Inset into Bottom Rail ____________________________________________________
Pantry and Special Cabinet Panel Inset into Middle Rail/Mullion ______________________________________________
Top Rail Shape ____________________________________________________________________________________
Straight Bottom Rail Yes / No ________________________________________________________________________
Mirrior Top Rail Shape to Bottom Rail Yes / No___________________________________________________________
Flip Top Rail Shape to Bottom Rail Yes / No _____________________________________________________________
Inside Frame Edge _________________________________________________________________________________
Raised Panel Edge _________________________________________________________________________________
Panel Texture _____________________________________________________________________________________
No Grain / Vertical Grain / Horizontal Grain ______________________________________________________________
NOTES:
5-52
Appliance Parameters
REFRIGERATOR
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Height ____________________________________________________________________________________
REFER BOX
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Height ____________________________________________________________________________________
Cabinet Depth ____________________________________________________________________________________
Side on: (0) Left (1) Right (2) Both____________________________________________________________________
UNDERCOUNTER REFER
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
WALL OVEN
Cutout Width ______________________________________________________________________________________
Cutout Height _____________________________________________________________________________________
Distance from Floor to Oven __________________________________________________________________________
Cabinet Depth _____________________________________________________________________________________
UNDERCOUNTER OVEN
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
5-53
FREE STANDING RANGE
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
DROP IN RANGE
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
Bottom Rail Width __________________________________________________________________________________
COOK TOP
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
HOOD
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
MICROWAVE HOOD
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
DISHWASHER
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
5-54
COMPACTOR
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
SINK
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
WASHER
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
DRYER
Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________
Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________
Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________
NOTES:
5-55